JP2018000983A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of improving taste of a game.SOLUTION: The game machine according to the present invention causes number-of-acquired-media acquisition means to acquire the number of acquired media that is a difference between game media used in the game and game media put out by putout means, and causes number-of-acquired-media output means to display or output the number of acquired media. Consequently, in the game in which game media are used, while game media are put out, this configuration can make the player realize not the number of game media that the player has apparently acquired but the number of game media (the number of acquired game media) that the player has actually acquired so as to improve the taste of the game to be played by paying the price.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 25

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine or the like.

  For example, when a starting condition is established, a lottery is given to the gaming machine, and when a predetermined result is selected by the lottery, a special gaming state (for example, a gaming state called a win) is given after the symbol stops. There is something to generate. In addition, for example, after a special gaming state is ended, the gaming machine is in a predetermined advantageous state (for example, a state called probability variation or probability variation, a state called time reduction or time reduction, etc.) for a predetermined period. There is something to generate.

JP 2011-072569 A

  In the gaming machines exemplified above, it is always required to improve the interest of the game.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described circumstances and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of games.

  In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 has a control means for controlling a game based on the use of a game medium, and when a predetermined condition is established during a game controlled by the control means, A payout means for paying out a number of game media according to the established condition, an operation means operable by the player, and an operation for detecting that the operation means has been operated by the player Based on detection of the operation by the operation detection means, detection means, launching means for launching a game medium for use in a game, information based on detection of the operation by the operation detection means, and payout by the payout means Medium acquisition number acquisition means for acquiring a medium acquisition number that is a difference between a game medium used in the game and a game medium paid out by the payout means using information based on And a medium win number outputting means for displaying or outputting the obtained value based on the medium tally by resulting means.

  A gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, further comprising a second operation means operable by a player, wherein the medium acquisition number output means is configured to perform the second operation during a predetermined period. When the means is operated by the player, a value based on the medium acquisition number acquired by the medium acquisition number acquisition means is displayed or output.

  The gaming machine according to claim 3 is the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the control means selects a lottery means for performing lottery when a start condition is established, and a predetermined result is selected by the lottery means. And an advantageous state generating means for generating an advantageous state that is advantageous compared to a normal state, and a variable display executing means for executing a variable display of identification information when a start condition is satisfied, the advantageous state generating means When the first result that is at least a part of the predetermined result is selected by the lottery means, the special game state is set as the advantageous state after the change display by the change display executing means is ended as the advantageous state. Special game state generation means for generating a special game state period is included, and the medium acquisition number acquisition means is formed from one or a plurality of advantageous states generated by the advantageous state generation means. A special game state medium acquisition number acquisition means for acquiring the medium acquisition number during a series of advantageous states and when the special game state is generated by the special game state generation means. The gaming machine includes a special gaming state occurrence number accumulation storage unit that accumulates and stores the number of special gaming states generated by the special gaming state generation unit, and a medium acquisition number acquisition unit during the special gaming state. A special game state medium acquisition number accumulation storage means for accumulating and storing the acquired medium acquisition number, and the medium acquisition number output means is operated by the player by the second operation means during a predetermined period. The number of medium acquisitions stored in the medium acquisition number cumulative storage means during the special gaming state, and the special gaming state stored in the special gaming state occurrence number cumulative storage means. Based on the number, the media acquisition count per the special game state, is to display or output.

  The gaming machine according to claim 4 is the game machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein the control means is a lottery means for performing a lottery when a start condition is satisfied, and a predetermined result is selected by the lottery means. In addition, an advantageous state generating means for generating an advantageous advantageous state as compared with the normal state, and a variation display executing means for executing a variation display of the identification information when the starting condition is satisfied, the advantageous state generating means, When the second result which is at least a part of the predetermined result is selected by the lottery means, the game mode is set to a mode more advantageous than the normal mode at a predetermined timing, and the mode is set to the predetermined mode. An advantageous mode generating means for generating over a period, wherein the medium acquisition number acquiring means is during the series of advantageous states and is generated by the advantageous mode generating means. In the advantageous mode, and when the variable display is executed by the variable display execution means, the medium acquisition number acquisition means in the advantageous mode for acquiring the medium acquisition number, , The advantageous mode medium fluctuation number accumulation storage means for accumulating and storing the number of times of the variable display executed by the variable display execution means in the advantageous mode generated by the advantageous mode generation means, and the medium acquisition during the advantageous mode An advantageous mode medium acquisition number accumulating storage means for accumulating and storing the medium acquisition number acquired by the number acquisition means, and the medium operation number output means is configured such that the second operation means plays a game during a predetermined period. The medium acquisition number stored in the advantageous mode medium acquisition number accumulating storage means and the advantageous mode fluctuation number accumulation storage means when stored by the user. Based on the number of the variable display, the media acquisition count per the variable display during the advantageous mode is for displaying or outputting.

  According to the gaming machine of claim 1, the medium acquisition number that is the difference between the game medium used in the game and the game medium paid out by the payout means is acquired by the medium acquisition number acquisition means, and the medium acquisition number output means Is displayed or output. Therefore, in games where game media is used on the one hand and game media is paid out on the other hand, the number of game media actually acquired by the player, not the number of game media that the player has apparently acquired through payout (In other words, the number of acquired media, which is the difference between the used game media and the game media paid out by the payout means) can be realized by the player. In general, the game media used to play a game are paid by the player, so that the player can realize the number of media acquired in the game performed using the game media. There is an effect that it is possible to enhance the interest of games (games performed using game media obtained by paying a consideration).

  In addition, according to the gaming machine of the first aspect, it is configured such that a game medium is fired based on the detection of the operation of the operation means by the operation detection means, and the number of medium acquisition is the number of operations performed by the operation detection means. Since it is acquired based on information based on detection and information based on payout by the payout means, the number of medium acquisitions can be acquired with suitable accuracy, and the reliability of the number of medium acquisitions displayed or output can be improved. Can do. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from having distrust in the number of medium acquisitions displayed or output.

  According to the gaming machine of the second aspect, in addition to the effect of the first aspect, the following effect is achieved. The medium acquisition number acquired by the medium acquisition number acquisition means is displayed or output by the medium acquisition number output means when the player operates the second operation means during a predetermined period. Therefore, a value based on the number of game media actually acquired by the player (that is, the number of acquired media) can be reported to the player at a timing desired by the player in a predetermined period. As a result, it becomes possible to select a stand that the user can be satisfied on the basis of a value (a value based on the number of acquired media) displayed by the user operating the second operation means as necessary. It is possible to play a game that satisfies the requirements, and to enhance the interest of the game that the engineer pays for.

  According to the gaming machine of the third aspect, in addition to the effect of the first or second aspect, the following effect can be achieved. Since the media acquisition number during the series of advantageous states formed from one or more advantageous states is acquired by the medium acquisition number acquisition means, the medium acquisition number during the series of advantageous states is acquired. It can be displayed or output by numerical output means. The advantageous state is a state that is more advantageous than the normal state and is also advantageous to the player, so that the player can balance the game media during the series of such advantageous states (that is, the number of acquired media). By displaying and referring to the value based on this, there is an effect that it becomes possible to select a more advantageous stand (game machine) by itself.

  Further, when the player operates the second operation means, the number of acquired media per time in the special gaming state (one of the advantageous states) at that timing is displayed or output. In particular, the number of medium acquisitions displayed or output is accumulated and stored in the number of special gaming states accumulated in the special gaming state occurrence number accumulating storage means and in the medium acquisition number accumulating storage means in the special gaming state. Acquired based on the number of acquired media (the number of acquired media during the special gaming state by the means for acquiring the number of acquired media), so that the acquired media is displayed or output as the accumulated data increases. The number (the number of acquired media per special game state) has an effect of making it possible to determine a more advantageous stand by itself with higher accuracy.

  According to the gaming machine of the fourth aspect, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the first to third aspects, the following effect is produced. Since the media acquisition number during the series of advantageous states formed from one or more advantageous states is acquired by the medium acquisition number acquisition means, the medium acquisition number during the series of advantageous states is acquired. It can be displayed or output by numerical output means. The advantageous state is a state that is more advantageous than the normal state and is also advantageous to the player, so that the player can balance the game media during the series of such advantageous states (that is, the number of acquired media). By displaying and referring to the value based on this, there is an effect that it becomes possible to select a more advantageous stand (game machine) by itself.

  Further, when the player operates the second operating means, the number of medium acquisitions that can be acquired per change display in the advantageous mode at that timing (that is, once the start condition is satisfied) is displayed or output. Is done. In particular, the number of medium acquisitions displayed or output includes the number of variable displays executed in the advantageous mode accumulated and stored in the advantageous mode fluctuation number accumulating storage means, and the advantageous mode medium acquisition number accumulating storage means. Is acquired based on the number of medium acquisitions accumulated and stored (the number of medium acquisitions acquired by the medium acquisition number acquisition means during the advantageous mode). The output medium acquisition number (the number of medium acquisitions that can be acquired per change display in the advantageous mode) has an effect of making it possible to determine a more advantageous platform by itself more accurately.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a front view of a game board. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a schematic diagram for demonstrating the display screen of a 3rd symbol display apparatus. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the outline | summary of various counters. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of RAM of an effect control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation process performed in the main process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the reservation ball | bowl storage area forward transfer process performed in the fluctuation | variation process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the change start process performed in the change process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of the fluctuation | variation completion performed in the fluctuation | variation process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot process performed in the main process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed in the timer interruption process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the discharge control process performed in the timer interruption process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows a NMI interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU in a payout control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in a payout control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU in an effect control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in an effect control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the audio | voice lamp effect process performed in the main process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the display effect process performed in the main process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the acquired number-of-balls display process performed in the main process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the command reception interruption process performed by MPU in an effect control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of jackpot completion performed in the command reception interruption process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of the end of probability change performed in the command reception interruption process of FIG. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing a time-saving end process executed in the command reception interrupt process of FIG. 26. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of the fluctuation | variation start performed in the command reception interruption process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the payout ball number count process performed in the command reception interruption process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the discharge control signal interruption process performed by MPU in an effect control apparatus. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of RAM273 of the production | presentation control apparatus 117 in the modification of 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the command reception interruption process in the modification of 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of the change start in the modification of 1st Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of RAM of the presentation control apparatus of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the audio lamp effect process of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the number-of-acquisition display process during waiting for a waiting effect performed in the voice lamp effect process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the acquired ball number display process of 2nd Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of RAM of the presentation control apparatus of 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the acquired ball number display process of 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of the end of probability change of 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the processing at the time-short end of 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the payout ball | bowl count process of 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the discharge control signal interruption process of 3rd Embodiment.

  Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed of a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball ball game is performed when the ball flows down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 has a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 5) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower dish unit 15 that covers the lower side of the front frame 14 are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower dish unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. 14 and the lower pan unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and a window part 14c that is formed in an approximately elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central part thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be seen on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16. On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 that stores balls is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes forward and the upper surface is opened, and prize balls and rental balls are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the sphere thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launch unit 112a by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. This frame button 22 is used by the player when, for example, changing the effect pattern of the variable display (variation effect) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or changing the effect content at the reach effect. Operated.

  In addition, the front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the periphery (for example, a corner portion). These light-emitting means play a role of enhancing the effect of the game during the game by changing or controlling the light-emitting mode by turning on or flashing according to the change in the gaming state at the time of big hit or predetermined reach. On the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 incorporating light emitting means such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these lighting parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and the lighting parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking of the built-in LEDs at the time of jackpot or reach effects. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is being hit or that the reach is one step before the jackpot.

  Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has built-in light emitting means such as LEDs and can display the payout of a prize ball and when an error occurs. In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, on the lower side of the right illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) is visible from the front surface of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin that is chrome-plated is attached to an area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42 and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state where a bill or a card is inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, Loans are made. That is, a ball used for a game is lent out when the player pays a consideration such as a bill. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining amount as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. In addition, in a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of the parts so that the component configuration is common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing a ball that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape having an open upper surface. Yes. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 that is operated by a player to drive a ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is disposed, and the operation of the ball launching unit 112a is permitted inside the operation handle 51. Touch sensor 51a (refer to FIG. 5), a push button type stop switch 51b (refer to FIG. 5) for stopping the launch of the sphere during the pressing operation, and the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. A variable resistor 51c (see FIG. 5) that detects the change in electrical resistance is incorporated.

  When the player rotates the operation handle 51 clockwise without operating the stop switch 51b, the touch sensor 51a is turned on, and the resistance value of the variable resistor 51c changes according to the amount of rotation operation, and is variable. A sphere is launched with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the resistor 51c. As a result, a ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 by the player. Note that in a state where the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

  In the lower part of the front of the lower plate 50, a ball removal lever 52 is provided for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. The ball removal lever 52 is always urged in the right direction. By sliding the ball release lever 52 in the left direction against the urge, the bottom opening formed in the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as “a thousand box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of ball nails, windmills and rails 61 and 62, a general winning opening 63, The ball entrance 64, the variable winning device 65, the second ball entrance 67 (through gate), the variable display device unit 80, and the like are assembled, and the peripheral edge thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. In FIG. 2, a part of a nail, a metal fitting, or the like is deleted and illustrated for easy understanding of the reference numerals. The general winning port 63, the first winning port 64, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and the wood screw is provided from the front side of the game board 13. It is fixed by etc. Further, the front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). Below, the structure of the game board 13 is demonstrated.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and the strip-shaped metal plate is located on the inner side of the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and rear. A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a front surface of the game board 13 and is a substantially circular area formed by dividing the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 (a winning hole or the like is provided, Falling area).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launching unit 112a to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the front end portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the sphere, and the ball launched at a predetermined momentum or more hits the return rubber 69 and gains momentum. Is bounced back to the center while being attenuated. A resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62 is a base. The plate 60 is driven and fixed.

  A first symbol display device 37 for mainly displaying the first symbol is disposed on the upper right side of the game area as viewed from the front (upper right side in FIG. 2). The first symbol display device 37 is provided with a 7-segment LED 37a, an LED 37b, and the like. The 7-segment LED 37a is used for displaying the number of rounds during the big hit game and displaying an error.

  On the other hand, the LED 37b is composed of a three-color light emitting diode (three-color LED) having red, green, and blue emission colors, and displays the first symbol by its lighting color (lighting mode). Specifically, each time the ball wins the first entrance 64, the color change display (variation display) of the LED 37b is performed, and the first symbol (that is, the lighting color of the LED 37b) when the variation display is stopped. The winning lottery result made by the main controller 110 (see FIGS. 3 and 5) triggered by winning at the first entrance 64 is displayed deterministically.

  More specifically, when the ball wins the first entrance 64, the LED 37b displays the three-color LEDs in a color change display (variation display) at a high speed in the order of red → green → blue → red →. When elapses, it is fixedly displayed in one of the colors. When the big hit lottery is won, the LED 37b is fixedly displayed in red or green (for example, stopped for several seconds).

  In particular, the confirmation display in red indicates that the winning jackpot type is “probable jackpot”. When the LED 37b is displayed in red, the game mode after the special gaming state (big win) is over, the jackpot probability of the jackpot lottery is higher than the normal probability, and the hit probability of the second symbol described later is the normal probability. The higher probability mode (probability variation mode, probability variation mode) is improved.

  On the other hand, the confirmation display in green indicates that the winning jackpot type is “ordinary jackpot”. When the LED 37b is displayed in green, the game mode after the special gaming state is ended, the jackpot probability of the jackpot lottery is a normal probability, but the time reduction mode in which the hit probability of the second symbol is higher than the normal probability (Time reduction mode).

  In addition, in the high probability mode and the time reduction mode, instead of changing the winning probability of the second symbol, the time for opening the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 It is good also as what changes the frequency | count that an electric accessory opens | releases per hit.

  Further, when the jackpot lottery is not won, that is, when the result of the jackpot lottery is “out”, the LED 37b is fixedly displayed in blue. When the LED 37b is confirmed and displayed in blue, the game mode after the special game state is ended is a normal mode in which the jackpot probability of the jackpot lottery and the hit probability of the second symbol are both normal probabilities.

  In addition to the LED 37a and LED 37b described above, the first symbol display device 37 is provided with a plurality of LEDs (not shown) for notifying various information. Whether the plurality of LEDs are in the gaming mode of the pachinko machine 10 (for example, whether it is a high probability mode, a time reduction mode, a normal mode, etc.), or whether a variation is being displayed (during variation). No., the number of times that the winning of the ball to the first entrance 64 (pending) is put on hold, etc. are notified by the lighting state.

  The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning openings 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In addition, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 includes a third liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “LCD”) that displays the third symbol in a variable manner with a winning (winning) to the first entrance 64 as a trigger. A symbol display device 81, a second symbol display portion 83 composed of LEDs that variably display the second symbol triggered by the passage of a sphere at the second entrance 67 (through gate), and a second entrance 67 ( There is provided a second symbol holding lamp 84 indicating the number of balls held through the through gate).

  The display content of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by an effect control device 117 (see FIG. 5), which will be described later, and, for example, three symbol rows of left, middle, and right are displayed. Each symbol row is constituted by a plurality of third symbols, and these third symbols are scrolled horizontally for each symbol row so that the third symbols are variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. (See FIG. 4 (a)). In the present embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 is constituted by a large 8-inch liquid crystal display, and the variable display device unit 80 surrounds the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81 so as to surround the center frame. 86 is arranged. In the present embodiment, in the first symbol display device 37, the gaming state accompanying the control of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 5) and the display of the first symbol indicating the lottery result (lighting of the LED 37b) are displayed. On the other hand, a decorative display (variation effect) according to the display of the first symbol is performed on the third symbol display device 81. Instead of the LCD, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment has various stop symbols (for example, the first symbol indicating the probability variation jackpot, the first symbol indicating the normal jackpot) in the first symbol display device 37 after the lottery lottery is started. If any of the balls wins (enters) the first entrance 64 before displaying any one of the first symbols indicating disengagement, the maximum number of winning (entrance) is 4 Hold until times. The number of holding times is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 as described above, and is also indicated by the number of lights of the special figure holding lamp 85. Hereinafter, the number of holdings for the first entrance 64 may be referred to as a special figure holding ball number N. Four special figure holding lamps 85 are provided corresponding to the maximum number of holding times, and are arranged above the third symbol display device 81.

  In the present embodiment, it is configured so that the winning at the first entrance 64 is held up to four times at maximum, but the maximum number of times of holding (that is, the maximum value that the special figure holding ball number N can take) It is not limited to four times, and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). Also, the special figure holding lamp 85 is deleted, and the variable display holding number based on the winning at the first entrance 64 is numerically displayed on a part of the third symbol display device 81 or divided into four areas. May be displayed in a different form (for example, color or lighting pattern) by the number of times of holding. Further, when the number of holding times is displayed on the first symbol display device 37, the special figure holding lamp 85 may not be provided.

  Each time the sphere passes through the second entrance 67 (through gate), the second symbol display unit 83 alternates between the symbol “◯” and the symbol “X” as the display symbol (second symbol). The variable display to light is performed. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when the variable display on the second symbol display unit 83 stops at a predetermined symbol (“◯” symbol), the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is only for a predetermined time. It is configured to be in an open state so that the ball can easily enter the first entrance 64.

  The number of passes through the second entrance 67 (through gate) of the ball is held up to a maximum of 4 times, and the number of hold times is lit and displayed on the second symbol hold lamp 84. Note that the variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display unit 83 as in this embodiment, as well as the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol. Alternatively, a part of the display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the number of balls held for the second entrance 67 (through gate) is not limited to the maximum number of 4 times as in the case of the number of holds for the first entrance 64, and is 3 times or less. Alternatively, the number may be set to 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Moreover, it is good also as a structure which displays the holding | maintenance count of the ball | bowl about the 2nd entrance 67 using LED provided in the 1st symbol display apparatus 37. FIG. When displaying the number of times the ball is held for the second entrance 67 on the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81, the second symbol hold lamp 84 may not be provided.

  Below the variable display device unit 80, a first entrance 64 into which a sphere can enter is disposed. When a ball enters the first entrance 64, the first entrance switch 208a (see FIG. 5) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first entrance switch 208a is turned on. Then, the main control device 110 performs a lottery lottery, the first symbol stop symbol corresponding to the lottery result is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 (LED 37b), and the display of the first symbol display device 37 is displayed. A decorative display corresponding to the is displayed by the third symbol display device 81.

  The first entrance 64 is also one of the entrances through which 5 balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters the first entrance 64 and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters the general prize opening 63 are calculated. Although it is configured the same, different numbers may be used. For example, the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters the first entrance 64 may be 20.

  A variable winning device 65 is disposed below the first ball opening 64, and a horizontally-long rectangular specific winning port (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery in the main controller 110 is a big hit, after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) has elapsed, the LED 37b of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on so as to become a big hit stop symbol. At the same time, a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special gaming state, the special winning opening 65a that is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (in this embodiment, until 30 seconds elapse or 10 balls are won).

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed when a predetermined time elapses, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 16 times (16 rounds), for example. The state in which the opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state advantageous to the player, and the player is given a gaming value (game value) from a normal time (non-special gaming state). A lot of prize balls are paid out.

  Specifically, the variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally-long rectangular opening / closing plate covering the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid for opening / closing driving forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis (shown in FIG. 5). Part of the solenoid 209). The special winning opening 65a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball is easy to win the specific winning opening 65a. It operates to repeat the state and the state alternately.

  The special game state is not limited to the above-described form. When the game area is provided with a large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a, and the LED 37b of the first symbol display device 37 is lit in a manner corresponding to the jackpot, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, A special game in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning port 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball wins into the specific winning port 65a while the specific winning port 65a is opened. You may make it form as a state.

  Adhesive spaces K1 and K2 for adhering certificate stamps, identification labels, and the like are provided at the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13. It can be visually recognized through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball that has not entered any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a is guided through an out port 66 to a ball discharge path (not shown). A number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (instruments) such as a windmill are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110) and an effect control board (effect control device 117). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control apparatus 111), a firing control board (launching control apparatus 112), a power supply board (power supply apparatus 115), and a card unit connection board 116. Yes.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 and a dispensing unit 93 that form a protective cover. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as necessary.

  The main control device 110, the effect control device 117, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are accommodated.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover so that they cannot be opened by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). Consolidated). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to cover the box base and the box cover. This seal seal is made of a brittle material. If the seal is to be peeled off in order to open the substrate boxes 100, 102, or if the substrate boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are removed. Cut to the side. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal.

  The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 that is located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out a ball by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 5). ing. Balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished to the tank 130, and a required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated, for example, to eliminate ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball clogging in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 5). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 4, the display content displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is demonstrated. FIG. 4A and FIG. 4B are schematic diagrams for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81.

  As shown in FIG. 4A, the third symbol is composed of 10 kinds of main symbols composed of 10 kinds of character symbols corresponding to the numbers from “0” to “9”, and 1 formed smaller than this main symbol. It is composed of different types of sub-patterns (in this embodiment, shell picture patterns). These main symbols and sub symbols constitute a symbol row (virtual symbol reel) by arranging the main symbols in ascending or descending order of numbers and arranging the sub symbols between the main symbols.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result by the main control device 110 is a big hit, a variable display is performed in which the same main symbols are aligned and stopped, and after the variable display (that is, the same After the main symbols are aligned and stopped, the jackpot is configured to occur. When shifting to the high probability mode (probability variation mode) after the big hit, the variable display in which the main symbols to which odd numbers are added (corresponding to “high probability symbols”) stops together. On the other hand, when shifting to the normal mode after the big hit, the variable display is performed in which the main symbols to which the even numbers are added (corresponding to “normal symbols”) are stopped.

  In this embodiment, the variation direction of the symbol is the horizontal direction X, and in the variation in the horizontal direction (horizontal scrolling), each symbol row includes three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 of upper, middle, and lower. The third symbol is displayed in three stages of left, middle and right for each symbol row (Z1 to Z3). Accordingly, the third symbol display device 81 displays a total of nine third symbols of 3 rows × 3 columns. Here, the upper symbol row Z1 is arranged so that the numbers corresponding to the main symbol row appear in descending order, and the middle symbol row Z2 and the lower symbol row Z3 are arranged so that the numbers of the main symbol appear in ascending order. ing.

  Five effective lines are set on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 4A, five lines of a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a right rising line L4, and a left rising line L5 are set as effective lines.

  When a ball enters the first entrance 64 (wins) and a variation display is performed that scrolls in a predetermined variation direction (lateral direction X in this embodiment), the variation display is performed after a predetermined variation time. The upper symbol sequence Z1 → the lower symbol sequence Z3 → the middle symbol sequence Z2 are stopped in this order. At this time, if a combination of jackpot symbols (in this embodiment, the same main symbol combination) stops on one of the active lines, a jackpot is generated, and a jackpot video (a jackpot effect is produced during the jackpot game). ) Is displayed.

  In the present embodiment, the changing direction (scrolling direction) is the horizontal direction X, but the changing direction may be the vertical direction (that is, the direction orthogonal to the horizontal direction X). When the change direction is the vertical direction (vertical scroll), the effective line is the upper line (Z1 line in FIG. 4A), middle line (Z2 line in FIG. 4A), lower line ( A line Z3 in FIG. 4A), a right rising line L4, and a left rising line L5 may be used. In the case of vertical scrolling, for example, the variable display is stopped in the order of left symbol row L1 '→ right symbol row L3 → middle symbol row L2.

  Further, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to form an acquired ball number display area 81a in the upper right area of the screen of the third symbol display device 81, as shown in FIG. 4 (b). The acquired ball number display area 81a includes the number of award balls paid out from the pachinko machine 10 (hereinafter referred to as “the number of payout balls”) and the balls used in the game (that is, the front surface of the game board 13). This is an area for displaying the balance (difference) with the number of balls struck in). In the following, the balance between the number of paid-out balls and the balls used for the game is referred to as “number of acquired balls”.

  In the acquired ball number display area 81a, various acquired ball numbers are displayed at timings defined respectively. In the example shown in FIG. 4B, the total acquired number of balls 81a1 is displayed in the acquired number of balls display area 81a. In FIG. 4B, the display contents other than the acquired ball number display area 81a are omitted. As will be described in detail later, the total number of acquired balls 81a1 is the number of acquired balls during a series of advantageous periods (hereinafter, this acquired number of balls is referred to as “total number of acquired balls”). After the transition to the time reduction mode, the acquired ball number display area 81a is displayed at the timing when the first variation display is started.

  The “advantageous state” is a state advantageous to the player. In the present embodiment, the game state is a special game state (big hit) and the game mode is a high probability mode or a time reduction mode. It consists of. The “period of advantageous state” means the period from the start of the special gaming state that occurred in the normal mode to the end of the high probability mode or the time shortening mode according to the end condition defined by the number of executions of the variable display. It is a period in which one or more advantageous states occur continuously.

  In FIG. 4B, the total acquired ball number 81a1 is illustrated as the acquired ball number displayed in the acquired ball number display area 81a. However, as the acquired ball number displayed in the acquired ball number display area 81a, In addition to the total number of acquired balls 81 a 1, for example, the number of acquired balls in one jackpot period (hereinafter, this acquired number of balls is referred to as “the number of hit balls in the current jackpot”) or during a series of advantageous states In addition, the average value of the number of acquired balls in each jackpot (hereinafter referred to as “the average number of acquired balls in the jackpot”), each high probability mode and each time reduction mode that occurred during a series of advantageous states There is an average value of the number of acquired balls (hereinafter, this acquired number of balls will be referred to as “average number of acquired balls during probability variation”).

  The display of the acquired number of balls in the acquired number of balls display area 81a is an image of a transparent background in which the acquired number of balls to be displayed (total acquired number of balls 81a1, etc.) is displayed in the acquired number of balls display area 81a at the display timing. Is performed by superimposing the image on the image being displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  According to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the number of acquired balls such as the total acquired number of balls 81a1 is displayed in the acquired ball number display area 81a, so that the balance of balls in the game (that is, the number of acquired balls) Can be realized by the player. If the player is able to obtain a sufficient number of balls, he can increase the interest of the game he / she is using with the balls he / she has paid for, thereby satisfying the game. The degree can be increased.

  Generally, for gaming machines such as pachinko machines, it is always required to improve the interest of the game so that the satisfaction of the player can be increased. In response to this request, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as described above, the number of acquired balls such as the total number of acquired balls 81a1 is displayed in the acquired ball number display area 81a. Interest can be raised, and the player's satisfaction with the game can be increased.

  On the other hand, when compared with pachinko machines having the same specifications, the balance of balls (that is, the number of acquired balls) mainly varies depending on the degree of nail adjustment. Therefore, the numerical value of the number of acquired balls can be an index for the player to select a platform that is more advantageous to the player. For this reason, when the number of acquired balls displayed in the acquired ball number display area 81a is a value that is not very sufficient for the player, the pachinko machine 10 in the game is changed to another pachinko machine that is more advantageous to itself. It is also possible. As a result, the player can use the pachinko machine that he / she understands and selects, so that the player can play a satisfactory game.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing a configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The main control device 110 controls the operation of the entire pachinko machine 10, and sends various commands to sub-control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the effect control device 117, and controls the operation of the sub-control device. To do. Various commands transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device only in one direction. Note that a command indicating the state of the sub control device may be transmitted from the sub control device to the main control device 110.

  The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A RAM 203, counters C1 to C4, CS1 to CS3, and CINI1 to CINI2, which will be described later, and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 6, the reserved ball storage area, the counter buffer, the counters C1 to C4, CS1 to CS3, CINI1 to CINI2, and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described. . FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram showing an outline of each counter.

  The reserved ball storage area, the counter buffer, the counters C1 to C4, CS1 to CS3, CINI1 to CINI2, and the like are used for jackpot determination, display setting of the first symbol display device 37, and display of the second symbol display unit 83. It is used by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 to perform a lottery of the results.

  For the jackpot lottery or display setting of the first symbol display device 37, the first hit random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery, the first hit type symbol counter C2 used for the jackpot symbol selection, and the stop pattern selection counter C3, a first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the first random number counter C1, and variation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 used for variation pattern selection are used. The second symbol random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the second symbol display unit 83, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second symbol random number counter C4. Each time these counters are updated, 1 is added to the previous value and a loop counter that returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each of these counters C1 to C4, CS1 to CS3, and CINI1 to CINI2 is at an interval of 4 ms, which is an execution interval of the main process (see FIG. 9), or at an interval of 2 ms, which is an execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15). The updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer provided in a work area (not shown) of the RAM 203. When executing the various control programs, when the values of the counters C1 to C4, CS1 to CS3, and CINI1 to CINI2 are referred to, the values of the counters stored in the counter buffer are referred to. Is done.

  The reserved ball storage area is a memory for storing the values of the counters C1 to C3 in accordance with the winning timing when the ball wins (wins) the first entrance 64. In this reserved ball storage area, four reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) are stored so that the data (values of the counters C1 to C3) acquired at the ball winning timing can be stored up to four times. ) And one execution area referred to in the change start process (see FIG. 12).

  In each of the four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) in the holding ball storage area, an area for storing the value of the first random number counter C1 and the value of the first type counter C2 are stored. And an area for storing the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3. In the present embodiment, three areas in which the values of the counters C1 to C3 are stored are provided in each reserved area in one reserved ball storage area, but a plurality of reserved ball storage areas are provided. These three areas may be divided into a plurality of reserved ball storage areas and stored. For example, a part (one or two areas) of three areas for storing the values of the counters C1 to C3 is provided in one of the two reserved ball storage areas, and the remaining areas are provided. You may comprise so that it may provide in the other holding ball storage area.

  As described above, in the reserved ball storage area, data (values of the counters C1 to C3) acquired at the timing when the ball has won the first entrance 64 can be stored up to four times. In the case of storing the data of the times, the data in order from the area with the smaller area number (first to fourth) among the vacant areas of the four reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) Is memorized. That is, the data corresponding to the winnings that are older in time are stored in the reserved area having a smaller area number. Therefore, data corresponding to the oldest winning in terms of time is stored in the reserved first area.

  The execution area in the reserved ball storage area includes an area for storing the value of the first random number counter C1, an area for storing the value of the first hit type counter C2, and a value of the stop pattern selection counter C3. An area for storage is provided. In a variation process (see FIG. 10) described later, data (values of the counters C1 to C3) stored in the reserved first area of the reserved ball storage area are referred to after being shifted to the execution area. Based on this, the lottery result is determined. Then, the variable display and the stop display corresponding to the lottery result are performed on the first symbol display device 37 (LED 37b) or the like.

  Next, each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is configured so that, for example, 1 is added in order within a range of 0 to 738, and after reaching the maximum value (that is, 738), it returns to 0. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first per-random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 738), and executes timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 15). It is updated once every time and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 9).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the stored ball is stored in the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. The area is stored in the corresponding area in the empty reserved area having the smallest area number in the reserved ball storage area. In the present embodiment, the number of random numbers that are jackpots is the normal probability in the normal mode or the time shortening mode (when the jackpot probability is normal) and the high probability mode (when the jackpot probability is higher than normal). Two types of status) are set. There are two types of random numbers that are jackpots at normal probability (when the jackpot probability is normal), and the values are “373, 727”. On the other hand, there are 13 types of random numbers that are jackpots at a high probability (a state in which the jackpot probability is higher than usual), and the values are “59, 109, 163, 211, 263, 317, 367, 421, 479, 523. , 631, 683, 733 ". It should be noted that a table (not shown) that stores a random number value for determining whether or not a big hit is obtained from the value (random number value) of the first random number counter C1 is provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110.

  The first hit type counter C2 is a counter for determining the big hit type. In the present embodiment, the jackpot types determined by the first jackpot type counter C2 include jackpots that become a high probability mode after the jackpot end (probable variation jackpots) and jackpots that enter the time reduction mode after the jackpot end (normal jackpots). Yes, one of these two types of jackpot types is determined according to the value of the first hit type counter C2 obtained at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64.

  In the present embodiment, the first hit type counter C2 is configured so that 1 is sequentially added within a range of 0 to 4, and after reaching the maximum value (that is, 4), it returns to 0. The value of the first hit type counter C2 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interruption process in FIG. 15 described later), and at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. , Stored in the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 203, more specifically, the corresponding area in the empty reserved area with the smallest area number in the reserved ball storage area. In the present embodiment, the value of the random number that becomes the jackpot that becomes a high probability mode after the jackpot ends (probability jackpot) is “1, 2, 3”, and the jackpot that becomes the time reduction mode after the jackpot ends (normal jackpot) The value of the random number that becomes “0” is “0, 4”. A table that stores random values for determining whether the jackpot that becomes the high probability mode after the jackpot ends or the jackpot that becomes the time reduction mode after the jackpot ends, from the value (random number value) of the first hit type counter C2 (see FIG. (Not shown) is provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110.

  In the present embodiment, among the data (the values of the counters C1 to C3) acquired at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64, it is determined as “big hit” based on the value of the first random number counter C1. In addition, when it is determined based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 that “the jackpot which becomes the high probability mode after the jackpot is finished”, the jackpot becomes the “probable change jackpot”. On the other hand, when it is determined that “big hit” is based on the value of the first hit random number counter C1 and “hit is set to the time reduction mode after the big hit” is determined based on the value of the first hit type counter C2, The jackpot is a “normal jackpot”.

  Therefore, based on the value of the first per-random number counter C1 and the value of the first per-type counter C2, a display mode corresponding to two types of big hits (probability big hit or normal big hit), and one type of display corresponding to losing One of the three display modes in total with the mode is selected as the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37.

  Note that the “probability jackpot” in the present embodiment is a jackpot in which the game mode becomes the high probability mode after the jackpot with the maximum number of rounds of 16 rounds until a predetermined end condition is satisfied (16 round probability jackpot). Jackpot). In this embodiment, the end condition of the high probability mode is when a big hit (probable big hit or normal big hit) occurs next, or when a predetermined number of fluctuations (10000 fluctuations in this embodiment) has elapsed. It is said.

  In the high probability mode, the jackpot probability of the first symbol is set to a high probability (probability higher than the normal probability), and the hit probability of the second symbol is also a predetermined number of fluctuations (in this embodiment, 100 fluctuations). The interval is assumed to be higher than the normal probability. In the present embodiment, in the high probability mode, the hit probability of the second symbol is set to a high probability only for a predetermined number of fluctuations. However, the hit probability of the second symbol is set as the end condition of the high probability mode. You may comprise so that it may remain high probability until it is materialized. Further, in the present embodiment, the termination condition of the high probability mode is the case where the predetermined number of fluctuations has passed or the case where the next jackpot occurs, but it may be only the case where the next jackpot occurs.

  In addition, the “ordinary jackpot” in the present embodiment is a jackpot in which the game mode is set to the time reduction mode until a predetermined end condition is satisfied after the jackpot having the maximum number of rounds of 16 rounds (16 round normal mode). Jackpot). In this embodiment, the end condition of the time reduction mode is when a predetermined number of fluctuations (in this embodiment, 100 fluctuations) has passed, or when a big hit (probability big hit, normal big hit) occurs next. It is said.

  In the time shortening mode, the jackpot probability of the first symbol is a normal probability, but the hit probability of the second symbol is higher than the normal probability. In the present embodiment, the termination condition of the time reduction mode is set to the case where the predetermined number of fluctuations has passed or the case where the next big hit occurs, but the predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations) has passed. It is good only if you do.

  In the present embodiment, the maximum number of rounds of “probability jackpot” or “ordinary jackpot” is 16 rounds, but the maximum number of rounds is not limited to 16 rounds, but various values (for example, 7 rounds, 15 rounds, etc.) ). In this embodiment, the maximum number of rounds for “probable jackpot” and the maximum number of rounds for “normal jackpot” are both 16 rounds, but the maximum number of rounds is different for “probability jackpot” and “normal jackpot”. May be. For example, the maximum number of rounds for “probable jackpot” may be 16 rounds, and the maximum number of rounds for “normal jackpots” may be 7 rounds.

  The stop pattern selection counter C3 is, for example, incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 238, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 238). In the present embodiment, the stop pattern selection counter C3 selects the effect pattern displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and after reaching, the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol and stopped. “Rear out of front / rear” (for example, in the range of 0 to 8), and “Leach other than out of front / rear out of reach” (for example, in the range of 9 to 38) after the occurrence of reach, and the final stop symbol is stopped before and after the reach symbol Three stop patterns (a mode of a display result of dynamic display) are selected as “completely out” (for example, a range of 39 to 238) in which reach does not occur.

  The value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. More specifically, it is stored in the corresponding area in the empty reserved area with the smallest area number in the reserved ball storage area.

  Note that a table (not shown) referred to for selecting a stop pattern from the value (random value) of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. Selection is made based on this table and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3. Note that such a table is provided with a plurality of tables so that the range of values of the stop pattern selection counter C3 that can take one stop pattern is different. This is because the current state of the pachinko machine 10 is a high probability state (a state where the jackpot probability is higher than normal), a normal state (a state where the jackpot probability is normal), This is because the selection ratio of each stop pattern is changed according to the above.

  For example, in a high-probability state (a state where the jackpot probability is higher than normal), since the jackpot is likely to occur, the range of random number values corresponding to the stop pattern “completely out” is 10 so that the reach effect is not selected more than necessary. A table as wide as ˜238 is selected, and “completely out” is easily selected. In this table, the range of random values for “front / rear out of reach” is narrowed to 0-5, and the range of random values for “non-front / rear out of reach” is also narrowed to 6-9. It becomes difficult to select “reach other than miss”.

  In addition, in order to secure the time for entering the ball into the first entrance 64 if each random number value is not stored (held) in the reserved ball storage area in the normal state (the state where the jackpot probability is normal). A table having a narrow range of random values 51 to 238 corresponding to the stop pattern of “completely out” is selected, and it is difficult to select “completely out”. In this table, the range of random values of “front / rear out of reach” is 0 to 8, the range of random values of “reach other than back and forth out” is 9 to 50, and “reach other than back and forth out of reach” is easily selected. It has become. Therefore, in the normal state (the state where the jackpot probability is normal), it is possible to secure the time for entering the ball into the first entrance 64, so that the variable display by the third symbol display device 81 is easily performed continuously.

  Next, among the three variation type counters CS1 to CS3, the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 will be described. One variation type counter CS1 is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 198, for example, and reaches a maximum value (that is, 198) and then returns to 0. The other variation type counter CS2 Within the range of 0 to 240, 1 is added in order, and after reaching the maximum value (that is, 240), it returns to 0. In the following description, CS1 may be referred to as a “first variation type counter” and CS2 may be referred to as a “second variation type counter”.

  The first variation type counter CS1 is a counter used for selecting (selecting) a variation display (dynamic display) pattern (variation pattern) of the third symbol. The value of the first variation type counter CS1 is updated once every time a main process (see FIG. 9) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process.

  In the present embodiment, three types of variation patterns of normal variation, normal reach variation, and super reach variation are set as variation patterns that can be selected based on the value of the first variation type counter CS1. Each variation pattern selected based on the value of the first variation type counter CS1 is configured to have different production times (variation times).

  Among these fluctuation patterns, the “normal fluctuation” is a fluctuation pattern (that is, a deviation fluctuation) in which the display result of the loss appears without the reach display. In the present embodiment, “normal fluctuation” is configured as a fluctuation pattern having a fluctuation time of 11 seconds.

  “Normal reach variation” is a so-called normal reach variation pattern with reach display. In the present embodiment, “normal reach fluctuation” is configured as a fluctuation pattern having a fluctuation time of 20 seconds.

  “Super reach fluctuation” is a reach pattern in which a predetermined effect appears between the occurrence of reach and the stop of the final symbol. In the present embodiment, the “super reach variation” is configured as a variation pattern with a variation time of 40 seconds. In addition, as a predetermined effect that appears between the occurrence of reach and the stop of the final symbol in “super reach fluctuation”, a specific character appears, a specific background display, For example, the symbols may be changed in a specific manner (for example, the symbols may be enlarged or reduced, or the symbols may fluctuate and fluctuate).

  When selecting a variation pattern from the value (random number value) of the first variation type counter CS1, a first selection table (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 is selected and referenced. This first selection table includes a jackpot type (probability big hit or normal jackpot) determined by the value of the first hit type counter C2, and a stop symbol (completely missed, missed before and after reach) determined by the stop pattern selection counter C3. Or, each reach) is different in each first selection table, and the allocation of the range of the first variation type counter CS1 to the variation pattern is different. That is, the selection probability of the variation pattern differs for each first selection table.

  On the other hand, in the reach pattern (in this embodiment, normal reach or super reach), the second variation type counter CS2 is a variation pattern from when a symbol other than the final stop symbol stops and a reach occurs, to when the final stop symbol stops. It is a counter for determining the number. The value of the second variation type counter CS2 is updated once every time a main process (see FIG. 9) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process.

  In the following description, the number of fluctuation symbols determined based on the value of the second fluctuation type counter CS2 until the final stop symbol stops after occurrence of reach may be simply referred to as “fluctuation symbol number”. That is, in the present embodiment, the middle symbol sequence after the symbol (left symbol) of the left symbol column Z1 and the symbol (right symbol) of the right symbol column Z3 are stopped in the normal reach according to the value of the second variation type counter CS2. The number of change symbols until the Z2 symbol (medium symbol) stops is determined.

  A second selection table (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 is used to determine the number of fluctuation symbols from the value of the second fluctuation type counter CS2 (random number value) until the final stop symbol stops after the occurrence of reach. Is selected and referenced. The second selection table includes a jackpot type (probability big hit or normal jackpot) determined by the value of the first hit type counter C2, and a stop symbol (completely missed, missed before and after reach) determined by the stop pattern selection counter C3. Or the range of the second variation type counter CS2 is different in each variation pattern selection table with respect to the number of variation symbols until the final stop symbol stops after the occurrence of reach. . That is, according to the second selection table, the selection probability of the number of changing symbols until the final stop symbol stops after the reach occurs differs.

  The pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment selects the type of the fluctuation pattern based on the value of the first fluctuation type counter CS1, and based on the value of the second fluctuation type counter CS2, the last stop symbol is stopped after the reach occurs. Determine the number of fluctuating symbols. That is, a rough variation pattern such as the type of reach such as normal reach is determined by the first variation type counter CS1, and more detailed symbols such as normal reach A, normal reach B, etc. are determined by the second variation type counter CS2. A variation aspect is determined. That is, by combining the variation type counters CS1 and CS2, a wide variety of variation display can be easily realized.

  Next, the variation type counter CS3 will be described. For example, the value of the variation type counter CS3 is sequentially incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 162, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 162). In the following description, CS3 is referred to as a “third variation type counter”.

  The third variation type counter CS3 is a counter for selecting an effect pattern of the notice effect. In other words, the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment slides the fluctuating symbol (so-called “slip effect”) or returns the symbol (so-called “return effect”) in addition to the variation of the third symbol. Since a notice effect such as passing a notice character for notifying the occurrence of the reach effect can be performed, the effect pattern of the notice effect is selected by the variation type counter CS3. Specifically, in order to shorten the time required for the notice effect to add to the variable time (for example, +0.5 seconds, +1 second, +2 seconds, etc.) An effect pattern in which the variation time is subtracted (for example, −1 second) or an effect pattern in which the variation time is not added or subtracted is selected.

  That is, based on the value of the third variation type counter CS3, the effect time addition / subtraction value is determined. By adding or subtracting the effect time addition / subtraction value determined based on the value of the third variation type counter CS3 to the variation time determined based on the value of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2, the first symbol or the third symbol The variation time of the variation display (that is, the variation time from the start of the variation display of the symbol to the stop of the final stop symbol) is determined. Therefore, in addition to the variation type counters CS1 and CS2, the variation display can be further diversified by combining the variation type counter CS3.

  As in the case of the stop pattern selection counter C3 described above, the variation type counter CS3 also has a different range of effect patterns for the notice effect selected for the value of the variation type counter CS3 (random value). A plurality of tables are provided. That is, whether the current state of the pachinko machine 10 is a high probability state (a state where the jackpot probability is higher than normal), a normal state (a state where the jackpot probability is normal), a special figure holding ball number N, Depending on the table, etc., tables with different selection ratios of the production patterns are provided. Such a table (not shown) is provided in the ROM 202 similarly to the above-described variation type counters CS1 and CS2.

  The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 250, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 250). For example, in this embodiment, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 is periodically updated every timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15), and the second entrance 67 (through gate) on either the left or right side of the ball. Acquired when it is detected that the image has passed. There are 149 types of random numbers to be selected, and the range is “5 to 153”. Note that a table (not shown) that stores a random number value for determining whether or not to win from the value of the second random number counter C4 (random number value) is provided in the ROM 202.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second per-random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 250), and once every timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15). In addition to being updated, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 9).

  Returning again to FIG. The RAM 203 also has a probability changing flag 203a, a time reduction flag 203b, and a launch permission flag 203c.

  Both the probability changing flag 203a and the hour / short flag 203b are flags for indicating the game mode after the big hit. Specifically, when the probability change flag 203a is set to on (that is, “1”), the game mode after the jackpot is the high probability mode (probability change mode), or in the high probability mode. If the game mode is set to off (that is, “0”), the game mode is not the high probability mode. The probability variation flag 203a is set to ON when a probability variation jackpot is selected in the jackpot lottery performed in response to a winning at the first entrance 64. After that, when the end condition for the high probability mode is satisfied, the probability changing flag 203a is switched from on to off.

  In this embodiment, the probability variation flag 203a is set to ON at the timing when the jackpot game corresponding to the probability variation jackpot ends after the probability variation jackpot is selected in the jackpot lottery. Further, in the present embodiment, the end condition of the high probability mode is that when the number of executions of the variable display performed in the high probability mode reaches a predetermined number (10000 in the present embodiment) or in the high probability mode. In the jackpot lottery, the jackpot is selected, and the probability changing flag 203a is switched from on to off at the timing when the corresponding variable display ends when these end conditions are satisfied. In other words, in this embodiment, the probability variation flag 203a is switched from ON to OFF at the timing when the variation display corresponding to the normal jackpot ends when the normal jackpot is selected in the jackpot lottery in the high probability mode. When the number of changes (the number of executions of change display) reaches a predetermined number, the change display is switched from on to off at the timing when the change display ends.

  On the other hand, when the hour / short flag 203b is set to ON (that is, “1”), it indicates that the game mode after the jackpot is the time reduction mode or the time reduction mode. When set to off (that is, “0”), it indicates that the game mode is not the time reduction mode. The hour / short flag 203b is set to ON when a normal jackpot is selected in the jackpot lottery performed in response to a winning at the first entrance 64. Then, when the termination condition for the time reduction mode is satisfied after that, the hour / middle flag 203b is switched from on to off.

  In this embodiment, the hour / short flag 203b is set to ON at the timing when the jackpot game corresponding to the normal jackpot ends after the normal jackpot is selected in the jackpot lottery. In the present embodiment, the condition for ending the time reduction mode is whether the number of fluctuations in the time reduction mode (100 in the present embodiment) has been reached, or whether the jackpot is selected in the jackpot lottery during the time reduction mode. The short / middle flag 203b is switched from on to off at the timing when the corresponding variable display ends when these end conditions are satisfied. In other words, in the present embodiment, the time / short flag 203b is switched from ON to OFF at the timing when the variation display corresponding to the probability variation jackpot ends when the probability variation jackpot is selected in the jackpot lottery in the time reduction mode. When the number of fluctuations reaches a predetermined number, it is switched from on to off at the timing when the fluctuation display ends.

  The launch permission flag 203c is a flag indicating whether or not the launch of the ball is permitted. Specifically, when the launch permission flag 203c is set to on (ie, “1”), it indicates that the launch of the ball is permitted, and is set to off (ie, “0”). Indicates that the ball is not allowed to fire. The main control device 110 (MPU 201) is set at predetermined intervals (in this embodiment, every 0.6 seconds) while the emission permission flag 203c is set to ON (that is, while the emission of the sphere is permitted). The sphere is instructed to be emitted by outputting a firing control signal (firing pulse) and a ball feed control signal to the firing control device 112. Further, although details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, by outputting the firing control signal also to the effect control device 117, the number of balls that the effect control device 117 (MPU 271) has fired can be grasped. It is configured.

  The firing permission flag 203c is set to ON when the firing permission signal from the payout control device 111 rises from low to high. On the other hand, the firing permission flag 203c is set off when the firing permission signal falls from high to low. Although the details will be described later, the launch permission signal is generated when the player rotates the operation handle 51 clockwise without operating the stop switch 51b (that is, the player operates the operation handle 51 with the intention of launching the ball). (In the case of a rotation operation), it goes high, and goes low when the player releases the operation handle 51 or operates the stop switch 51b. Therefore, the launch permission flag 203c is set to ON when the player rotates the operation handle 51 with the intention of launching the ball, and is turned OFF when the player releases the operation handle 51 or operates the stop switch 51b. Is set.

  Note that the probability changing flag 203a, the time reduction flag 203b, and the firing permission flag 203c are all initialized to OFF each time the RAM 203 is cleared by an operation of the RAM erase switch 122 or the like.

  In addition to the counters and flags described above, the RAM 203 stores a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, I / O And a work area (work area) in which values such as are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to hold (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up.

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by the main process (see FIG. 9), and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in a startup process (see FIG. 8) when the power is turned on. Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input immediately, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 18) as a process at the time of a power failure is immediately executed, and information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 constituted by an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 includes a payout control device 111, a launch control device 112, an effect control device 117, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 82, a second symbol hold lamp 84, 1 entrance switch 208a, various switches 208 including a switch group or a sensor group (not shown), a large opening solenoid for opening / closing the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a, a solenoid for driving an electric accessory, etc. Is connected to a solenoid 209.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  Similarly to the RAM 203 of the main controller 110, the RAM 213 stores a stack area for storing the contents of internal registers of the MPU 211, a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 211, various flags and counters, I / O And a work area (work area) in which values such as O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the power failure signal SG1 is also input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed, and information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 213. Note that the NMI interrupt process executed by the payout control apparatus 111 is the same process as the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 18) executed by the main control apparatus 110.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110 and the payout motor 216 are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball that has been paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  Also, the payout control device 111 has a signal conversion circuit 241. The signal conversion circuit 241 is a circuit that outputs a firing permission signal based on inputs from the touch sensor 51 a and the stop switch 51 b of the operation handle 51. The signal conversion circuit 241 mainly includes an AND circuit that is a logic circuit, and sets the firing permission signal to high only when the touch sensor 51a is on and the stop switch 51b is off (that is, firing permission). Output a signal). On the other hand, if the touch sensor 51a or the stop switch 51b does not satisfy the above condition, the firing permission signal becomes low (that is, the firing permission signal is not output).

  The firing control device 112 rotates the operation handle 51 when a firing control signal (a firing pulse) and a ball feed control signal are input from the main control device 110 (that is, when a ball firing instruction is given). The ball launching unit 112a is controlled so that the ball is launched with the launch strength according to the amount.

  Specifically, when receiving a ball feed control signal from the main controller 110, the launch control device 112 supplies a voltage having a predetermined magnitude to a ball feed solenoid (not shown) of the ball launch unit 112a. As a result, the ball feed solenoid feeds one ball to the launch position. In addition, when the launch control device 112 receives a launch control signal (launch pulse) from the main control device 110, the launch control device 112 supplies a voltage to a launch solenoid (not shown) of the ball launch unit 112a. At this time, the magnitude of the voltage applied to the firing solenoid is set according to the resistance value of the variable resistor 51c of the operation handle 51. Thereby, the launch solenoid strikes the ball at the launch position on the front surface of the game board 13 with a strength corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 (fires the ball).

  Here, as described above, the main controller 110 detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 by the touch sensor 51a, and has a stop switch (stop switch) 51b for stopping the launch of the ball. The fire control device 112 is instructed to fire a ball on the condition that it is not operated. Therefore, the launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when the above condition is satisfied.

  The effect control device 117 sets the sound output in the sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, sets the number of lamps to be turned on in the special figure holding lamp 85, and turns on the lamps in the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34 In addition, it controls the setting of turning off and on, the variable display of the third symbol on the third symbol display device (LCD) 81 and the jackpot effect.

  The effect control device 117 includes an MPU 271, an image controller 274, a character ROM 275, a video RAM 276, an input / output port 277, an output port 278, and bus lines 279 and 280.

  An input / output port 277 is connected to the MPU 271 which is an arithmetic unit via a bus line 279 including an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 277 is connected to the main controller 110, the image controller 274, the audio output device 226, the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34, the special figure holding lamp 85, and the frame button 22. ing.

  As described above, the frame button 22 is used to change the effect pattern of the variable display (variable effect) displayed on the third symbol display device 81, or to change the effect content during the reach effect. This is a button operated (pressed) by. The frame button 22 outputs a low signal in a non-operation state (a state where the frame button 22 is not pressed), and outputs a high signal in an operation state (a state where the frame button 22 is pressed).

  A character ROM 275 and a video RAM 276 are connected to the image controller 274, and an output port 278 is connected via a bus line 280. A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 278. Note that the pachinko machine 10 is a different model that has the same symbol configuration displayed on the third symbol display device 81, even if it is a different model that has different winning probabilities and the number of prize balls that are paid out in one jackpot. Therefore, the production control device 117 is made into a common part to reduce the cost.

  In the present embodiment, the effect control device 117 collectively performs control of sound output, control of turning on and off various lamps, and control of variable display of the third symbol on the third symbol display device (LCD) 81. However, it may be configured such that various controls are shared by a plurality of control devices. For example, control of voice output and control of lighting and extinguishing of various lamps are performed by a dedicated control device (voice lamp control device), and control of variable display of the third symbol on the third symbol display device (LCD) 81 is performed. A dedicated control device (display control device) may be used.

  The MPU 271 is an arithmetic unit as a one-chip microcomputer. The MPU 271 includes a ROM 272 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 271 and fixed value data, and various circuits such as a RAM 273 used as a work memory.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 7, the structure of RAM273 of the production | presentation control apparatus 117 is demonstrated. FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 273 of the effect control device 117. As shown in FIG. 7, in the RAM 273, a big hit flag 273a, a big hit number counter 273b, a probability changing flag 273c, a time changing flag 273d, a probability changing time short start flag 273e, and a probability changing time short number counter 273f are advantageous. State-acquired ball number memory 273g, advantageous state big hit medium acquired ball number memory 273h, advantageous state probability change time short and medium acquired ball number memory 273i, big hit medium hit ball number counter 273j, jackpot medium hitting ball number memory 273k, Launched ball number previous value memory 273l, current jackpot medium shot ball memory 273m, paid-out ball number previous value memory 273n, current jackpot medium paid-out ball number memory 273o, probability variation short and medium firing ball number counter 273p, probability variation time short Medium payout ball number memory 273q, advantageous state end command reception flag 273r, And or end display flag 273S, has a variation start display flag 273T, a probability variation time reduction at the end display flag 273U, a first display flag 273V, and a second display flag 273W.

  The jackpot flag 273a is a flag indicating whether or not the jackpot is being hit (during jackpot game). Specifically, when the big hit flag 273a is set to on (that is, “1”), it indicates that the big hit is being set, and when it is set to off (that is, “0”), Indicates that it is not a big hit. The jackpot flag 273a is set to ON when the effect control device 117 receives a jackpot start command indicating that the jackpot game is started from the main controller 110. Thereafter, when the effect control device 117 receives a jackpot end command indicating that the jackpot game is to be ended from the main control device 110, the jackpot flag 273a is set off.

  The jackpot count counter 273b is a series of advantageous state periods (that is, a period from the start of the special gaming state generated in the normal mode to the end of the high probability mode or the time shortening mode by the end condition defined by the number of fluctuations). It is a counter for counting the number of times that the jackpot has occurred. The jackpot counter 273b is incremented by one each time the effect control device 117 receives a jackpot end command from the main controller 110. Every time the production control device 117 receives from the main control device 110 an advantageous state end command indicating that the high probability mode or the time reduction mode is ended by the end condition defined by the number of fluctuations, the average winning ball for the big hit After calculating the number, the jackpot counter 273b is cleared to zero.

  Both the probability changing flag 273c and the hour / short flag 273d are flags for indicating the game mode after the big hit. Specifically, when the probability change flag 273c is set to ON (that is, “1”), it indicates that the game mode after the big hit is a high probability mode (probability change mode), and OFF (that is, “0”). ) Is set, it indicates that the game mode is not the high probability mode. The probability change flag 273c is set to ON when the production control device 117 receives a probability change start command output at a timing when the main control device 110 is set to the high probability mode. Then, when the effect control device 117 receives a probability change end command output from the main control device 110 at the timing of ending the high probability mode, the probability change flag 273c is set to OFF.

  On the other hand, when the hour / short flag 273d is set to ON (that is, “1”), it indicates that the game mode after the big hit is the time reduction mode (time reduction mode), and is OFF (that is, “0”). Is set to indicate that the game mode is not the time reduction mode. The short time flag 273d is set to ON when the production control device 117 receives a short time start command output at a timing when the main control device 110 is set to the time reduction mode. Then, when the effect control device 117 receives a time-short end command output from the main control device 110 at a timing to end the time reduction mode, the time-short / medium flag 273d is set to OFF.

  The probability change short start flag 273e is a flag for indicating a period during which the variable display has not been executed yet after the game mode has shifted to the high probability mode or the time reduction mode. This probability change time short start flag 273e is set to ON (ie, “1”) when the effect control device 117 receives a probability change start command or a time short start command from the main control device 110. Thereafter, the probability change short start flag 273e is set to off (that is, “0”) when the effect control device 117 receives the change start command from the main control device 110.

  The short time counter 273f for the probability change time is a counter for counting the number of times that the game mode is set to the high probability mode or the time reduction mode during a series of advantageous states. Each time the effect control device 117 receives a probability change end command or a time-short end command from the main control device 110, it is incremented by one to the probability change time count counter 273f. Then, every time the effect control device 117 receives the advantageous state end command from the main control device 110, after calculating the average number of balls acquired at the time of probability variation, the probability variation time count counter 273f is cleared to zero.

  The number-of-obtained balls memory 273g during the advantageous state is terminated by a termination condition defined by the number of times the high probability mode or the time shortening mode is started from the start of the special gaming state generated in the normal mode. It is a memory for storing the number of acquired balls (that is, the balance of the number of paid-out balls and the balls used for the game) in the period up to. In the advantageous state acquired ball number memory 273g, in the advantageous state (that is, the state in which the big hit medium flag 273a, the probability changing flag 273c, or the short-time medium flag 273d is set to ON), the effect control device 117 receives the firing control signal. Is subtracted one by one every time is received from the main controller 110. In addition, in the advantageous state, the acquired number-of-balls memory 273g is incremented with the number of payout balls indicated by the received prize ball command every time the effect control device 117 receives the prize ball command from the main control device 110 in the advantageous state. . Then, the advantageous state acquired number-of-balls memory 273g displays the total number of acquired balls (total number) displayed in the acquired number-of-successes display area 81a when the production control device 117 receives the advantageous state end command from the main control unit 110. The number of acquired balls 81a1 (see FIG. 4) is cleared to zero.

  The advantaged state jackpot medium acquired ball number memory 273h is a memory for storing the number of acquired balls limited to the jackpot during a series of advantageous state periods. Every time the effect control device 117 receives the firing control signal from the main control device 110 in the state where the big hit / medium flag 273a is set to ON, it is subtracted by one from the advantageous state big hit / medium acquired ball number memory 273h. In addition, each time the effect control device 117 receives a prize ball command from the main control device 110 in the state where the big hit flag 273a is set to ON in the advantageous state big hit medium winning ball number memory 273h, the received award is received. The number of payout balls indicated by the ball command is added. Then, the advantage-hit / hit-acquired ball number memory 273h is a jackpot / medium average-hit ball displayed in the obtained-hit number display area 81a when the production control device 117 receives an advantageous state end command from the main controller 110. Cleared to zero when the number is deleted.

  The advantageous state probability changing time short and medium acquired ball number memory 273i is a memory for storing the acquired number of balls only during the high probability mode or the time shortening mode during a series of advantageous state periods. Each time the effect control device 117 receives the firing control signal from the main control device 110 in the state where the probability changing flag 273c or the hour / short flag 273d is set to ON in the advantageous state probability changing time short and medium acquired ball number memory 273i. One is subtracted. Further, the effect control device 117 receives a prize ball command from the main control device 110 in the state where the probability change flag 273b or the hour / short flag 273d is set to ON in the advantageous state probability change time medium / short time baseball acquisition memory 273i. Each time, the number of payout balls indicated by the received prize ball command is added. Then, the advantageous state probability changing time medium and short number of acquired balls number memory 273i, when the production control device 117 receives the advantageous state end command from the main control device 110, the probability changing time short and medium average displayed in the acquired number of balls display area 81a. Cleared to zero when the number of acquired balls is cleared.

  The jackpot medium firing ball counter 273j is a counter for counting the total number of balls fired from the ball launching unit 112a during jackpot after the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. Each time the effect control device 117 receives a firing control signal (firing pulse) from the main control device 110 in a state where the big hit / medium flag 273a is set to ON, it is incremented by one. The

  The jackpot medium payout ball number memory 273k stores the number of payout balls since the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on (that is, the number of payout balls paid out), which is limited to the big hit. It is a memory to do. Each time the effect control device 117 receives a prize ball command from the main control device 110 with the jackpot flag 273a set to ON, the received prize ball command indicates in the jackpot / medium payout ball number memory 273k. The number of balls to be paid out is added.

  The number-of-fired ball previous value memory 273l is a memory for storing the value of the big hit middle shot ball number counter 273j at the end of the big hit. Each time the effect control device 117 receives a big hit end command from the main control device 110, the value of the big hit middle shot ball number counter 273j is stored in the previous shot number memory 273l.

  The jackpot medium hit ball number memory 273m is a memory for storing the number of balls shot from the ball launch unit 112a during the single jackpot period generated this time. Each time the effect control device 117 receives a jackpot end command from the main control device 110, the jackpot / medium shot ball memory 273m has a jackpot / medium shot ball counter before updating the previous shot ball number memory 273l. A value obtained by subtracting the value of the previous shot number memory 273l from the value of 273j is stored.

  The previous payout ball number memory 273n is a memory for storing the value of the big hit medium payout ball number memory 273k at the end of the big hit. Each time the effect control device 117 receives a jackpot end command from the main control device 110, the value in the jackpot medium payout ball number memory 273k at that time is stored in the payout ball count previous value memory 273n.

  The current jackpot payout ball memory 273o is a memory for storing the number of payout balls during the single jackpot that occurred this time. In this jackpot / medium payout ball number memory 273o, every time the effect control device 117 receives a jackpot end command from the main control device 110, the jackpot / medium payout ball number memory 273n is updated before updating the payout ball number previous value memory 273n. A value obtained by subtracting the value of the previous value memory 273n of the payout ball number from the value of 273k is stored.

  The probability variation time short and medium firing ball number counter 273p indicates the number of balls launched from the ball launch unit 112a in the high probability mode (probability variation mode) or in the time reduction mode (time reduction mode) after the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. It is a counter for counting the total number. Each time when the production control device 117 receives a firing control signal from the main control device 110 with the probability changing flag 273c or the time shortening flag 273d set to ON, the probability changing short / medium shot ball counter 273p is set to one each. Is added.

  The probability change short / medium payout ball memory 273q is a payout ball number after the power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10, and is a memory for storing the payout ball number only in the high probability mode or the time reduction mode. It is. Each time the effect control device 117 receives a prize ball command from the main control device 110 with the probability changing flag 273c or the hour / short flag 273d set to ON in the probability changing short / medium payout ball number memory 273q, it is received. The number of payout balls indicated by the winning ball command is added.

  The advantageous state end command reception flag 273r is a flag for indicating that the effect control device 117 has received the advantageous state end command from the main control device 110. This advantageous state end command reception flag 273r is set to ON (ie, “1”) when the effect control device 117 receives an advantageous state end command from the main control device 110. Thereafter, the advantageous state end command 273r is cleared to zero when the process executed upon reception of the advantageous state end command, specifically, the elimination of the acquired number of balls displayed in the acquired number of balls display area 81a is executed. Is done.

  The jackpot end display flag 273s displays a predetermined number of acquired balls (in the present embodiment, the number of hits during the jackpot and the total number of acquired balls) in the acquired number of balls display area 81a of the third symbol display device 81 after the jackpot ends. It is a flag indicating whether or not it is a timing to display. Specifically, when the jackpot end display flag 273s is set to on (that is, “1”), it indicates that it is the display timing of the number of acquired balls after the jackpot ends, and is off (that is, “0”). ")" Indicates that it is not the timing. In the present embodiment, it is configured to display the number of currently acquired big hits in the acquired number of balls display area 81a at the timing when each big hit is completed. Therefore, the jackpot end display flag 273s is a value necessary for the calculation of the number of hit balls during this jackpot when the production control device 117 receives a jackpot end command from the main control device 110 (the number of hit balls during this jackpot, this time The number is set to ON on condition that the number of balls in the jackpot) is obtained. Thereafter, when the current number of winning balls and the total number of acquired balls are displayed in the acquired number of balls display area 81a, the jackpot end display flag 273s is set to OFF.

  The change start display flag 273t is a flag indicating whether or not it is the timing for displaying the total number of acquired balls (the number of acquired balls in a series of advantageous state periods) in the acquired ball number display area 81a with the start of variable display It is. When the change start display flag 273t is set to ON (that is, “1”), it is the timing to display the total acquired number of balls in the acquired number of balls display area 81a with the start of the change display. If it is set to off (that is, “0”), it indicates that it is not the timing. In the present embodiment, after the jackpot is over, the game mode is shifted to the high probability mode or the time reduction mode, and the total number of acquired balls is displayed in the acquired ball number display area 81a at the timing when the first variation display is started. It is configured as follows. Therefore, the change start time display flag 273t is set to ON when the effect control device 117 receives the change start command from the main control device 110, on condition that the probability change time short start flag 273e is set to ON. . Thereafter, when the total number of acquired balls is displayed in the acquired ball number display area 81a, the change start display flag 273r is set to OFF.

  The probability change time end display flag 273u is a predetermined number of acquired balls (in this embodiment, the total number of acquired balls) when the high probability mode or the time shortening mode ends and a series of advantageous period ends. This is a flag indicating whether or not it is time to display the jackpot average acquired number of balls and the average number of acquired balls during the probability variation time period in the acquired number of balls display area 81a. When the probability change short end display flag 273u is set to ON (that is, “1”), it indicates that it is the timing to display these acquired ball numbers in the acquired ball number display area 81a, and OFF (that is, "0") indicates that it is not the timing. Probability change short end display flag 273u is provided on condition that advantageous state end command reception flag 273r is set to ON when production control device 117 receives a probability change end command or a time reduction end command from main control device 110. Set to on. Thereafter, when the total number of acquired balls, the average number of acquired balls in the jackpot, and the average number of acquired balls in the short time in probability change are displayed in the acquired number of balls display area 81a, the display flag 273u in the probability change time short end is set to OFF. The

  The first display flag 273v is a flag for indicating that the total acquired number of balls displayed in the acquired number of balls display area 81a with the start of the variable display is being displayed. When the first display flag 273v is set to on (ie, “1”), it indicates that the total number of acquired balls is being displayed, and is set to off (ie, “0”). In the case, it indicates that it is outside the display period. In this embodiment, the total number of acquired balls displayed at the start of the first fluctuation in the high probability mode or the time shortening mode is continued until the series of advantageous states including the high probability mode or the time shortening mode ends. Displayed. Therefore, the first display flag 273v is set to ON with the first fluctuation start in the high probability mode or the time reduction mode. After that, in the state where the effect control device 117 has received the advantageous state end command from the main control means (that is, the advantageous state end command reception flag 273r is set to ON), the probability change end command or the short time end command is main controlled. When received from the device 110, the first display flag 273v is set to OFF.

  The second display flag 273w is a predetermined acquired number of balls displayed in the acquired number of balls display area 81a at the end of a series of advantageous state periods (in the present embodiment, the total number of acquired balls, the average winning ball in jackpots) Number and the average number of acquired balls during the probability variation time period). When the second display flag 273w is set to on (that is, “1”), it indicates that the acquired number of balls is being displayed, and is set to off (that is, “0”). In the case, it indicates that it is outside the display period. The second display flag 273w is set to ON when the acquired number of balls is displayed in the acquired number of balls display area 81a at the end of a series of advantageous state periods. After that, when a predetermined erasing timing (for example, a predetermined time after the display is started, a start timing of the next variable display, a stop display with a stop symbol indicating a big hit, etc.) arrives, the second display The middle flag 273w is set to off.

  The big hit flag 273a, the probability change flag 273c, the short time flag 273d, the probability change short start flag 273e, the advantageous state end command reception flag 273r, the big hit end display flag 273s, the change start time display flag 273t, and the probability change short time end display The flag 273u, the first displaying flag 273v, and the second displaying flag 273w are all initialized to OFF each time the RAM 273 is initialized, such as when the power is turned on.

  Also, the jackpot count counter 273b, the probability change time count counter 273f, the advantageous state earned ball number memory 273g, the advantage state jackpot medium earned ball number memory 273h, the advantage state probability change time short and medium earned ball number memory 273i, and the big hit medium shot ball counter 273j , Jackpot medium payout ball number memory 273k, previous shot number of ball shot memory 273l, current jackpot medium shot ball number memory 273m, payout ball number previous value memory 273n, current jackpot medium payout ball number memory 273o, short-term shot ball counter during probability change Both the 273p and the probability change short / medium paying ball number memory 273q are initialized and set to zero (zero clear) every time the RAM 273 is initialized, such as when the power is turned on.

  Returning again to FIG. The RAM 273 stores the contents of the internal register of the MPU 271 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 271 and the work area (work area for storing various flags and counters, I / O values, etc. Area). Further, the RAM 273 includes various memories, flags, counters, and the like.

  The image controller 274 adjusts the timing of the character ROM 275, the video RAM 276, the input / output port 277, and the output port 278 to intervene in reading and writing data, and reads the display data stored in the video RAM 276 at a predetermined timing. It is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The character ROM 275 is a memory that stores data for presentation such as symbols (background symbols, third symbols, and decorative symbols) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a compressed form. The character ROM 275 stores, for example, various data for effects used for variable display (variable effects) and jackpot effects, a character pattern of the third symbol, a background symbol, a notice character symbol, and the like. Various types of data for presentation correspond to data (variation display data) used for each variation display of normal variation (out-of-range variation), normal reach variation, and the like.

  The character ROM 275 stores the data for presentation as described above in a compressed state in order to reduce the amount of data to be stored. In the present embodiment, the production data is composed of approximately 1024 Mbytes, and the approximately 1024 Mbytes of data is compressed to approximately 768 Mbytes and stored in the character ROM 275. Only the necessary presentation data compressed and stored in the character ROM 275 is read out and decompressed, and then written in a predetermined area of the video RAM 276.

  The video RAM 276 is a memory for storing effect data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a decompressed state (a state where it can be used immediately). The video RAM 276 has a variable display data storage area (not shown). This variable display data storage area (not shown) is a memory for storing data for performing variable display (variable effect) and jackpot effect in the third symbol display device 81, and each effect is displayed in the third symbol display device 81. When started, an image corresponding to the data stored in the variable effect data storage area is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to time.

  The various data is read from the character ROM 275 and stored in the variable effect data storage area because the processing speed of the RAM is generally higher than that of the ROM. For example, when the presentation data is read from the character ROM 275 and displayed on the third symbol display device (LCD) 81, if the amount of data to be read is large, it takes time to read, and smooth display is not possible or clear. This is because the display may not be possible. This is also because the processing of the display data (for example, changing the size of the decorative design or changing the color of the background design) is easier when stored in the RAM.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And a switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in the voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and drives various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, the 5 volt voltage, and the backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 as necessary voltages.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 18), store the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 and the RAM 213, and complete it.

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 clear the respective backup data and the payout control device 111 for clearing the backup data. A payout initialization command is transmitted to the payout control device 111.

  Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the pachinko machine 10 having the above configuration will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 8 to 18. The processing of the MPU 201 includes a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the startup process, and a timer interrupt process that is periodically started (in a 2 ms cycle in this embodiment). And activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal, and are roughly divided into NMI interrupt processing.

  First, referring to FIG. 8, a startup process when the main controller 110 is turned on will be described. FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing start-up processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. This start-up process is activated by a reset at power-on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S101). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in advance in the stack pointer and waits for the sub-side control device (peripheral control devices such as the effect control device 117 and the payout control device 111) to be operable. Therefore, a wait process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed (S102). Next, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S103).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S104). If it is turned on (S104: Yes), the process proceeds to S111. On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S104: No), it is further determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S105), and if not stored (S105: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown has not been completed normally, the process proceeds to S111 also in this case.

  If power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S105: Yes), a RAM determination value is calculated (S106). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S107: No), that is, the calculated RAM determination is performed. If the value does not match the RAM determination value stored when the power is shut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and the process moves to S111 even in such a case. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203, as will be described later in the processing of S213 in FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S111, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 as a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S111). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and enters a state in which game ball payout control can be started. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S112, S113) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall starts business, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S112, S113) is executed. Similarly, initialization processing (S112, S113) of the RAM 203 is executed even when the information on occurrence of power interruption is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the RAM initialization process (S112, S113), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S112), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S113). After the initialization process of the RAM 203 (S112, S113), the process proceeds to S110.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S104: No), the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored (S105: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value etc.) is normal ( S107: Yes), the information on the occurrence of power interruption is cleared while the backed up data is held in the RAM 203 (S108). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state at the time of driving power interruption is transmitted (S109), and the process proceeds to S110. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213. In the process of S110, the interruption is permitted and the process proceeds to a main process described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 9, the main process executed after the startup process described above will be described. FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, each process of S201 to S206 is executed as a periodic process with a period of 4 ms, and the counter update process of S209 and S210 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main process, first, output data such as a command updated in the previous process is transmitted (output) to the hall computer 600 via each sub-side control device (peripheral control device) or the external output terminal board 260. (S201). By this external output process (S201), for example, the presence / absence of winning detection information detected by the switch reading process of S501 (see FIG. 15) is determined. If there is winning detection information, the payout control device 111 and the effect control device 117 , A winning ball command corresponding to the number of winning balls (the number of paying balls) according to the winning detection information is set and transmitted. In addition, by the external output process (S201), a variation pattern command, a type command, a stop command, an effect time addition / subtraction command, and the like necessary for the third symbol display by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the effect control device 117. When the ball is to be launched, the ball feed control signal is transmitted to the launch control device 112 and the launch control signal is transmitted to the launch control device 112 and the effect control device 117 by external output processing (S201). .

  After the process of S201, each value of the variation type counters CS1, CS2, CS3 is updated (S202). Specifically, 1 is added to the variation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3, and when the counter values reach the maximum value (198, 240, 162 in this embodiment), they are cleared to 0, respectively. Then, the update values of the variation type counters CS 1, CS 2 and CS 3 are stored in the corresponding area in the counter buffer in the RAM 203.

  When the update of the variation type counters CS1, CS2 and CS3 is completed, the winning ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S203), and the process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37 is performed. A variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol and the like by the three symbol display device 81 is executed (S204). Details of the variation process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the end of the variation process, the jackpot process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a of the variable winning device 65 is executed in the case of the jackpot state (S205). Specifically, the specific prize opening 65a is opened for each round of the big hit state, and then a predetermined time (30 seconds in the present embodiment) elapses or a predetermined number (this implementation) is given to the special prize opening 65a. In the embodiment, when 10 balls are entered, the process of closing the specific winning opening 65a is repeatedly executed by a predetermined number of rounds (16 rounds in the present embodiment). Details of the jackpot process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, a display control process of the second symbol (for example, the symbol “◯” or “x”) by the second symbol display device 82 is executed (S206). Briefly, on the condition that the ball has passed through the second entrance (through gate) 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired at the timing of the passage, and the second symbol display device 82 is obtained. In the display unit 83, the second symbol variation display is performed. Then, the lottery of the second symbol is performed based on the value of the second random number counter C4. When the winning state of the second symbol is reached, the electric accessory associated with the first entrance 64 is released for a predetermined time.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S207). If the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S207: No), a power failure signal is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. SG1 is not output and the power supply is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the previous main process (S208). If the predetermined time has already passed (S208: Yes), the process proceeds to S201, and the processes after S201 described above are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed since the start of the previous main process (S208: No), the first time is reached until the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the next main process execution timing. The updating of the initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 is repeatedly executed (S209, S210).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S209). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (738, 250 in this embodiment). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding areas in the counter buffer in the RAM 203.

  Next, the fluctuation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 are updated (S210). Specifically, 1 is added to the variation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3, and when the counter values reach the maximum value (198, 240, 162 in this embodiment), they are cleared to 0, respectively. Then, the update values of the variation type counters CS 1, CS 2 and CS 3 are stored in the corresponding area in the counter buffer in the RAM 203.

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S201-S206 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the next main process execution timing is not constant and varies. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first per-random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second per-random number counter C4) can be updated at random. Similarly, the variation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 can be updated at random.

  In the process of S207, if the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S207: Yes), the power failure is caused by the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 15) has been executed, the power-off process after S211 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S211), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as payout control device 111 and effect control device 117). Transmit (S212). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S213), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S214), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area to be backed up in the RAM 203.

  Note that the processing of S207 is performed at the timing when the series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S201 to S206 is completed, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S209 and S210 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main controller 110, the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power interruption state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. It can start from the process of S201. That is, the process can be started from the process of S201 as in the case where the process is initialized in the startup process. Therefore, in the process at power-off, the stack pointer is not stored in the initial setting process (S101) without saving the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 to the stack area or saving the stack pointer value. By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the process of S201. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden on the main control device 110 and to perform accurate control without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run away.

  Next, the variation process (S204) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the variation process (S204) executed in the main process (see FIG. 9). In the variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is currently being hit (S301). The jackpot includes the jackpot game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the first symbol display device 37 in the jackpot and the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game ends. As a result of the determination, if it is a big hit (S301: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  If it is not a big hit (S301: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S302), and if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is not changing. (S302: No), the value of a special figure reservation ball counter (not shown) provided in the RAM 203, that is, the number N of special figure reservation balls is acquired (S303). After the process of S303, it is determined whether or not the special figure holding ball number N is larger than 0 (S304). If the special figure holding ball number N is 0 (S304: No), this process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the number of special figure holding balls N> 0 (S304: Yes), the number N of special figure holding balls (that is, the value of the special figure holding ball counter) is decremented by 1 (S304) and provided in the RAM 203. A reserve ball storage area forward process for sequentially shifting data stored in the reserve first to fourth areas of the reserve ball storage area (not shown) to the execution area side is executed (S305). Detailed processing executed in the reserved ball storage area forward processing (S305) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After execution of the reserved ball storage area forward processing (S305), the first symbol display device 37 executes variation start processing for starting the variation display of the first symbol (S306), and ends the variation processing (S204). The detailed process executed in the change start process (S306) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, as a result of checking in the process of S302, if it is determined that the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S302: Yes), a special figure control timer (not shown) provided in the RAM 203 is displayed. It is determined whether or not the fluctuation time has elapsed by referring to (S307). A special figure control timer (not shown) is a timer that manages the time from the start of change to the end of change. The display time during the change of the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the change pattern selected by the change type counters CS1 and CS2 and the addition / subtraction value of the effect time selected by the change type counter CS3. If the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S307: No), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S308).

  In the present embodiment, among the LEDs 37b of the first symbol display device 37, until the fluctuation time elapses after the fluctuation starts, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off. The green LED is turned on, and if the green LED is lit, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on. If the blue LED is lit, the blue LED is turned off. And a display mode for turning on the red LED is set.

  Here, the stop symbol displayed by the stop display of the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the value of the first hit random number counter C1 as to whether or not it is a big hit. Furthermore, with regard to the jackpot stop symbol, depending on the value of the first hit type counter C2, the stop symbol when the jackpot is set to the high probability mode after the jackpot (that is, the probability variation jackpot) and the time reduction mode after the jackpot is set (ie , Usually a big jackpot) stop symbol. For example, if it is a probable big hit, red LED 37b is lit as a stop symbol, and if it is a normal big hit, green LED 37b is lit as a stop symbol. On the other hand, if the lottery result (the value of the first random number counter C1) is out of place, the LED 37b is lit in blue as a stop symbol. In addition, although the lighting of each LED is released when the next fluctuation display is started, it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation stops.

  Note that the variation process is executed every 4 ms, but if the LED lighting color is changed every time the variation process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted once each time the variation process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The counter value is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  On the other hand, if the variation time of the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed (S307: Yes), the stop display is set to end (stop) the variation display being executed in the first symbol display device 37. (S309) A variation end time process for determining whether it is the end time of the high probability mode or the time reduction mode is executed (S310), the variation process (S204) is terminated, and the main process (see FIG. 9). Return to. Note that detailed processing executed in the variation end processing (S310) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 11, the above-described reserved ball storage area progressive process (S305) will be described. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the reserved ball storage area forward process (S305) executed in the fluctuation process (see FIG. 10).

  In the reserved ball storage area forward process (S305), first, each data (first random number counter value, first hit type counter value, and stop pattern stored in the reserved first area of the reserved ball storage area) The value of the selection counter is shifted to the execution area (S351).

  Next, each data stored in the reserved second area to the reserved fourth area is shifted to an area having a smaller area number (S352). In the present embodiment, data is shifted only for the reserved area where data is stored (held) among the second to fourth reserved areas. Therefore, since a data shift process is not performed for a reserved area in which data is not stored (held), the number of data shifts can be reduced, and a control burden can be reduced.

  Moreover, you may comprise so that each data of a 2nd-4th reserved area may be shifted to the area where an area number is 1 small irrespective of the presence or absence of data, respectively. In that case, since it is not necessary to determine whether or not data is stored (held) in the second to fourth reserved areas, the number of steps of the program can be reduced. Therefore, since the capacity of the program can be reduced, the free capacity of the ROM 202 can be increased.

  Next, 1 is subtracted from the value of the special figure reservation ball counter (number N of special figure reservation balls) (S353), and a hold number command indicating the value of the special figure reservation ball counter after the subtraction is set (S354). The hold number command set by the process of S354 is output to the effect control device 117 by the external output process of S201 executed next time in the main process (see FIG. 9). When the output hold number command is received by the effect control device 117, the same number of lamps as the special figure hold ball number N indicated by the hold number command are turned on in the special figure hold lamp 85.

  Next, according to the value of the special figure holding ball counter (the number N of special figure holding balls), the LED (not shown) for displaying the number of holdings in the first symbol display device 37 is turned on, and a new holding number is obtained. Displayed according to the lighting state (S355), the reserved ball storage area forward-forwarding process (S305) is terminated, and the process returns to the fluctuation process (see FIG. 10).

  Next, the above-described change start process (S306) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the change start process (S306) executed in the change process (see FIG. 10).

  In the variation start process (S306), first, it is determined whether or not a big hit is made based on the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area (S401). Whether or not it is a big hit is determined based on the relationship between the value of the first random number counter C1 and the mode at that time.

  In the present embodiment, if the value of the first random number counter C1 is “310” or “608” at the normal probability (in the normal mode or the time reduction mode), it is determined that the jackpot is determined by the processing of S401. Is done. On the other hand, at the time of high probability (high probability mode), the value of the first random number counter C1 is “28, 63, 90, 127, 154, 188, 210, 250, 278, 305, 343, 375, 400, 426, 471, 509, 535, 568, 598, 618 ”, it is determined that the jackpot is determined by the processing of S401.

  When it is determined that the game is a big hit by the process of S401 (S401: Yes), it is determined whether or not the probability big hit is based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area. (S402). In the present embodiment, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “1, 2, 3”, it is determined that the probable big hit is obtained by the process of S403. On the other hand, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “0, 4”, since the big hit type is usually a big hit, it is determined that it is not a probable big hit by the process of S402.

  If it is determined by the process of S402 that it is a probable big hit (S402: Yes), the probable big hit flag (not shown) provided in the RAM 203 is set to ON (S403), and the process proceeds to S404. To do. On the other hand, when it is determined by the process of S402 that it is not the probability variation jackpot (S402: No), the probability variation jackpot flag is set to off (S412), and the process proceeds to S404.

  The probability variation jackpot flag (not shown) is a flag for indicating whether the jackpot type selected by the jackpot lottery is a probability variation jackpot or a normal jackpot. Specifically, when the probability variation jackpot flag is set on (ie, “1”), it indicates that probability variation jackpot has been selected, and when it is set off (ie, “0”), Usually indicates that a jackpot has been selected. This probability variation jackpot flag is set to ON or OFF according to the result of determination by the process of S402 described above.

  In S404, the display mode (lighting state of LED 37b) at the time of jackpot displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S404). Specifically, in S404, the display mode corresponding to the jackpot type (that is, the stop pattern at the time of jackpot) determined based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area is the first display mode. Setting is made so that it is displayed on one symbol display device 37.

  After the process of S404, the variation pattern at the time of jackpot is determined based on the jackpot type indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area and the values of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 ( S405).

  That is, based on the value of the first variation type counter CS1, a rough variation time is determined from the normal reach variation (20 seconds) and the super reach variation (40 seconds), and the second variation type counter CS2 Based on this value, the variation time (in other words, the number of variation symbols) until the last stop symbol (in this embodiment, the symbol (medium symbol) in the middle symbol row Z2) stops after the occurrence of reach is determined. By determining the variation pattern by the processing of S405, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the jackpot symbol is determined. .

  Note that the above-described variation time can be set using only the value of the first variation type counter CS1 without using the value of the second variation type counter CS2, and only by the value of the first variation type counter CS1. Whether to set the value or both values of the two variation type counters CS1 and CS2 may be determined as appropriate according to the value of the first variation type counter CS1 and the game conditions each time. .

  On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not a big hit in the process of S401 (S401: No), the display mode (LED 37b lighting state) at the time of disconnection displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S410). Specifically, in S410, based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area, the stop pattern at the time of detachment (rear / rear reach, reach other than front / rear reach, or complete disengagement) is determined. After that, setting is performed so that a display mode corresponding to the determined stop symbol is displayed on the first symbol display device 37.

  After the processing of S410, based on the stop pattern at the time of release indicated by the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area and the value of the change type counters CS1 and CS2, the change pattern at the time of release Is determined (S411).

  That is, in the same manner as the process of S405 described above, based on the value of the first variation type counter CS1, the rough variation (11 seconds), normal reach variation (20 seconds), super reach variation (40 seconds) is roughly selected. In addition to determining the variation time of the symbol variation, the variation time until the final stop symbol (in the present embodiment, the middle symbol row Z2 (medium symbol)) stops after the occurrence of reach is determined based on the value of the second variation type counter CS2. decide. By determining the variation pattern by the processing of S411, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. .

  In the process of S410, if “front / rear out of reach” or “reach other than front / rear out of reach” is set as the display mode at the time of release, reach fluctuation (normal reach fluctuation, super reach fluctuation) is always determined by the process of S411. As shown, the table is preset.

  After the process of S405 or S411, an effect time (addition / subtraction value of effect time) to be added to or subtracted from the variation time determined by these processes is determined (S406). At this time, the effect time to be added or subtracted is determined based on the value of the third type counter CS3 stored in the counter buffer provided in the work area (not shown) in the RAM 203.

  After the processing of S406, a variation pattern command corresponding to the variation pattern (variation time) determined by the processing of S405 or S411 is set (S407), and then the display mode set by the processing of S404 or S410 (ie, stop) Set the type command according to the symbol. (S408). Thereafter, an effect time addition / subtraction command corresponding to the effect time addition / subtraction value determined in the process of S406 is set (S409), the fluctuation start process (S306) is terminated, and the process returns to the fluctuation process (see FIG. 10).

  As described above, after the “holding number command” is set in the reserved ball storage area forward process (see FIG. 11), the “variation pattern command” and “type” are set in the change start process (see FIG. 12). Commands are set in the order of “command” and “calculation time addition / subtraction command”. In the external output process (S201) in the main process (see FIG. 9), since the commands are output in the order in which the commands are set, when the 3rd symbol display device 81 starts the variable display of the 3rd symbol. The commands are output to the effect control device 117 in the order of “pending number command”, “variation pattern command”, “type command”, and “calculation time addition / subtraction command”.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 13, the above-described process at the end of change (S310) will be described. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the change end process (S310) executed in the change process (see FIG. 10).

  As shown in FIG. 13, in the process at the end of change (S310), first, it is determined whether or not the probability change flag 203a is on (S421), and if the probability change flag 203a is off (S421: No). The process proceeds to S429.

  On the other hand, if the probability change flag 203a is turned on as a result of the determination in the process of S421 (S421: Yes), 1 is added to a fluctuation number counter (not shown) provided in the RAM 203 (S422). Note that a variation counter (not shown) is a counter for counting the number of variation displays (variation count) executed in the high probability mode (probability variation mode) or the time reduction mode (time reduction mode).

  After the process of S422, it is determined whether or not the stop symbol set in S309 of the above-described change start process (see FIG. 12) is a big hit (S423). At this time, if the stop symbol is off (S423: No), it is determined whether the value of the variation counter is 10,000 or more (S424).

  As a result of the determination by the processing of S424, if the value of the variation counter is 10000 or more (S424: Yes), the high probability mode is terminated when the termination condition defined by the variation count is satisfied, and the jackpot ( Since no special game state occurs, the game mode shifts to the normal mode, and the series of advantageous state periods ends. Therefore, in such a case, an advantageous state end command is set (S425), and the process proceeds to S426. The advantageous state end command set in S425 is output to the effect control device 117 by the external output process (S201) of the main process (see FIG. 9). The effect control device 117 can recognize that the period of the series of advantageous states has ended by receiving this advantageous state end command.

  On the other hand, if the stop symbol set in S309 is a jackpot as a result of the determination in the process of S423 (S423: Yes), the jackpot is generated after the end of the variable display and the advantageous state is continued. Transition.

  In S426, in order to end the high probability mode, the probability variation flag 203a is set to OFF (S426). Next, a probability variation end command is set (S427). The probability variation end command set in S427 is output to the effect control device 117 by the external output process (S201) of the main process (see FIG. 9). The effect control device 117 can recognize the end of the high probability mode by receiving this probability change end command.

  After the process of S427, the variation counter is cleared to zero (S428), and the process proceeds to S429. If the value of the variation counter is less than 10,000 (S424: No) as a result of the determination in the process of S424, the high probability mode is continued, so the process of S425 to S428 is skipped and the process goes to S429. Transition.

  In S429, it is determined whether or not the hour / short flag 203b is on (S429). At this time, if the hour / short flag 203b is off (S429: No), the variation end processing (S310) is terminated, and the processing returns to the variation processing (see FIG. 10).

  On the other hand, as a result of the determination by the processing of S429, if the time reduction flag 203b is on (S429: Yes), 1 is added to a variation counter (not shown) provided in the RAM 203 (S430).

  After the process of S430, similarly to the process of S423, it is determined whether or not the stop symbol set in S309 is a big hit (S431). At this time, if the stop symbol is off (S431: No), it is determined whether the value of the fluctuation counter is 100 or more (S432).

  If the value of the variation counter is 100 or more as a result of the determination by the process of S432 (S432: Yes), the time reduction mode is terminated when the termination condition defined by the number of variations is satisfied, and the jackpot is received after the variation display is completed. It does not occur, thereby ending a series of advantageous periods. Therefore, in such a case, an advantageous state end command is set (S433), and the process proceeds to S434. The advantageous state end command set in S433 is output to the effect control device 117 by the external output process (S201) of the main process (see FIG. 9).

  On the other hand, if the stop symbol set in S309 is a big hit as a result of the determination in the process of S431 (S431: Yes), a big hit occurs after the end of the variable display and the advantageous state is continued, so the process goes to S434. Transition.

  In S434, the time-shortage flag 203b is set to OFF in order to end the time reduction mode (S434). Next, a short time end command is set (S435). The short time end command set in S435 is output to the effect control device 117 by the external output process (S201) of the main process (see FIG. 9). The effect control device 117 can recognize the end of the time reduction mode by receiving the short end command at this time.

  After the process of S435, the fluctuation counter is cleared to zero (S436), and the fluctuation end process (S310) is terminated. If the value of the variation counter is less than 100 as a result of the determination in S432 (S432: No), the time reduction mode is continued, so the processing in S433 to S436 is skipped and the processing at the end of variation is performed. (S310) is terminated.

  Next, the aforementioned jackpot process (S205) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the jackpot process (S205) executed in the main process (see FIG. 9).

  As shown in FIG. 14, in the jackpot process (S205), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is being hit similarly to the process of S301 (see FIG. 10) (S441), and if it is not a jackpot (S441: No), Based on the state of the jackpot start flag (not shown) provided in the RAM 203, it is determined whether or not the jackpot start time is reached (S442). A jackpot start flag (not shown) is a flag that is set to ON when it is determined that a jackpot is determined by the process of S401 (see FIG. 12), and is set to OFF after execution of a jackpot start process (S443) described later. If the result of the determination in S442 is not the start of the jackpot (S442: No), the jackpot process (S205) is terminated and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 9).

  On the other hand, if the result of the determination in S442 is the start of the jackpot (S442: Yes), a jackpot start process for starting the jackpot game (jackpot) is executed (S443). In the jackpot start process (S443), for example, a jackpot opening presentation period is set to a jackpot control timer (not shown) provided in the RAM 203.

  After the processing of S443, a jackpot start command is set (S444). The jackpot start command set in S444 is output to the effect control device 117 by the external output process (S201) of the main process (see FIG. 9). The effect control device 117 recognizes that the jackpot game is started by receiving the jackpot start command.

  After the process of S444, based on the value of the jackpot control timer, it is determined whether it is the opening timing of the specific winning opening 65a (S445). Further, if the result of determination in the process of S441 is a big hit (S441: Yes), the process of S445 is also executed.

  As a result of the determination by the process of S445, if it is the opening timing of the specific winning opening 65a (S445: Yes), an opening setting process is executed to start the round (S446). In the opening setting process (S446), the large opening solenoid (a part of the solenoid 209) is turned on (excited) to open the specific winning opening 65a and the maximum opening period of the specific winning opening 65a (in this embodiment). 30s) is set to the jackpot control timer.

  After the opening time setting process (S446) is executed, it is determined based on the value of the jackpot control timer whether the closing timing of the specific winning opening 65a is indicated (S447). Further, when it is not the opening timing of the specific winning opening 65a as a result of the determination by the process of S445 (S445: No), the process of S447 is also executed.

  If the result of determination in S447 is the closing timing of the specific winning opening 65a (S447: Yes), a closing time setting process is executed to end the round (S448). In the closing time setting process (S448), for example, the large opening opening solenoid is set to OFF to close the specific winning opening 65a, and when the running round is other than the final round, the next round (ie, An interval period (for example, 2 s) until the next specific winning opening 65a is opened is set in a jackpot control timer (not shown).

  On the other hand, as a result of the determination in the process of S447, if it is not the closing timing of the specific winning opening 65a (S447: No), after the specific winning opening 65a is opened, a predetermined number (10 in this embodiment) of balls are specified winning. It is determined whether or not a ball has entered the mouth 65a (S456).

  As a result of the determination by the process of S456, when a predetermined number of balls have entered the specific winning opening 65a after the specific winning opening 65a is opened (S456: Yes), the round end condition is satisfied, so the process of S448 The process proceeds to and the closing time setting process is executed (S448). On the other hand, if a predetermined number of balls have not yet entered the specific winning opening 65a (S456: No), the jackpot process (S205) is terminated and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 9).

  After the closing time setting process (S448) is executed, it is determined whether it is the end of the jackpot, that is, the end of the final round (S449). If the result of the determination in S449 is not the end of the jackpot (S449: No), the jackpot process (S205) is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the result of the determination in S449 is the end of the jackpot (S449: Yes), a jackpot end process for ending the jackpot game is executed (S450). In the jackpot end process (S450), for example, a jackpot ending effect period is set in the jackpot control timer.

  After the processing of S450, a jackpot end command is set (S451). The jackpot end command set in S451 is output to the effect control device 117 by the external output process (S201) of the main process (see FIG. 9). The effect control device 117 recognizes that it is the end timing of the jackpot game by receiving this jackpot end command.

  After the processing of S451, it is determined whether or not a probability variation jackpot flag (not shown) is on (S452). At this time, if the probability variation jackpot flag is on (S452: Yes), the probability variation jackpot is ended, so the probability variation flag 203a is set to on (S453). Next, the hour / middle flag 203b is set to OFF (S454), a probability change start command is set (S455), and the jackpot processing (S205) is terminated. The probability change start command set in S455 is output to the effect control device 117 by the external output process (S201) of the main process (see FIG. 9). The effect control device 117 recognizes that the high probability mode is started by receiving this probability change start command.

  On the other hand, if the probability variation jackpot flag is off (S452: No) as a result of the determination in the process of S452, the normal jackpot is ended, and therefore the short / medium flag 203b is set on (S457). Next, the probability changing flag 203a is set to OFF (S458), a time reduction start command is set (S459), and the jackpot processing (S205) is ended. The short time start command set in S459 is output to the effect control device 117 by the external output process (S201) of the main process (see FIG. 9). The production control device 117 recognizes that the time reduction mode is started by receiving the short start command at this time.

  FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process. The timer interrupt process is executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, for example, every 2 ms. In the timer interrupt process, first, a process for reading various winning switches is executed (S501). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored. When winning detection information is stored in S501, a winning ball command corresponding to the number of winning balls (the number of payout balls) corresponding to the winning detection information is obtained by an external output process (S201) of the main process (see FIG. 9). Is set and transmitted to the payout control device 111 and the effect control device 117, respectively. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, not only the payout control device 111 but also the effect control device 117 can grasp the number of balls paid out as prize balls (that is, the number of payout balls).

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S502). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (738 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI 1 is stored in the corresponding area in the counter buffer in the RAM 203. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (250 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is updated. Is stored in the corresponding area of the counter buffer in the RAM 203.

  Further, the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the second per-random number counter C4 are updated (S503). Specifically, the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the second per-random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1 and their counter values are the maximum values (in this embodiment, , 619, 15, 238, 250), respectively, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding area in the counter buffer in the RAM 203.

  Thereafter, a start winning process is performed in accordance with winning at the first entrance 64 (S504), a firing control process is performed (S505), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. The start winning process (S504) and the launch control process (S505) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 16 and 17, respectively.

  Here, the start winning process (S504) described above will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S504) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15).

  When this start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won a first winning opening 64 (start winning) (S601). If it is determined that the ball has won the first entrance 64 (S601: Yes), whether or not the special figure holding ball number N of the first symbol display device 37 is less than the upper limit (4 in the present embodiment). Is determined (S602).

  At this time, if there is a winning at the first entrance 64 and the number of special figure holding balls N <4 (S602: Yes), the first per-random number counter C1 and the first per-type updated in step S503 The values of the counter C2 and the stop pattern selection counter C3 are stored in the first area among the empty reserved areas in the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 203 (S603).

  Next, 1 is added to the value of the special figure holding ball counter (not shown), that is, the special figure holding ball number N (S604), and a holding number command indicating the value of the special figure holding ball number counter after the addition is issued. Setting is made (S605). The hold number command set by the process of S605 is output to the effect control device 117 by the external output process of S201 executed in the main process (see FIG. 9). Upon receiving the hold number command, the effect control device 117 turns on the same number of lamps as the special figure hold ball number N indicated by the hold number command in the special figure hold lamp 85.

  Next, according to the value of the special figure holding ball counter (the number N of special figure holding balls), the LED (not shown) for displaying the number of holdings in the first symbol display device 37 is turned on, and a new holding number is obtained. Displayed according to the lighting state (S606), the start winning process (S504) is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15).

  On the other hand, there is no winning at the first entrance 64 (S601: No), or even if there is a winning at the first entrance 64, if the number of reserved special figure balls N <4 is not satisfied (S602: No) ), S603 and S604 are skipped, the start winning process (S504) is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15).

  Next, the above-described launch control process (S505) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the firing control process (S505) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15).

  In the launch control process (S505), first, it is determined whether or not the launch permission signal from the payout control device 111 is input, that is, whether the signal is high (S621). As a result of the determination in the process of S621, if the emission permission signal is input, that is, if the signal is high (S621: Yes), it is determined whether or not the emission permission flag 203c is on (S622). ).

  If the firing permission flag 203c is off as a result of the determination in the process of S622 (S622: No), the firing permission flag 203c is set to on since it is the timing when the firing permission signal rises from low to high (S623). .

  After the process of S623, a firing counter (not shown) provided in the RAM 203 is cleared to zero (S624). Note that a launch counter (not shown) is a counter for controlling the interval of a ball launch instruction (output of a launch control signal or the like) to the launch control device 112. In the present embodiment, it is configured such that a sphere launch instruction is given at intervals of 0.6 s.

  After the process of S624, a ball feed control signal is output to the launch control device 112 (S625). Upon receiving the ball feed control signal, the launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the ball is sent to the launch position.

  Next, a firing control signal (firing pulse) is output to the firing control device 122 and the effect control device 117, respectively (S626). Upon receiving this launch control signal, the launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the ball is launched. In addition, when receiving the launch control signal, the production control device 117 executes a launch control signal interruption process (see FIG. 32) described later, and counts the number of shot balls such as the jackpot / medium shot ball counter 273j. Update the counter.

  After the process of S626, the process proceeds to S627. Moreover, if the discharge permission flag 203c is ON as a result of the determination by the process of S622 (S622: Yes), the process of S623 to 626 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S627.

  In S627, it is determined whether or not the firing counter is 300 or more (S627). At this time, if the launch counter is 300 or more (S627: Yes), it is the timing for instructing the launch control device 112 to launch a ball, so the ball feed control signal is sent to the launch control device as in S625. It outputs to 112 (S628). Next, as in S626, the firing control signal is output to the firing control device 122 and the effect control device 117 (S629), the firing control process (S505) is terminated, and the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15) is performed. Return.

  On the other hand, if the result of determination in S627 is that the launch counter is less than 300 (S627: No), it is not the timing to instruct the launch control device 112 to launch a ball, so 1 is added to the launch counter. (S632), the firing control process (S505) is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15).

  Further, as a result of the determination in the process of S621, when the launch permission signal is not input, that is, when the signal is low (S621: No), the launch permission flag 203c is set to off (S630), and the launch is performed. The counter is cleared to zero (S631), the firing control process (S505) is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15).

  FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The NMI interruption process is a process executed when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, and the occurrence information of the power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 by executing the NMI interruption process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as a setting of the power-off occurrence information (S701), and ends the NMI interrupt process. To do.

  Next, payout control executed by the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111 will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 and 20. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing a start-up process of the payout control apparatus 111, and this start-up process is activated when the power is turned on. First, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S801). Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance is set in the stack pointer, and an interrupt mode is set. Then, the RAM access is permitted (S802), and an external interrupt vector is set (S803).

  After that, data backup processing is executed for the RAM 213 in the MPU 211. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 213 (S804). If not stored (S804: No), the backup data is not stored, so the process proceeds to S811. Transition. If power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 (S804: Yes), a RAM determination value is calculated (S805). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S806: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off, the backed up data has been destroyed, so the process moves to S811 even in such a case. As will be described later in the processing of S917 in FIG. 19, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at a work area address in the RAM 213. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 213 is correctly stored.

  In the RAM initialization process of S811 and S812, all areas of the RAM 213 are cleared to 0 (S811), and then the initial value of the RAM 213 is set (S812). Thereafter, the peripheral devices of the MPU 211 are initialized (S809), an interrupt is permitted (S810), and the process proceeds to the main process.

  On the other hand, if the information on occurrence of power interruption is set (S804: Yes) and the RAM judgment value (checksum value etc.) is normal (S806: Yes), the backed up data is retained in the RAM 213. Then, the occurrence information of the power shutdown is cleared (S807), and the payout permission flag 213d is turned off (S808) in order to wait for the payout of the prize ball. Thereafter, the peripheral devices of the MPU 211 are initialized (S809), an interrupt is permitted (S810), and the process proceeds to the main process.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111 will be described with reference to FIG. In this main process, first, a winning ball command, a payout return command, and a payout initialization command from the main control device 110 are received, and a command determination process for determining the type of these commands is performed (S901). In this process, when a normal command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received, a payout permission flag is turned on, and payout of prize balls and lending balls is permitted.

  When the command determination process (S901) ends, it is determined whether or not the payout is permitted, that is, the state of the payout permission flag is determined (S902), and if the payout is not permitted (S902: No), the main control unit is still present. Since 110 is not in a stand-up state, in this case, the command determination process (S901) is repeatedly executed until the payout is permitted in the command determination process (S901). On the other hand, if the payout is permitted in the processing of S902 (S902: Yes), the state return switch 120 is checked, and if it is determined that the state return operation is started, the state return operation is executed (S903).

  Thereafter, the setting of the lower pan full tank state or the lower pan full tank release state is executed according to the change in the state of the lower pan 50 (S904). That is, when the lower pan 50 is determined based on the detection signal of the lower pan full switch, the lower pan full state is set when the lower pan is full. , Set the lower pan full release state. Further, the setting of the tank ball absence state or the tank ball absence release state is executed according to the change in the state of the tank ball (S905). In other words, the tank ball no switch state is determined based on the detection signal of the tank ball no switch, and when there is no tank ball, the setting of the tank ball no state is executed. Perform configuration. Thereafter, the presence / absence of a notification state is determined, and if there is a notification state, notification is made by a 7-segment LED provided in the payout control device 111 (S906).

  Next, a winning ball payout process is executed by each process of S907 to S909. That is, if the total number of winning balls is not 0 (S907: No, S908: No), the winning ball control process is started to pay out winning balls (S909). . On the other hand, if the prize ball cannot be paid out (S907: Yes) or if the total number of prize balls is 0 (S908: Yes), the process proceeds to the lending and payout process.

  In the lending process of S910 to S912, if the lending is not disabled and a lending payout request from the card unit has been received (S910: No, S911: Yes), The lending control process is started. On the other hand, if the rental ball cannot be dispensed (S910: Yes) or if a rental ball dispensing request has not been received (S911: No), the process proceeds to S913. Similarly, after the ball rental control process (S912) is completed, the process proceeds to S913.

  In the process of S913, the control of the vibrator 134 (vibration motor control) is executed on the condition that the ball is clogged (S913). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the occurrence information of power interruption is stored in the RAM 213 (S914). If the occurrence information of power interruption is not stored (S914: No), the power failure signal SG1 is received from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. Since it is not output and the power supply is not shut off, in such a case, the process proceeds to S901, and the main process from S901 to S913 is repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the occurrence information of power interruption is stored in the process of S914 (S914: Yes), the result of the power failure is output due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. NMI interrupt processing has been executed. Therefore, in such a case, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S915), and the command determination process is executed again in order to prevent the reception of a command transmitted from the main controller 110 (S916). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated and stored in the RAM 213 (S917), access to the RAM 213 is prohibited (S918), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and the process cannot be executed. Here, for example, the RAM determination value is a checksum value in the stack area and the work area to be backed up in the RAM 213.

  In the process of S914, since the information on the occurrence of power interruption is confirmed at the timing when one cycle of the main process of the payout control device 111 ends, the process is started up when returning from the state before the power interruption. After the process is completed, the process can be started from S901. In other words, the main process can be started in the same manner as when initialized in the startup process. Therefore, in the process at power-off, the contents of each register used by the MPU 211 are not saved in the stack area, or the stack pointer value is not saved in the initial setting process (S801) without saving the stack pointer value. By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), the process can be started from S901. Therefore, the control burden on the payout control device 111 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without causing the payout control device 111 to malfunction or run away. In addition, since the power-off process is executed at the timing when each process is completed, the amount of information to be backed up in the RAM 213 can be reduced.

  Next, each control process executed by the MPU 271 in the effect control device 117 will be described with reference to FIGS. As processing of the MPU 271, startup processing activated upon power-on, main processing executed after the startup processing, and commands executed every time various commands transmitted from the main control device 110 are received. Roughly divided into reception interrupt processing.

  FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing start-up processing executed by the MPU 271 in the effect control device 117. This start-up process is a process for performing various initial settings of the effect control device 117, and is a process that is executed when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on or when the MPU 271 is reset.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting associated with power-on is performed (S1001). Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Thereafter, a power-on notification process is executed (S1002). This power-on notification process (S1002) is a notification for notifying that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on. This is performed by the decoration units 29 to 33, the display lamp 34, the special figure holding lamp 85, the screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the like.

  After the power-on notification process (S1002) is executed, in order to display the initial screen on the third symbol display device 81, first, effect data (or image data) corresponding to the initial screen is read from the character ROM 275, and the video is displayed. The data is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 276 (S1003). Then, using the effect data, an initial screen is displayed on the third symbol display device (LCD) 81 (S1004).

  Next, the power supply provided in the RAM 273 indicates whether the current startup process is executed because the MPU 271 is reset during the power-off process (see S1109 in FIG. 22) described later. It is determined whether or not a disconnection processing flag (not shown) is turned on (S1005).

  As described above, when an instantaneous voltage drop (instant blackout, so-called “instantaneous power failure”) occurs, main controller 110 transmits a power-off command to effect controller 117 and the like. The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 22, but when the production control device 117 receives the power-off command from the main control device 110, it stores the power-off occurrence information indicating that the power-off command has been received in the RAM 273. Then, power-off processing (see S1109 in FIG. 22) is executed. The power-off process in progress flag is turned on before the power-off process and turned off after the power-off process is completed.

  That is, whether or not the MPU 271 is reset during the power-off process can be determined based on the state of the power-off process flag. It should be noted that data in the RAM 273 is lost during the execution of the power-off process or when the power supply is completely shut down after the completion of the execution. In this case, the power-off process flag is turned off.

  More specifically, the case where the power-off process in progress flag is off is a case where the current startup process is executed after one of the following three states is entered. The first state is a state where the power supply is completely shut off. When the power is completely shut down, the data in the RAM 273 is lost, so that the power-off process in progress flag is turned off.

  As the second state, the power-off process (see S1109 in FIG. 22) was executed because an instantaneous power failure occurred. However, the power-off process does not occur and returns to normal, and then the power-off process is completed. This is a state where the MPU 271 is reset. In this case, since the power is not shut off, the data in the RAM 273 is retained without loss. Further, since the power-off process is completed, the power-off process in progress flag is turned off.

  The third state is a state in which only the MPU 271 of the effect control device 117 is reset due to noise or the like. In other words, if the MPU 271 is reset without executing the power-off process (without receiving the power-off command from the main control device 110), the data in the RAM 273 is held while the power-off process in progress flag remains off. Is done.

  If the current startup process is executed after any of the three states described above, that is, if the power-off flag is off (S1005: No), whether or not the data in the RAM 273 has been destroyed is determined. Confirm (S1006). Note that whether or not the data has been destroyed is that the data in the RAM 273 is normally held when only the MPU 271 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started. This is because the control of the effect control device 117 can be continued using the data.

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 273 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 273 by the process of S1009 described later. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is “55AAh”, there is no data destruction in the RAM 273. Conversely, if the data is not “55AAh”, the data destruction in the RAM 273 can be confirmed. If data destruction of the RAM 273 is confirmed (S1006: Yes), the process proceeds to S1007, and initialization of the RAM 273 is started. On the other hand, if the data destruction of the RAM 273 is not confirmed (S1006: No), the process proceeds to S1010.

  More specifically, when the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut down, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 273 (the RAM 273 is turned off when the power is turned off). Since the memory is lost), it is determined that the data in the RAM 273 has been destroyed (S1006: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1007. On the other hand, the power cut-off process (see S1109 in FIG. 22) was executed because an instantaneous power failure occurred, but the power was not cut off and returned to normal, and then the MPU 271 was reset after the execution of the power cut-off process was completed. Thus, when the current startup process is started or after the MPU 271 of the effect control device 117 is reset due to noise or the like, the current startup process is started. Since the keyword “55AAh” is stored, the data in the RAM 273 is determined to be normal (S1006: No), and the process proceeds to S1010.

  In the process of S1005, when the power-off process flag is on (S1005: Yes), the power-off process (see S1109 in FIG. 22) was executed because an instantaneous power failure occurred, but the power-off occurred. In this case, the MPU 271 is reset in the middle of executing the power-off process. In this case, the current storage state of the RAM 273 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, since it is difficult to continue control in such a case, the process proceeds to S1007 and initialization of the RAM 273 is started.

  In the process of S1007, the entire storage area of the RAM 273 is checked (S1007), and it is determined whether the RAM 273 is normal based on the check result (S1008). As a check method performed in S1007, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”. Determine. The writing and checking for each byte are performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. This RAM 273 read / write check clears all storage areas of the RAM 273 to zero.

  If an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 273, it is determined that there is an abnormality in the RAM 273 (S1008: No), the abnormality of the RAM 273 is notified (S1014), and the power is shut off. Loop endlessly. The abnormality of the RAM 273 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the sound output device 226 may output a sound to notify the RAM 273 of an abnormality. Moreover, you may comprise so that abnormality of RAM273 may be alert | reported on the screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81. FIG.

  On the other hand, if the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 273, it is determined that the RAM 273 is normal (S1008: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 273, and the RAM destruction check data Is set (S1009). By checking the keyword “55AAh” written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 273.

  After the process of S1109, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S1010). The power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process (see S1109 in FIG. 22) is executed, and turned off when the power is completely cut off. Therefore, when the power-off flag is on when the startup process is executed, the power-off process was executed because an instantaneous power failure occurred. Or when the MPU 271 is reset upon completion of execution.

  Therefore, as a result of checking in the process of S1010, if the power-off flag is on (S1010: Yes), the work area (work area) of the RAM 273 is cleared to initialize each process of the effect control device 117. (S1011) After setting the initial value of the RAM 273 (S1012), the interrupt permission is set (S1013), and the process proceeds to the main process.

  On the other hand, the case where the power-off flag is off at the time of start-up processing is, for example, when power is turned on again after the power is completely shut down (data in the RAM 273 including data of the power-off flag is lost). Or the MPU 271 of the effect control device 117 is reset due to noise or the like, and the power-off flag is not turned on (that is, without receiving the power-off command from the main control device 110). In this case, data in the RAM 273 is held.

  Therefore, as a result of checking in the process of S1010, if the power-off flag is turned off (S1010: No), the process of S1011 that is the work area clear process of the RAM 273 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S1012. Is set (S1012), interrupt permission is set (S1013), and the process proceeds to the main process.

  Note that when the power-off flag is turned off, the clearing process of S1011 is skipped because only the MPU 271 of the effect control device 117 is reset due to noise or the like, and the start-up process is started. This is because the control of the production control device 117 can be continued by saving the work area data without clearing it. In addition, when the processing of S1007 to S1009 is executed, all the storage areas of the RAM 273 have already been cleared by the processing of S1007, so that it is not necessary to clear the work area of the RAM 273 again.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 22, the main process executed after the startup process described above will be described. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU 271 in the effect control device 117. This main process is a process for executing control related to game effects (such as voice output and display), and is executed after the start-up process (see FIG. 21) of the above-described effect control device 117, and thereafter repeatedly. It is a process to be executed.

  In the main processing, first, it is determined whether or not 1 ms or more has elapsed since the previous determination was executed (that is, since the processing of S1101 was executed last time) (S1101), and the previous determination is executed. If 1 ms or more has elapsed since then (S1101: Yes), an audio lamp effect process, which is a process of executing various lamp lighting control, audio output control, and the like, is executed (S1102), and the process proceeds to S1103. . Details of the sound lamp effect process (S1102) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if 1 ms has not yet elapsed from the previous determination as a result of the determination in S1101 (S1101: No), the process of S1102 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1103. Note that when 1 ms has not elapsed since the previous determination was executed in S1101, the audio lamp effect process (S1102) is skipped in the audio lamp effect process (S1102). This is because it is not necessary to execute lamp lighting control and audio output control with a cycle shorter than 1 ms.

  In the processing of S1103, it is determined whether or not 20 ms or more has elapsed since the previous determination was executed (that is, since the processing of S1103 was executed last time) (S1103). At this time, when 20 ms or more have elapsed since the previous determination was executed (S1103: Yes), a moving image (image) corresponding to the variation effect and a moving image (image) corresponding to the jackpot effect are displayed in the third symbol display. A display effect process, which is a process for displaying on the device (LCD) 81, is executed (S1104). Details of the display effect process (S1104) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After execution of the display effect process (S1104), the acquired number-of-balls display process, which is a process for displaying the acquired number of balls such as the total number of acquired balls 81a1 on the third symbol display device 81 (the acquired number-of-balls display area 81a), is executed. (S1105), the process proceeds to S1106. Details of this acquired ball number display process (S1105) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, as a result of the determination by the processing of S1103, if 20 ms has not yet elapsed since the previous determination was executed (S1103: No), the processing of S1104 and S1105 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S1106. It should be noted that the display effect process (S1104) is skipped when the display effect process (S1104) has not elapsed since the previous determination was executed in S1103 because the third symbol display device (LCD) 81 is skipped. This is because it is not necessary to execute such a process with a cycle shorter than 20 ms because the image to be displayed is updated according to the variation time.

  In the process of S1106, it is determined whether or not occurrence information of power interruption is stored in the RAM 273 (S1106). The information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored when a power interruption command is received from main controller 110. If it is determined by the processing of S1106 that the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored (S1106: Yes), both the power interruption flag and the power interruption processing flag are turned on (S1108), and the power interruption processing is performed. Execute (S1109). After executing the power-off process (S1109), the power-off process flag is turned off (S1110), and then the process is looped infinitely.

  In the power-off process of S1109, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off, and the audio output device 226, the illumination units 29 to 33, the display lamp 34, and the third symbol display device 81 are turned on. Turn off the output. Further, the storage of the information on occurrence of power interruption is also erased. Each output port is turned off in order to prevent abnormal display and abnormal audio output from being performed. The player should not be confused by abnormal display or abnormal audio output. Because.

  On the other hand, as a result of the determination by the process of S1106, if the information on occurrence of power interruption is not stored (S1106: No), the keyword “55AAh” stored in the RAM 273 by the process of S1009 of the startup process (see FIG. 21) is stored. Based on this, it is determined whether or not the RAM 273 is destroyed (S1107). If the RAM 273 is not destroyed (S1107: No), the process returns to S1101, and the above-described processes of S1101 to S1106 are repeated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the RAM 273 is destroyed by the process of S1107 (S1107: Yes), the process is looped infinitely in order to stop the subsequent processes. Here, since it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and the process is in an infinite loop, the display effect process (S1104) is not executed, and thereafter, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is not changed. Thus, the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, and can call a hall clerk or the like to request repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. When it is confirmed that the RAM 273 is destroyed, the audio output device 226, the illumination units 29 to 33, the display lamp 34, the special figure holding lamp 85, the screen of the third symbol display device 81, etc. It is good also as what performs notification of RAM destruction.

  Next, the above-described sound lamp effect process (S1102) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing an audio lamp effect process (S1102) executed in the main process (see FIG. 22) of the effect control device 117.

  In the sound lamp effect process (S1102), first, the output of each lamp (for example, the illumination units 29 to 33, the display lamp 34, etc.) is set so as to be in the lighting state of the lamp edited in the process of S1225 described later. (S1221).

  After the process of S1221, a customer waiting effect process (S1222) is executed. In the customer waiting effect process (S1222), when the time when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player has elapsed for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds, 1 minute, etc.), the display on the third symbol display device 81 is displayed as a customer waiting effect. Set to switch to.

  The “customer waiting effect” is a display effect (for example, a title) that is displayed on the 3rd pattern gaming device 81 when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player for a predetermined period of time, and is displayed on the third figure gaming device 81. Display and demo display). The time during which the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player can be measured by, for example, a period during which neither the variable display nor the jackpot effect is executed, or a period during which the touch sensor 51a of the operation handle 51 is not detected. Such a period (a time during which the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player) may be timed by the effect control device 117 or may be timed by the main control device 110 and reported to the effect control device 117 by a command. .

  After execution of the customer waiting effect process (S1222), the reserved number display update process is executed (S1223). In the hold number display update process (S1223), the number of lighting of the special figure hold lamp 85 is updated based on the hold number command received from the main controller 110.

  Next, frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S1224). In this frame button input monitoring / production process (S1224), the input from the frame button 22 operated (pressed) by the player to enhance the production effect is monitored, and the signal inputted from the frame button 22 is changed from low to high. This is a process of setting to perform an effect corresponding to the case of switching to (when the frame button 22 is operated from the non-operation state). For example, when a notice character appears at the start of fluctuation display, the expected value of the jackpot due to the current fluctuation is displayed by pressing the frame button 22, or the feeling of expectation for the jackpot is displayed by pressing the frame button 22 during reach production. Set to change to a production that you can have. Further, the frame button 22 may be a determination button for selecting one reach effect among a plurality of reach effects. If the frame button 22 is not provided on the pachinko machine, the process of S1224 can be omitted.

  After executing the frame button input monitoring / production process (S1224), the lamp editing process is executed (S1225), and the sound editing / output process is executed (S1226). In the lamp editing process (S1225), the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33, the display lamps 34, and the like are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output process (S1226), the output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the setting. .

  After the process of S1206, a liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1227), the sound lamp effect process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process (S1227), based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted and received from the main controller 110, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set. Based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution management process (S1227), the lamp editing process in S1225 and the sound editing / output process in S1226 are executed.

  Next, the display effect process (S1104) described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the display effect process (S1104) executed in the main process (see FIG. 22) of the effect control device 117.

  In the display effect process (S1104), first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuating effect being executed on the third symbol display device 81 is an effect for jackpot (that is, whether or not it is a jackpot) (S1221). If it is medium (S1241: Yes), the jackpot effect process is executed (S1248). In this jackpot effect process, effect data corresponding to the jackpot effect performed on the third symbol display device 81 is read from the character ROM 275 and written in a predetermined area of the video RAM 276 to update the image of the jackpot effect. After the big hit effect process (S1248) ends, the display effect process (S1104) ends, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 22).

  On the other hand, if it is not a big hit in the process of S1241 (S1241: No), it is determined whether or not the 3rd symbol display device 81 is executing the variation display of the 3rd symbol (that is, whether or not it is varying). (S1242). At this time, if not changing (S1242: No), it is determined whether a change start flag (not shown) provided in the RAM 273 is ON (S1243).

  The variation start flag (not shown) is a flag for instructing the start of variation display of the third symbol. When it is determined in S1243 that the variation start flag is on, the variation display of the third symbol is started. . This variation start flag is set to ON when a variation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see FIG. 26), and is set to OFF when starting the variation display of the third symbol.

  If the result of determination in S1243 is that the variation start flag is off (S1243: No), other display processing is executed (S1250). The other display processing is, for example, display processing such as a customer waiting effect that is executed when a predetermined time has elapsed when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player. After the execution of the other display process (S1250), the display effect process is terminated and the process returns to the main process.

  On the other hand, if the variation start flag is on as a result of the determination by the processing of S1243 (S1243: Yes), the variation start flag is turned off (S1244), and the variation time counter (not shown) provided in the RAM 273 is set. An initial value is set (S1245). Note that a variation time counter (not shown) is a counter for measuring the elapsed time from the start of variation display of the third symbol. Note that the initial value set in the variation time counter in S1245 is the time obtained from the variation time of the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command and the addition / subtraction value of the effect time indicated by the effect time addition / subtraction command.

  After the processing of S1245, it is determined whether or not the value of the variation time counter is greater than 0, that is, whether or not it is within the variation time (S1246). On the other hand, if the result of determination in step S1242 is that the third symbol variation display is being executed (in variation) (S1242: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value of the variation time counter (S1249), and the processing in step S1246 is performed. It shifts to and it is determined whether it is within the fluctuation time.

  If the result of determination in S1246 is within the variation time (S1246: Yes), symbol variation display is executed (S1247). Specifically, in the process of S1247, using the variation effect data stored in the variation effect data storage area (not shown) of the video RAM 276, the third symbol display device (LCD) 81 displays the variation effect data ( An image corresponding to a fluctuation effect such as high-speed fluctuation) is displayed. After the process of S1247, the display effect process is terminated and the process returns to the main process.

  On the other hand, as a result of the determination by the processing of S1246, when the value of the variation time counter is 0, that is, when the variation time has ended (S1246: No), it is set based on the type command received from the main controller 110. The stopped symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device (LCD) 81 (S1251), the display effect process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 25, the acquired number-of-balls display process (S1105) will be described. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the acquired ball number display process (S1105) executed in the main process (see FIG. 22) of the effect control device 117.

  In the acquired number-of-balls display process (S1105), it is determined whether or not the jackpot end display flag 273s is on (S1261). If the jackpot end display flag 273s is on (S1261: Yes), the current big hit This is the timing for displaying the number of acquired balls and the total number of acquired balls (the number of acquired balls during a series of advantageous states) in the acquired ball number display area 81a of the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, in such a case, first, the number of balls won in the current big hit is calculated (S1262). Specifically, in S1262, the current number of hit jackpot medium hit balls is calculated by subtracting the value of the current jackpot medium hitting ball number memory 273m from the value of the current jackpot medium payout ball number memory 273o.

  After the processing of S1262, the display target at this timing is displayed in the acquired ball number display area 81a (S1263). Specifically, in S1263, the current number of winning balls calculated in S1262 and the total number of acquired balls (that is, the value of the number of acquired balls during advantageous state 273g) are displayed in the acquired number-of-plays display area 81a. . Note that the number of acquired balls displayed in the acquired ball number display area 81a by the processing of S1263 (the current number of hits and the total number of acquired balls) is changed from the game mode to the high probability mode or the time reduction mode. Display is continued until the processing of S1266 is executed at the start of the first fluctuation. After the processing of S1263, the jackpot end display flag 273s is set to OFF (S1264), and the processing proceeds to S1265.

  On the other hand, if the jackpot end display flag 273s is off (S1261: No) as a result of the determination in the process of S1261, the timing for displaying the current number of hits in the jackpot and the total number of acquired balls in the acquired number-of-plays display area 81a Therefore, the processing of S1262 to S1264 is skipped, and the processing proceeds to S1265.

  In S1265, it is determined whether or not the change start display flag 273t is ON (S1265). At this time, if the change start display flag 273t is on (S1265: Yes), it is the first change start time after the game mode shifts to the high probability mode or the time reduction mode, and the total number of acquired balls is acquired. This is the timing for display in the number display area 81a. Therefore, in such a case, the value (that is, the total number of acquired balls) of the acquired number of balls memory 273g during the advantageous state is displayed in the acquired number of balls display area 81a (S1266). At this timing, the current number of hits and the total number of acquired balls are displayed in the acquired number of balls display area 81a, and the total number of acquired balls is displayed by switching to the display content.

  After the process of S1266, the first display flag 273v is set to ON (S1267), the fluctuation start display flag 273t is set to OFF (S1268), and the process proceeds to S1269. Since the first display flag 273v is set to ON in S1267, the total number of acquired balls displayed in the acquired ball number display area 81a by the process of S1266 continues to be displayed while being updated as needed until the display is next switched. .

  On the other hand, if the variation start display flag 273t is OFF (S1265: No) as a result of the determination by the processing of S1265, it is not the timing to display the total acquired number of balls in the acquired number of balls display area 81a, so S1266 to S1268. This process is skipped, and the process proceeds to S1269.

  In S1269, it is determined whether or not the probability change time short end display flag 273u is on (S1269). At this time, if the probability change time short end display flag 273u is turned on (S1269: Yes), the total number of acquired balls, the jackpot average average acquired number of balls, and the probability change time shortening are accompanied by the end of a series of advantageous state periods. This is the timing for displaying the medium average acquired number of balls in the acquired number of balls display area 81a. Therefore, in such a case, first, the average number of acquired balls for jackpot is calculated (S1270), and the average number of acquired balls for probability change time is calculated (S1271).

  Specifically, in S1270, by dividing the value in the advantageous state big hit medium winning ball number memory 273h by the value of the big hit number counter 273b, the big hit medium average obtained number of balls (each big hit generated during the period of the advantageous state). (Average value of the number of balls obtained at the time). On the other hand, in S1271, by dividing the value of the advantage state probability change time short and medium acquisition number of balls memory 273i by the value of the probability change time shortage counter 273f, the probability change time short and medium average acquisition number of balls The average number of acquired balls in the high probability mode and each time shortening mode) is calculated.

  After the processing of S1271, the value in the advantageous state acquired ball number memory 273g (that is, the total number of acquired balls), the jackpot average acquired ball number calculated in S1270, and the probability variation time average acquired ball number calculated in S1270 It is displayed in the acquired ball number display area 81a (S1272). At this timing, the total number of acquired balls is displayed in the acquired number-of-balls display area 81a, so that the display content is switched to the total acquired number of balls, the average number of hits during the jackpot, and the average gained ball during the probability change time. Display the number.

  After the processing of S1272, the big hit number counter 273b is cleared to zero (S1273), and the probability change time count counter 273f is cleared to zero (S1274). Next, the second display flag 273w is set to ON (S1275), the probability change short time display flag 273u is set to OFF (S1276), and the process proceeds to S1277. Since the second display flag 273w is set to ON in S1275, each acquired ball number displayed in the acquired ball number display area 81a by the process of S1272 is determined at a predetermined erasing timing (for example, five seconds after being displayed). ).

  On the other hand, as a result of the determination in the processing of S1269, if the probability change time display flag 273u is off (S1269: No), each acquired number of balls such as the jackpot average acquired number of balls is displayed in the acquired number of balls display area 81a. Since it is not timing, the processing of S1270 to S1276 is skipped, and the processing proceeds to S1277.

  In S1277, it is determined whether or not the second display flag 273w is on (S1277). At this time, if the second display flag 273w is on (S1277: Yes), the erasure timing has arrived because it is during the display period of each acquired ball number displayed in the acquired ball number display area 81a by the process of S1272 It is determined whether or not it has been done (S1278).

  As a result of the determination by the processing of S1278, when the erasing timing has arrived (S1278: Yes), the acquired number-of-balls display erasing process is executed to erase the number of acquired balls displayed in the acquired number-of-balls display area 81a ( S1279). Next, the second display flag 273x is set to OFF (S1280).

  After the processing of S1280, the acquired ball number memory 273g during advantageous state is cleared to zero (S1281), the advantageous state large hitting ball number memory 273h is cleared to zero (S1282), and the advantageous state probability changing time medium number acquired ball number memory 273i is cleared to zero. (S1283), the acquired number-of-balls display process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process.

  On the other hand, if the second display flag 273w is off as a result of the determination in the process of S1277 (S1277: No), the process of S1278 to S1283 is skipped and the acquired number-of-balls display process is terminated. Further, when the erase timing has not yet arrived as a result of the determination by the processing of S1278 (S1278: No), the processing of S1279 to S1283 is skipped, and the acquired ball number display processing is ended.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 26, a command reception interrupt process executed by the MPU 271 in the effect control device 117 will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing command reception interrupt processing. This command reception interrupt process is an interrupt process that is executed every time various commands transmitted from the main controller 110 are received.

  In the command reception interrupt process, it is first determined whether or not a jackpot start command has been received (S1301). At this time, if the jackpot start command has not been received (S1301: No), the process proceeds to S1302. On the other hand, when the jackpot start command is received (S1301: Yes), the jackpot medium flag 273a is set to ON (S1311), and the process proceeds to S1302.

  In the process of S1302, it is determined whether a jackpot end command has been received (S1302). At this time, if the jackpot end command has not been received (S1302: No), the process proceeds to S1303. On the other hand, when the jackpot end command is received (S1302: Yes), the jackpot end process is executed (S1312), and the process proceeds to S1303. Details of the jackpot end time process (S1312) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S1303, it is determined whether an advantageous state end command has been received (S1303). At this time, if the advantageous state end command has not been received (S1303: No), the process proceeds to S1304. On the other hand, when the advantageous state end command is received (S1303: Yes), the advantageous state end command reception flag 273r is set to ON (S1313), and the process proceeds to S1304.

  In the process of S1304, it is determined whether a probability change start command has been received (S1304). At this time, when the probability change start command has not been received (S1304: No), the process proceeds to S1305. On the other hand, when the probability change start command is received (S1304: Yes), the probability change in progress flag 273c is set to ON (S1314), the probability change time short start flag 273e is set to ON (S1315), and the process proceeds to S1305. .

  In the process of S1305, it is determined whether a probability change end command has been received (S1305). At this time, if the probability change end command has not been received (S1305: No), the process proceeds to S1306. On the other hand, if a probability change end command is received (S1305: Yes), a probability change end process is executed (S1316), and the process proceeds to S1306. The detailed process of the probability change end process (S1316) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S1306, it is determined whether or not a time reduction start command has been received (S1306). At this time, if the short time start command has not been received (S1306: No), the process proceeds to S1307. On the other hand, if the time reduction start command is received (S1306: Yes), the time reduction medium flag 273d is set to ON (S1317), the probability change time reduction start flag 273e is set to ON (S1318), and the process proceeds to S1307. .

  In the processing of S1307, it is determined whether or not a time reduction end command has been received (S1307). At this time, if the short time end command has not been received (S1307: No), the process proceeds to S1308. On the other hand, if a time-shutdown command is received (S1307: Yes), a time-shutdown time-end process is executed (S1319), and the process proceeds to S1308. The detailed processing of the time reduction end processing (S1319) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S1308, it is determined whether a variation pattern command has been received (S1308). At this time, when the variation pattern command has not been received (S1308: No), the process proceeds to S1309. On the other hand, if a variation pattern command is received (S1308: Yes), a variation start process is executed (S1320), and the process proceeds to S1309. The detailed process of the fluctuation start process (S1320) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S1309, it is determined whether or not a prize ball command has been received (S1309). At this time, if no prize ball command has been received (S1309: No), the process proceeds to S1310. On the other hand, when a prize ball command is received (S1309: Yes), a payout ball count process is executed (S1321), and the process proceeds to S1310. Details of the payout ball count process (S1321) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S1310, it is determined whether another command has been received (S1310). At this time, if no other command has been received (S1310: No), the command reception interrupt process is terminated. On the other hand, when another command is received (S1310: Yes), processing according to the other command is executed (S1322), and this command reception interrupt processing is terminated. In addition, as a process according to other commands (S1322), for example, when a type command is received, a stop symbol is set, or when an effect time addition / subtraction command is received, the effect time addition / subtraction value is set. There is a case where a corresponding notice effect (for example, a slip effect or a return effect) is determined.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 27, the above-described jackpot end process (S1312) will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end time process (S1312) executed in the above-described command reception interrupt process (see FIG. 26).

  In the big hit end process (S1312), first, the big hit medium flag 273a is set to OFF (S1401), and 1 is added to the big hit number counter 273b (S1402). Next, the number of hit balls during the big hit this time is calculated (S1403). Specifically, in S1403, the current big hit hit ball number is calculated by subtracting the value of the previous shot number memory 273l from the value of the big hit middle shot number counter 273j.

  After the processing of S1403, the current jackpot / medium firing ball number calculated in S1403 is stored in the current jackpot / medium firing ball number memory 273m (S1404), and the value of the jackpot / medium firing ball number counter 273j is stored in the previous firing ball number memory 273l. Store (S1405).

  After the processing of S1405, the current number of big hit payout balls is calculated (S1406). Specifically, in S1406, the current jackpot medium payout ball number is calculated by subtracting the value in the previous payout ball number memory 273n from the value in the big hit medium payout ball number memory 273k.

  After the processing of S1406, the current jackpot / medium payout ball number calculated in S1406 is stored in the current jackpot / medium payout ball number memory 273o (S1407), and the value of the jackpot / medium payout ball number memory 273k is stored in the previous payout ball number memory value 273n. Store (S1408). After the processing of S1408, the jackpot end display flag 273s is set to ON (S1409), and the jackpot end processing is ended.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 28, the above-described probability variation end process (S1316) will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the probability change end process (S1316) executed in the above-described command reception interrupt process (see FIG. 26).

  In the probability change end process (S1316), first, the probability change flag 273c is set to OFF (S1421), and 1 is added to the probability change short-time counter 273f (S1422). Next, it is determined whether or not the advantageous state end command reception flag 273r is on (S1423). At this time, if the advantageous state end command reception flag 273r is off (S1423: No), since the series of advantageous states is continued thereafter, the probability variation end process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the advantageous state end command reception flag 273r is on (S1423: Yes) as a result of the determination by the processing of S1423, it is the timing when a series of advantageous state periods ends, so the probability change time short end display flag 273u. Is set to ON (S1424), the first display flag 273v is set to OFF (S1425), and the process at the end of probability change ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 29, the above-described time-short end process (S1318) will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the short time end process (S1318) executed in the above-described command reception interrupt process (see FIG. 26).

  In the time shortening end process (S1318), first, the time shortening flag 273d is set to OFF (S1441), and 1 is added to the probability change time count counter 273f (S1442). Next, it is determined whether or not the advantageous state end command reception flag 273r is on (S1443). At this time, if the advantageous state end command reception flag 273r is off (S1443: No), since the series of advantageous states is continued thereafter, the time-short-end processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the advantageous state end command reception flag 273r is turned on as a result of the determination by the processing of S1443 (S1443: Yes), it is the timing when a series of advantageous state periods ends, so the probability change time short end display flag 273u. Is set to ON (S1444), the first display flag 273v is set to OFF (S1445), and the time-short-end processing is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 30, the above-described change start process (S1320) will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation start process (S1320) executed in the above-described command reception interrupt process (see FIG. 26).

  In the variation start process (S1320), first, a variation start flag (not shown) provided in the RAM 273 is set to ON (S1461), and it is determined whether the probability change short start flag 273e is ON (S1462). ).

  If the result of determination in S1462 is that the probability change short start flag 273e is off (S1462: No), the variation start process is terminated. On the other hand, when the probability change short start flag 273e is on (S1462: Yes), the change start display flag 273t is set to on (S1463), and the probability change short start flag 273e is set to off (S1464). The process at the start of fluctuation is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 31, the above-described payout ball count processing (S1321) will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the payout ball count process (S1321) executed in the command reception interrupt process (see FIG. 26) described above.

  In the payout ball count processing (S1321), first, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag 273a is on (S1481). At this time, if the jackpot hitting flag 273a is on (S1481: Yes), the jackpot payout ball memory 273k is added by adding the number of payout balls indicated by the prize ball command to the value of the jackpot payout ball number memory 273k. Is updated (S1482).

  After the processing of S1482, the contents of the advantageous state big hit ball number memory 273h are updated by adding the payout ball number indicated by the prize ball command to the value in the advantageous state big hit medium number acquired ball number memory 273h (S1483). After the process of S1483, the process proceeds to S1484.

  On the other hand, if the result of the determination in S1481 is that the big hit flag 273a is off (S1481: No), it is determined whether the probability changing flag 273c is on (S1487). At this time, if the probability changing flag 273c is on (S1487: Yes), the number of paying balls indicated by the prize ball command is added to the value in the probability changing short / medium paying ball number memory 273q to thereby calculate the number of paying balls in the probability changing time. The contents of the memory 273q are updated (S1488).

  After the processing of S1488, the contents of the advantageous state big hit number of balls memory 273i are updated by adding the number of payout balls indicated by the prize ball command to the value of the advantage state probability change time short and medium number of acquired balls memory 273i (S1489). . After the process of S1489, the process proceeds to S1484.

  In S1484, by adding the number of payout balls indicated by the prize ball command to the value of the acquired number-of-balls memory 273g in the advantageous state, the content of the acquired number-of-balls memory 273g in the advantageous state is updated (S1484).

  As a result of the determination in S1487, if the probability changing flag 273c is off (S1487: No), it is determined whether or not the hour / short flag 273d is on (S1490). At this time, if the hour / middle flag 273c is on (S1490: Yes), the process proceeds to S1488.

  After the process of S1484, it is determined whether or not the first display flag 273v is on (S1485). At this time, if the first display flag 273v is on (S1485: Yes), it is during the display period of the total acquired number of balls in the high probability mode or the time shortening mode, and is therefore displayed in the acquired number of balls display area 81a. The acquired number of balls is updated to the value of the acquired number of balls memory 273g in the advantageous state updated by the processing of S1484 (S1486), and the paid-out ball number counting processing is ended.

  On the other hand, if the result of determination in S1485 is that the first display flag 273v is off (S1485: No), the processing in S1486 is skipped and the payout ball count process is terminated. Also, as a result of the determination by the processing of S1490, when the hour / short flag 273c is off (S1490: No), the payout ball count processing is ended.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 32, the firing control signal interrupt process executed by the MPU 271 in the effect control device 117 will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing a firing control signal interrupt process. This launch control signal interrupt process is an interrupt process that is executed each time a launch control signal (fire pulse) output from the main controller 110 is received, that is, every time a rising edge of the launch control signal is detected. is there.

  In the firing control signal interrupt process, first, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag 273a is on (S1501). At this time, if the big hit / medium flag 273a is ON (S1501: Yes), 1 is added to the big hit / medium shot ball counter 273j (S1502).

  After the processing of S1502, by subtracting 1 from the value in the advantageous state big hit middle number acquired ball number memory 273h, the contents of the advantageous state big hit medium number acquired ball number memory 273h are updated (S1503), and the process proceeds to S1504.

  On the other hand, if the result of determination in S1501 is that the big hit flag 273a is off (S1501: No), it is determined whether the probability changing flag 273c is on (S1507). At this time, if the probability variation flag 273c is on (S1507: Yes), 1 is added to the probability variation short / medium firing ball number counter 273p (S1508). Next, 1 is subtracted from the value of the number-of-short-term acquired ball number memory 273i in the advantageous state probability change time (S1509), and the process proceeds to S1504. In S1504, by subtracting 1 from the value of the acquired number-of-balls memory 273g in the advantageous state, the contents of the acquired number-of-balls memory 273g in the advantageous state are updated (S1504).

  As a result of the determination in S1507, if the probability changing flag 273c is off (S1507: No), it is determined whether or not the hour / short flag 273d is on (S1510). At this time, if the hour / middle flag 273c is on (S1510: Yes), the process proceeds to S1508.

  After the processing of S1504, it is determined whether or not the first display flag 273v is on (S1505). At this time, if the first display flag 273v is on (S1505: Yes), it is during the display period of the total acquired number of balls in the high probability mode or the time shortening mode, and is therefore displayed in the acquired number of balls display area 81a. The acquired number of balls is updated to the value of the acquired number of acquired balls memory 273g in the advantageous state updated by the process of S1504 (S1506), and the firing control signal interrupt process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the first display flag 273v is off as a result of the determination in the process of S1505 (S1505: No), the process of S1506 is skipped and the firing control signal interrupt process is terminated. Also, as a result of the determination by the process of S1510, when the hour / middle flag 273c is off (S1510: No), the firing control signal interrupt process is terminated.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the total number of acquired balls 81a1, which is the balance between the number of shot balls thrown in and the number of paid-out balls paid out as prize balls. In addition, since the number of acquired balls such as the average number of acquired balls in the jackpot is calculated and displayed in the total acquired ball number display area 81a at various timings, the player has apparently acquired by paying out the winning balls. Instead of the number of game balls (that is, the number of payout balls), the actual balance can be realized by the player. The balls used for the game are lent out by the player paying a consideration such as banknotes, so that the player himself can realize the number of balls acquired in the game performed using such a ball, so that the player himself It is possible to increase the interest of games that are paid for.

  In particular, the number of acquired balls displayed in the total acquired ball number display area 81a (the total acquired number of balls 81a1, the average number of acquired balls in the jackpot, etc.) Since it is the number of acquired balls during the period from the start of the gaming state to the end of the high probability mode or the time shortening mode according to the end condition defined by the number of executions of the variable display, for example, there are the following advantages .

  For example, advantageous states such as jackpot (special gaming state), high probability mode or time reduction mode are more advantageous than the normal state (ie, normal mode), and are advantageous for the player. The number of acquired balls during a series of advantageous periods generated by a game is information that is particularly interesting to a player who pays a consideration for the game balls to be inserted. Therefore, by displaying the number of acquired balls during the series of advantageous states, if the player feels that the player has obtained a sufficient number of balls during the series of advantageous states, As a result, the player's satisfaction with the game will greatly increase.

  On the other hand, if the player feels that the number of acquired balls is insufficient during a series of advantageous periods, the player can suspect the condition of the nail adjustment, etc. The player can be given an opportunity to change the (pachinko machine 10). Therefore, it is possible to give a possibility of avoiding a situation where the player keeps playing with an unfavorable nail adjustment game machine, and it is possible to prevent the dissatisfaction of the player from accumulating. Therefore, the interest of the game can be enhanced also in this respect.

  In addition, the number of acquired balls, such as the average number of hits during jackpots and the average number of balls acquired during short and long times, can be an index for the player to select a more advantageous base, so the player is convinced by himself. A stand that can be selected can be selected. Therefore, since the player can use the pachinko machine that he / she has convinced and selected, the player can be satisfied with the game, and the interest of the game can be enhanced in this respect as well.

  In general, the number of balls to be paid out during the jackpot is almost constant, but the number of balls thrown in that period (that is, the number of fired balls) is indefinite. The number varies mainly depending on the number of fired balls. In other words, the number of balls acquired during the big hit mainly varies depending on how the nail is adjusted. Therefore, by displaying the average number of acquired balls in the jackpot in the acquired ball number display area 81a, it is easy to guess a situation that can be advantageous or disadvantageous for itself, such as the state of nail adjustment.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the number of shot balls used for calculation of the number of acquired balls is counted using a shot control signal output from the main controller 110 based on the operation of the operation handle 51. The number of payout balls is counted using a prize ball command that actually indicates the number of prize balls to be paid out to the payout control means 111 by the main control device 110, so that the number of acquired balls can be obtained with suitable accuracy. . Further, since the operation of the operation handle 51 is performed by the player, the player determines the number of acquired balls in a game (that is, a game performed by the player) performed based on the operation of the operation handle 51 by the player. You can feel and enhance the interest of the games you play.

  In the first embodiment, the “average number of acquired balls during probability change time” is calculated as an average value of the number of acquired balls per one high probability mode or one time shortening mode, but a series of advantageous states It is good also as an average value of the number of acquired balls per change display in each high probability mode or each time shortening mode which occurred during the period. In addition, in order to distinguish this from the first and second average average number of balls acquired in the first embodiment (average value of the number of acquired balls in each high probability mode and each time shortening mode generated during a series of advantageous states), The average number of acquired balls during the probability change time of the example, that is, the average value of the number of acquired balls per change display in each high probability mode or each time shortening mode that occurred during a series of advantageous states is “second”. This is referred to as “the average number of balls acquired in the short and long time period”.

  Such a modification will be described with reference to FIGS. In this modification, the same parts as those in the first embodiment described above are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 33 is a block diagram showing a configuration of the RAM 273 of the effect control device 117 in the present modification. As shown in FIG. 33, in this modification, an advantageous state variation number counter 273x is provided in place of the probability variation time count counter 273f. Further, the RAM 273 of this modification has an advantageous state flag 273y.

  The advantageous state change frequency counter 273x is a counter that counts the number of change displays executed during a series of advantageous state periods. The advantageous state change frequency counter 273x is incremented by one each time a change display is started during the advantageous state period. Then, every time the production control device 117 receives the advantageous state end command from the main control device 110, the advantageous state variation number counter 273x is cleared to zero after calculating the second average probability-acquiring ball number at the time of probability change. The advantageous state change frequency counter 273x is initialized and set to zero (zero clear) every time the RAM 273 is initialized, such as when the power is turned on.

  The advantageous state flag 273y is a flag indicating whether or not it is during the advantageous state period. Specifically, when the advantageous state flag 273y is set to on (ie, “1”), it indicates that the advantageous state is being established, and when it is set to off (ie, “0”). Indicates not in an advantageous state. The advantageous state flag 273y is set to ON when the effect control device 117 receives a jackpot start command from the main control device 110. Thereafter, when the effect control device 117 receives an advantageous state end command from the main control device 110, the advantageous state flag 273y is set to OFF. Note that the advantageous state variation number counter 273x is initialized to be off every time the RAM 273 is initialized, such as when the power is turned on.

  FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing command reception interrupt processing in the present modification. As shown in FIG. 34, the command reception interrupt process of the present modification is a process of turning on the advantageous state flag 273y when the effect control device 117 receives a jackpot start command from the main control device 110 (S1323). ) And the process of setting the advantageous state flag 273y to off (S1324) when the production control device 117 receives the advantageous state end command from the main control device 110, the first embodiment described above. This is the same as the command reception interrupt process (see FIG. 26).

  FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the change start processing (S1320) in the present modification. As shown in FIG. 35, in the variation start time process of this modification, after the processes of S1461 to S1464 are executed, as in the variation start time process of the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 30), the process is in an advantageous state. It is determined whether or not the flag 273y is on (S1465). At this time, if the advantageous state flag 273y is on (S1465: Yes), 1 is added to the advantageous state variation number counter 273x (S1466), and the variation start time process is terminated. On the other hand, if the advantageous state flag 273y is OFF as a result of the determination by the process of S1465, the process of S1466 is skipped and the process at the time of starting the fluctuation is terminated.

  According to this modification, when the production control device 117 receives a variation pattern command from the main control device 110 during a series of advantageous states, the advantageous state variation number counter 273x is updated each time. Thus, the number of variable displays performed during a series of advantageous states is counted. The value of the counter value 273x during the advantageous state is the value of the average number of balls acquired during the second advantageous state when the series of advantageous state ends (ie, during the series of advantageous state periods). This is used when calculating the average number of acquired balls per fluctuation display in each high probability mode or each time reduction mode.

  Specifically, although not shown, in the above-described acquired ball number display process (see FIG. 25) of the first embodiment, instead of the process (S1271) of calculating the average acquired ball number during the probability variation time shortening, the advantageous state probability variation time shortening. Based on the value of the medium acquired ball number memory 273i and the value of the advantageous state variation number counter 273x, the second probability variation time average medium acquired ball number is calculated. In addition, the second average probability-acquiring ball number at the time of probability change can be calculated by dividing the value in the advantage state probability-change time-average scored ball number memory 273i by the value of the advantage state variation number counter 273x.

  Then, in S1272 (see FIG. 25), the second probability variation average average acquired number of balls calculated as described above is displayed in the acquired number display area 81a together with the total acquired number of balls and the average number of acquired balls in the jackpot. . That is, instead of the average number of acquired short and medium average balls in the first embodiment, the second average number of acquired short and medium average balls is displayed in the acquired number of balls display area 81a.

  In the acquired number-of-balls display process (see FIG. 25) of the first embodiment, the short time counter 273f for probability change is zero-cleared in S1274. However, in this modification, the change counter 273x in the advantageous state is reset in S1274. Perform zero clear.

  In addition, in this modified example, since the probability change time count counter 273f is not used, S1422 and S1442 in the probability change end process (see FIG. 28) and the time limit end time process (see FIG. 29) of the first embodiment described above, respectively. The process of is omitted.

  Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first embodiment described above, every time a series of advantageous state periods ends, the average number of acquired balls per jackpot that is an average value of the number of acquired balls in each jackpot that occurred during the series of advantageous state periods; It is configured to display in the acquired ball number display area 81a the average number of acquired balls, which is an average value of the number of acquired balls in each high probability mode and each time shortening mode generated during the series of advantageous states. .

  In the second embodiment, the number of acquired balls is limited to a big hit in a series of one or a plurality of advantageous states generated after the RAM 273 is initialized by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. An average value per jackpot (hereinafter, this number is referred to as “average number of balls obtained per jackpot”) and one or more times that have occurred since the RAM 273 was initialized by powering on the pachinko machine 10 The average value of the number of acquired balls only during the high probability mode or the time shortening mode during the advantageous state period of each mode (hereinafter, this number is referred to as “the average number of acquired balls during the short period of time for all probability changes”). Can be displayed in the acquired ball number display area 81a under a predetermined condition.

  Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, a customer waiting effect (a display such as a title display or a demo display displayed on the third symbol gaming device 81 when a predetermined time has elapsed when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player) On the condition that the player is operating the frame button 22 during the period in which the effect) is displayed on the 3rd symbol display device, It is configured to be displayed. Note that, in the second embodiment, the same portions as those in the first embodiment described above are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 36 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of the RAM 273 of the effect control device 117 in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment. In the present embodiment, in addition to the configurations 273a to 273w of the RAM 273 of the first embodiment described above, a first acquired ball number cumulative memory 273aa, a second acquired ball number cumulative memory 273ab, a jackpot number cumulative memory 273ac, It has a certain change time short-time accumulation memory 273ad and a third display flag 273ae.

  The first acquired ball number accumulation memory 273aa is terminated by a termination condition defined by the number of fluctuations in the high probability mode or the time shortening mode from the start of the special gaming state that occurred in the normal mode during the series of advantageous states. This is a memory for accumulating and storing the number of acquired spheres limited to the big hit during the period until. The first acquired ball number accumulation memory 273aa is initialized and set to zero (zero clear) every time the RAM 273 is initialized. Then, every time the production control device 117 receives the advantageous state end command from the main control device 110, the first acquired number-of-balls accumulated memory 273aa The value of the number-of-obtained balls memory 273h is added (accumulated).

  The second acquired ball number accumulation memory 273ab is a memory for accumulating and storing the acquired ball number only in the high probability mode or the time reduction mode in a series of advantageous state periods. The second acquired ball number accumulation memory 273ab is initialized and set to zero (zero clear) every time the RAM 273 is initialized. Then, every time the production control device 117 receives an advantageous state end command from the main control device 110, the second acquired accumulated ball number memory 273ab stores the advantageous state probability change time short and medium acquired ball number memory 273i before clearing it to zero. At this time, the value in the short- and middle-acquired ball number memory 273i is added (accumulated).

  The big hit number accumulating memory 273ac is a memory for accumulating and storing the number of times that a big hit has occurred during a series of advantageous state periods after the RAM 273 is initialized by power-on or the like. The jackpot count accumulation memory 273ac is initialized and set to zero (cleared to zero) every time the RAM 273 is initialized. Each time the effect control device 117 receives the advantageous state end command from the main control device 110, the value of the big hit number counter 273b is added to the big hit number accumulated memory 273ac before the big hit number counter 273b is cleared to zero. Stored (cumulatively).

  The probability change time short-time accumulation memory 273ad accumulates the number of times that the game mode is set to the high probability mode or the time reduction mode during a series of advantageous states after the RAM 273 is initialized by power-on or the like. It is a memory for storing. The probability change short time cumulative memory 273ad is initialized and set to zero (zero clear) every time the RAM 273 is initialized. Then, every time the effect control device 117 receives the advantageous state end command from the main control device 110, the value of the probability variation time count counter 273f is stored in the probability variation time count accumulation memory 273ad before the probability variation time count counter 273f is cleared to zero. Add (accumulate) and store.

  The third display flag 273ae is a flag for indicating that the average number of acquired balls per hit and the average number of acquired short and medium averages are displayed in the acquired number display area 81a. When the third display flag 273ae is set to ON (that is, “1”), the average number of acquired balls per total size and the average number of acquired balls for all probability change time are displayed in the acquired number-of-plays display area 81a. In the case where it is set to off (that is, “0”), the average number of acquired balls for the total hit and the average number of acquired balls for all probability variation time are not displayed in the acquired number-of-balls display area 81a. It shows that. In the present embodiment, the player who operates the frame button 22 during the period in which the customer waiting effect is displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 is used for the average number of acquired balls for the total hit and the average number of acquired balls for all probability changes. It is displayed in the acquired number-of-balls display area 81a on the condition that it is (pressed). Therefore, the third display flag 273ae is set to ON when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) while the customer waiting effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. After that, the player holds his / her hand from the frame button 22 while displaying the average number of hit balls during the big hit and the average number of shots during the short period of time for all probability changes (that is, when the third display flag 273ae is set to ON). The third display flag 273ae is set off when the waiting operation is hidden by releasing the operation or operating the handle 51 by the player.

  FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing an audio lamp effect process (S1102) of the second embodiment. The voice lamp effect process of the second embodiment is a process that replaces the voice lamp effect process (see FIG. 23) of the first embodiment. After the customer wait effect process (S1222), the number of acquired balls during the customer wait effect is displayed. It differs from the sound lamp effect process of the first embodiment in that the process (S2221) is executed.

  Specifically, in the sound lamp effect process (S1102) of the second embodiment, the output of each lamp (for example, the illumination units 29 to 33, the display lamp 34, etc.) is set as in the first embodiment described above. Then (S1221), a customer waiting effect process is executed (S1222). Note that, as described above, the customer waiting effect process (S1222) includes a setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the customer waiting effect when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player for a predetermined time. This is the process to be performed. In the present embodiment, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is performed when the state where the number N of special figure holding balls is 0 continues for a predetermined time (for example, 1 minute) after the end of the variable display or jackpot effect. Settings are made to switch to a customer waiting effect. On the other hand, when the customer waiting effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, when the operation handle 51 is operated, the customer waiting effect is set to be hidden.

  After execution of the customer waiting effect process (S1222), the acquired number of balls display process during the customer waiting effect is executed (S2221). The number-of-acquisition display processing during waiting for a customer (S2221) is the average number of acquired balls per hit when the frame button 22 is operated during the period in which the customer-waiting performance is displayed on the third symbol display device. This is a process of displaying the average number of acquired balls in all probability variation time in the acquired ball number display area 81a. The detailed processing of the acquired ball number display processing (S2221) during the customer waiting effect will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the execution of the waiting ball effect acquired ball number display process (S2221), as in the first embodiment described above, the hold number display update process (S1223), the frame button input monitoring / effect process (S1224), and the lamp edit process (S1225), a sound editing / output process (S1226), and a liquid crystal effect execution management process (S1227) are executed, the sound lamp effect process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process.

  FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the number-of-acquisition display processing (S2221) during the waiting-for-effects effect executed in the sound lamp effect process (see FIG. 37) of the second embodiment described above.

  In the waiting ball effect acquired ball number display process (S2221), first, it is determined whether or not the customer waiting effect is during the period displayed on the third symbol display device (during customer waiting effect) (S2601). At this time, if the customer waiting effect is being performed (S2601: Yes), it is determined whether or not the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) based on whether or not a high signal is input from the frame button 22 ( S2602).

  As a result of the determination in the process of S2602, when a high signal is input from the frame button 22, that is, when the frame button 22 is operated (S2602: Yes), the third display flag 273ae is on. It is determined whether or not (S2603).

  If the third display flag 273ae is off (S2603: No) as a result of the determination by the processing of S2603, it indicates that the frame button 22 has been operated (pressed) from the non-operating state. Then, the third display flag 273ae is set to ON (S2604).

  After the processing of S2604, the average number of acquired balls for the entire team is calculated (S2605). Specifically, in S2605, the value of the first acquired number-of-balls cumulative memory 273aa is divided by the value of the number-of-hits number accumulated memory 273ac, whereby the average number of acquired balls per total jackpot (after the RAM 273 is initialized by turning on the power or the like). The average value of the number of balls obtained for each big hit is calculated.

  After the processing of S2605, the average number of acquired balls for all probability variation time is calculated (S2606). Specifically, in S2606, the RAM 273 is initialized by turning on the power, etc., by dividing the value of the second acquired number-of-balls cumulative memory 273ab by the value of the probability-changed short-time cumulative memory 273ad. (Average value of the number of acquired balls in each high probability mode and each time reduction mode).

  After the processing of S2606, the average number of acquired balls per hit calculated in S2605 and the average number of acquired balls in all probability change time calculated in S2606 are displayed in the acquired number-of-balls display area 81a (S2607). After the processing of S2607, the number-of-acquisition display processing during the customer waiting effect is terminated, and the process returns to the sound lamp effect process (see FIG. 37). It should be noted that, in S2607, the average winning ball number in the total hit and the average winning ball number in all probability variation displayed in the acquired ball number display area 81a indicate that the customer waiting effect is not displayed or the frame button 22 is not operated. Until it becomes, it continues to be displayed in the acquired ball number display area 81a.

  On the other hand, if the third display flag 273ae is turned on as a result of the determination by the processing of S2603 (S2603: Yes), during the display period of the average acquired number of balls per total size and the average number of acquired balls during all probability variation time Therefore, the number-of-acquisition display processing during the waiting-waiting effect is finished as it is, and the process returns to the sound lamp effect processing (see FIG. 37).

  If the result of determination in S2601 is that the customer waiting effect is not in effect (S2601: No), the process proceeds to S2608. As a result of the determination in the process of S2602, when a low signal is input from the frame button 22, that is, when the frame button 22 is not operated (S2602: No), the process proceeds to S2608.

  In S2608, it is determined whether the third display flag 273ae is on (S2608). At this time, when the third display flag 273ae is on (S2608: No), the state in which the frame button 22 is operated is changed to the non-operating state (a state in which the player releases the hand from the frame button 22). In this case, the third display flag 273ae is set to off (S2609).

  After the processing of S2609, the acquired number-of-balls display erasure process is executed to delete the average number of acquired balls per total size and the average number of acquired balls for all time changes in the acquired number-of-balls display area 81a (S2610). The acquired number-of-balls display process during the waiting effect is ended, and the process returns to the sound lamp effect process (see FIG. 37).

  On the other hand, if the third display flag 273ae is off as a result of the determination in the process of S2608 (S2608: No), the average number of acquired balls per total size and the average number of acquired balls during all probability change time are displayed. Accordingly, the number-of-acquisition display processing during the waiting-waiting effect is terminated, and the process returns to the voice lamp effect process (see FIG. 37).

  That is, according to the above-mentioned number-of-acquisition ball display processing during the customer waiting effect (S2221), during the period when the customer waiting effect is displayed on the third symbol display device (during the customer waiting effect), the player clicks the frame button 22. When the button is operated (pressed), while the frame button 22 is being operated, the average number of acquired balls for the total hit and the average number of acquired balls for all probability variation time are displayed in the acquired number-of-balls display area 81a. The average number of hit balls in the all-spot and the average number of shots in the short-term average time displayed in the acquired ball number display area 81a indicate that the player has released his hand from the frame button 22 or has operated the operation handle 51. If the customer waiting effect is hidden, it is deleted.

  FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the acquired ball number display process (S1106) of the second embodiment. The acquired number-of-balls display process of the second embodiment is a process that replaces the acquired number-of-balls display process (see FIG. 25) of the first embodiment. When the probability change short end display flag 273u is on, It differs from the acquired ball number display processing of the first embodiment in that the values of the acquired ball number cumulative memory 273aa, the second acquired ball number cumulative memory 273ab, the big hit number of times cumulative memory 273ac, and the probability variation short time number cumulative memory 273ad are updated. .

  Specifically, in the acquired number-of-balls display process (S1106) of the second embodiment, the processes of S1261 to S1264 and the processes of S1265 to S1268 are executed as in the first embodiment described above.

  After the process of S1268 or as a result of the determination by the process of S1265, when the fluctuation start display flag 273t is off (S1265: No), as in the first embodiment described above, the probability change short end display flag is displayed. It is determined whether or not 273u is on (S1269). At this time, if the probability change short end display flag 273u is off (S1269: No), the process proceeds to S1277. On the other hand, if the probability change short end display flag 273u is on (S1269: Yes), the process proceeds to S2261 after the processes of S1270 to S1272 are executed as in the first embodiment described above.

  In S 2261, the value in the advantageous state big hit medium acquired ball number memory 273 h is added to the value in the first acquired ball number cumulative memory 273 aa (S 2261). As a result of the processing of S2261, the first acquired ball number accumulating memory 273aa stores the number of acquired balls only during the big hit in a series of advantageous states that occur after the RAM 273 is initialized by powering on the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Are accumulated and stored.

  After the processing of S2261, the value of the advantage state probability changing time short and medium acquired ball number memory 273i is added to the value of the second acquired ball number cumulative memory 273ab (S2262). By the processing of S2262, the second acquired ball number accumulating memory 273ab is stored in the high probability mode or the time reduction mode in the period of a series of advantageous states generated after the RAM 273 is initialized by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. The number of acquired balls limited to the inside is accumulated and stored.

  After the processing of S2263, the value of the jackpot count counter 273b is added to the value of the jackpot count accumulation memory 273ac (S2263), and the value of the probability change time count counter 273f is added to the value of the probability change time count count memory 273ad (S2264). .

  After the processing of S2264, the processing of S1273 to S1276 is executed as in the first embodiment described above, and the processing proceeds to S1277. Then, similarly to the first embodiment described above, the processes of S1277 to S1283 are executed, the acquired number-of-balls display process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 22).

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the player operates (presses) the frame button 22 during the period in which the customer waiting effect is displayed on the third symbol display device. It is possible to display the average number of acquired balls per total size and the average number of acquired balls in all probability variation time in the acquired number of balls display area 81a. The number of acquired balls, such as the average number of balls acquired during the entire game and the average number of balls acquired during the short period of time, can be an index for the player to select a more advantageous platform for himself. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the player presses the frame button 22 of the vacant table (the table on which nobody is playing and the customer waiting effect is displayed). On the basis of the average number of hit balls during the total hit and the average number of shots obtained during the short and long period of time displayed by pressing the frame button 22, it is possible to select a stand that the player can be satisfied with. In other words, the player can use a pachinko machine that he / she has agreed with. Therefore, since it is possible to cause the player to play a satisfactory game, it is possible to increase the interest of the game that the player himself pays for the game, thereby giving the player a sense of satisfaction.

  Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 40 to 45. In the first embodiment described above, the period from the start of the special gaming state that occurred in the normal mode to the end of the high probability mode or the time reduction mode according to the end condition defined by the number of executions of the variable display is “a series of advantages. The number of acquired balls (for example, the total number of acquired balls 81a1) during the series of advantageous states is displayed in the acquired ball number display area 81a.

  On the other hand, in the third embodiment, after the high probability mode or the time reduction mode is terminated by the termination condition defined by the number of executions of the variable display, when a special gaming state (big hit) occurs within a predetermined period. , The number of acquired balls in the advantageous state starting from the special gaming state is a series including the high probability mode or the time shortening mode ended by the end condition defined by the execution period of the immediately preceding advantageous state (that is, the number of executions of the variable display). The period is added to the period of the advantageous state). Note that, in the third embodiment, the same portions as those in the first embodiment described above are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 40 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of the RAM 273 of the effect control device 117 in the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment. In the present embodiment, an additional period counter 273af is provided in addition to the configurations 273a to 273w included in the RAM 273 of the first embodiment described above.

  The additional period counter 273af is a period for monitoring the occurrence of a special gaming state which is a starting condition for a series of advantageous state periods after the high probability mode or the time shortening mode is ended by the end condition defined by the number of executions of the variable display. It is a counter for measuring (hereinafter, this period is referred to as “additional period”). In the present embodiment, the additional period is a period until a predetermined number of balls (game balls) that can be stored in the upper plate 17 are fired, and 150 is used as the predetermined number. The additional period counter 273af is initialized and set to zero (zero clear) every time the RAM 273 is initialized. Then, when the production control device 117 receives the advantageous state end command from the main control device 110, the initial value (150 in the present embodiment) is set in the additional period counter 273af, and the production control device 117 performs main control on the firing control signal. Each time it is received from the device 110, it is decremented by one.

  In this third embodiment, the big hit number counter 273b, the probability change time short number counter 273f, the advantageous state acquired number-of-balls memory 273g, the advantageous state big hit number of acquired balls number memory 273h, and the advantageous state probability changed number of short and medium number acquired balls number 273i Are configured to be cleared to zero when the additional period counter 273af reaches zero while the additional period is counted by the additional period counter 273af.

  FIG. 41 is a flowchart illustrating the acquired ball number display process (S1106) of the third embodiment. The acquired number-of-balls display process of the third embodiment is a process that replaces the acquired number-of-balls display process (see FIG. 25) of the first embodiment, and is a big hit number counter 273b, a probability change time-count counter 273f, and an acquired ball in the advantageous state. This is different from the acquired ball number display process of the first embodiment in that the process of clearing the number memory 273g, the advantageous state big hit medium acquired ball number memory 273h, and the advantageous state probability change time medium and short number acquired ball number memory 273i is omitted.

  Specifically, in the acquired number-of-balls display process (S1106) of the third embodiment, the processes of S1261 to S1264 and the processes of S1265 to S1268 are executed as in the first embodiment described above. After the process of S1268 or as a result of the determination by the process of S1265, when the fluctuation start display flag 273t is off (S1265: No), as in the first embodiment described above, the probability change short end display flag is displayed. It is determined whether or not 273u is on (S1269). At this time, if the probability change short end display flag 273u is off (S1269: No), the process proceeds to S1277, and after the processes of S1277 to S1280 are executed, the acquired ball is acquired as in the first embodiment described above. The number display process ends, and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, if the probability change short end display flag 273u is on (S1269: Yes), the processes of S1270 to S1272, S1275, and S1276 are executed as in the first embodiment described above, and the process proceeds to S1277.

  FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the probability variation end process (S1316) of the third embodiment. The probability change end process of the third embodiment is a process that replaces the probability change end process (see FIG. 28) of the first embodiment. When the advantageous state end command reception flag 273r is on, the additional period counter 273af This is different from the probability variation end process of the first embodiment in that the process of setting an initial value is performed.

  Specifically, in the probability variation end process (S1316) of the third embodiment, the processes of S1421 to S1423 are executed as in the first embodiment described above. If the advantageous state end command reception flag 273r is OFF as a result of the determination in the processing of S1423 (S1423: No), the processing at the end of probability change ends.

  On the other hand, if the advantageous state end command reception flag 273r is on (S1423: Yes), the processing of S1424 and S1425 is executed as in the first embodiment described above. Then, after the process of S1425, an initial value is set in the additional period counter 273af (S3421), and the process at the end of probability change ends.

  In the present embodiment, the additional period counted by the additional period counter 273af is 150 balls launched after the high probability mode or the time shortening mode ends according to the end condition defined by the number of executions of the variable display. In S3421, 150 is set as an initial value in the additional period counter 273af.

  FIG. 43 is a flow chart showing the time-saving end process (S1319) of the third embodiment. The short-time end process of the third embodiment is a process that replaces the short-time end process of the first embodiment (see FIG. 29). Similar to the probability change end process (see FIG. 42) of the third embodiment described above, the time-short end process of the third embodiment is also performed when the advantageous state end command reception flag 273r is on. This is different from the time-short end processing in the first embodiment in that processing for setting an initial value is performed.

  Specifically, in the time-saving end process (S1319) of the third embodiment, the processes of S1441 to S1443 are executed as in the first embodiment described above, and as a result of determination by the process of S1443, an advantageous state end command is received. If the flag 273r is off (S1443: No), the time-short-end process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the advantageous state end command reception flag 273r is turned on as a result of the determination by the processing of S1443 (S1443: Yes), the processing of S1444 and S1445 is performed and then added as in the first embodiment described above. 150 is set as an initial value in the period counter 273af (S3441), and the time-short-end processing is terminated.

  Thus, according to the above-described processing at the end of probability change (see FIG. 42) and processing at the end of short time (see FIG. 43) in the third embodiment, when the production control device 117 receives the advantageous state end command from the main control device 110. In other words, when the high probability mode or the time shortening mode is ended by the end condition defined by the number of executions of the variable display, an initial value is set in the additional period counter 273af, thereby setting the additional period. . The additional period refers to whether or not the start condition of a series of advantageous state periods is satisfied after the high probability mode or the time reduction mode is ended by the end condition defined by the number of executions of the variable display (that is, a special period) This is a period for monitoring whether or not a gaming state has occurred. In this additional period, the end of a series of advantageous states accompanying the establishment of the end condition is suspended.

  FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the payout ball count processing (S1321) of the third embodiment. The payout ball count process of the third embodiment is a process that replaces the payout ball count process (see FIG. 31) of the first embodiment. During the additional period, the value of the acquired ball number memory 273g during the advantageous state is used. It differs from the payout ball count processing of the first embodiment in that it is configured to be updated according to the number of winning balls.

  Specifically, in the payout ball count processing (S1321) of the third embodiment, it is determined whether or not the big hit / medium flag 273a is on (S1481), and if the big hit / medium flag 273a is on (S1481: Yes), Similar to the first embodiment described above, the processing of S1482 to S1486 is executed, and the payout ball count processing is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the big hit flag 273a is off (S1481: No), it is determined whether the probability changing flag 273c is on (S1487), and if the probability changing flag 273c is on (S1487: Yes). Similarly to the above-described first embodiment, the processes of S1488 and S1489 are executed, and the process proceeds to S1484. If the probability change flag 273c is OFF as a result of the determination by the processing of S1487 (S1487: No), it is determined whether or not the hour / middle flag 273d is ON (S1490), and the hour / middle flag 273d is ON. If there is (S1490: Yes), the process proceeds to S1488.

  As a result of the determination by the processing of S1490, if the hour / short flag 273d is off (S1490: No), it is determined whether or not the value of the additional period counter 273af is greater than zero (S3481). If the value of the additional period counter 273af is zero or less (S3481: No) as a result of the determination by the process of S3481, the additional period is not counted. finish.

  On the other hand, if the value of the additional period counter 273af is greater than zero (S3481: Yes) as a result of the determination by the process of S3481, the additional period is in progress. By adding the payout ball number indicated by the prize ball command to the value of the acquired ball number memory 273g during the state, the content of the acquired ball number memory 273g during the advantageous state is updated (S1484).

  FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing a firing control signal interrupt process of the third embodiment. The launch control signal interrupt process of the third embodiment is a process that replaces the launch control signal interrupt process (see FIG. 32) of the first embodiment. During the additional period, the update of the additional period counter 273af is advantageous. This is different from the launch control signal interrupt process of the first embodiment in that it is configured to update the acquired number-of-balls memory 273g during the state.

  Specifically, in the launch control signal interrupt process of the third embodiment, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag 273a is on (S1501), and if the jackpot flag 273a is on (S1501: Yes), the above-described process is performed. Similar to the first embodiment, the processes of S1502 to S1506 are executed, and the firing control signal interrupt process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the big hit flag 273a is off (S1501: No), it is determined whether the probability change flag 273c is on (S1507), and if the probability change flag 273c is on (S1507: Yes). As in the first embodiment described above, the processing of S1508 and S1509 is executed, and the processing proceeds to S1504. As a result of the determination in S1507, if the probability change flag 273c is off (S1507: No), it is determined whether or not the hour / short flag 273d is on (S1510), and the hour / short flag 273d is on. If there is (S1510: Yes), the process proceeds to S1508.

  As a result of the determination by the processing of S1510, if the hour / short flag 273d is off (S1510: No), it is determined whether or not the value of the additional period counter 273af is greater than zero (S3501). If the value of the additional period counter 273af is 0 or less (S3501: No) as a result of the determination in the process of S3501, it is not during the additional period. In this case, the firing control signal interrupt process is performed. Exit.

  On the other hand, if the value of the additional period counter 273af is larger than zero (S3501: Yes) as a result of the determination by the process of S3501, the additional period is in progress. One is subtracted from the period counter 273af (S3502). Next, by subtracting 1 from the value of the acquired ball number memory 273g during the advantageous state, the contents of the acquired ball number memory 273g during the advantageous state are updated (S3503).

  After the processing of S3503, it is determined whether or not the value of the additional period counter 273af is zero (S3504). If the value of the additional period counter 273af is not zero as a result of the determination in the process of S3504 (S3504: No), the timing for ending the additional period has not yet been reached, and the firing control signal interrupt process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the value of the additional period counter 273af is zero as a result of the determination in the process of S3504 (S3504: Yes), the high probability mode or the time shortening mode is set according to the end condition defined by the number of executions of the variable display. This is the end timing of the additional period due to the launch of 150 balls since the end. Therefore, in such a case, in order to clear each acquired number of balls (total acquired number of balls 81a1, etc.) counted during a series of advantageous state periods, the number of acquired balls during the advantageous state is 273g, the number of acquired balls per advantageous state The memory 273h, the advantageous state probability changing short / medium acquired ball number memory 273i, the big hit number counter 273b, and the probability changing time short number counter 273f are cleared to zero (S3505 to S3509), and the firing control signal interrupt process is terminated.

  Therefore, according to the payout ball count process (see FIG. 44) and the launch control signal interrupt process (see FIG. 45) of the third embodiment described above, the high probability mode or the time reduction mode is defined by the number of executions of the variable display. Even if the process is terminated due to the termination condition, since the processing of S1484 and S3503 is executed during the additional period set thereafter, the number of prize balls paid out from the pachinko machine 10 (ie, the payout) Number) and the number of balls fired from the ball launch unit 112a (that is, the number of fired balls, which is the number of balls used in the game), is continuously updated.

  Even if the end condition defined by the number of executions of the variable display in the high probability mode or the time reduction mode is satisfied, an additional period (in this embodiment, a period until 150 balls are launched) In the middle, the advantageous state acquired number of balls memory 273g, the advantageous state large hitting medium number of acquired balls memory 273h, the advantageous state probability changing short and medium acquired number of balls memory 273i, the big hit number counter 273b, and the probability changing time short number counter 273f are not cleared to zero. Therefore, if a special gaming state (bonus) occurs during this additional period, the number of acquired balls in the advantageous state starting from the special gaming state is calculated as the number of executions of the immediately preceding advantageous state (that is, the number of executions of variable display). Can be added to the number of acquired balls counted in the additional period and a period of a series of advantageous states including a high probability mode or a time shortening mode terminated by the termination condition defined by (1).

  In other words, in the present embodiment, even when the end condition of the high probability mode or the time reduction mode defined by the number of variable displays is satisfied, the end of a series of advantageous states is suspended during the additional period. . And a period of a series of advantageous states can be extended on condition that a special gaming state has occurred during the additional period.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, when a special gaming state occurs during the additional period, a series of advantageous states can be extended. In other words, the completion condition of the high probability mode or the time reduction mode in which the number of acquired balls such as the total number of acquired balls 81a1 in a series of advantageous states starting from the special gaming state generated during the additional period is defined by the number of times of variable display is established. Is added to the number of acquired balls in a series of advantageous states completed based on. Therefore, the total number of acquired balls 81a1 is increased by the extended period of a series of advantageous states. Therefore, a player who has viewed the total acquired number of balls 81a1 displayed in the acquired number of balls display area 81a has gained a lot. It can be impressed that the number of balls has been obtained, and the player's satisfaction and superiority can be enhanced. Thereby, the interest of a game can be improved.

  In addition, a relatively short period (in this embodiment, a period until 150 balls are fired) after the end condition of the high probability mode or the time shortening mode defined by the number of variable displays is set. Since the end of the advantageous state period is a period to be suspended (that is, an additional period), the series of advantageous state periods can be extended without a sense of incongruity. Therefore, the player naturally accepts that the total number of balls 81a1 displayed in the acquired ball number display area 81a is the number of balls that the player has actually acquired during a series of advantageous periods. It is possible to obtain sufficient satisfaction and superiority.

  In particular, in this embodiment, a period in which 150 balls are launched is set as an additional period. The “150 balls” is generally the number of balls that can be stored in the upper plate 17. When the numerical value set as the additional period exceeds the number of balls that can be stored in the upper plate 17, the player needs to add the ball to the upper plate 17, and the operation for adding the ball Need to do. Therefore, the player may feel “long” with respect to the period during which the end of the series of advantageous period is suspended (ie, the additional period), and a special gaming state occurs during the additional period, Even if the period of the advantageous state is extended, there is a possibility of feeling uncomfortable with the extension.

  However, according to the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, the period during which the balls within the range that can be stored in the upper plate 17 are fired (digested) is set as the additional period (period during which the end of a series of advantageous periods is suspended). Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the player from feeling that the additional period is “long”, and it is possible to extend the period of a series of advantageous states without a sense of incongruity. In addition, since “150 balls” is generally the number of balls that the player is unlikely to add to the upper plate 17, there is no sense of incongruity in the period of the advantageous state. It can be extended.

  In the present embodiment, the number of acquired balls (total acquired balls) displayed in the acquired ball number display area 81a when the end condition of the high probability mode or the time reduction mode defined by the number of variable displays is satisfied. Number, average number of balls acquired during jackpot, and average number of balls acquired during short and long time) are erased once the erasing timing arrives during the additional period. Since the game mode returns to the normal mode when the above end condition is satisfied (that is, the period of the advantageous state is apparently ended), the content displayed in the acquired ball number display area 81a is temporarily displayed during the additional period. By erasing, it is possible to suppress giving the player a sense of incongruity as if the player is in an advantageous state despite being in the normal mode. Can be extended without any form.

  As described above, the present invention has been described based on the embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be easily guessed.

  For example, in each of the above embodiments, the sound output and the lighting control of various lamps and the control of the third symbol display device 81 are controlled by one control device (that is, the effect control device 117). Alternatively, the lighting control of various lamps and the control of the third symbol display device 81 may be performed by separate control devices.

  For example, a control device (sound lamp control device) for controlling sound output and lighting of various lamps is connected to the main control device 110, and the control device (display control device) controlled by the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by sound lamp control. It is also possible to connect to a device so that each command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device, and a display instruction is given from the sound lamp control device to the display control device.

  When such a configuration is adopted, a prize ball command or a firing control signal (launch pulse) output from the main control device 110 to the effect control device 117 in each of the above embodiments is, for example, an audio lamp from the main control device 110. Once output to the control device, the command or control signal (or the command or control signal set based on the command or control signal) is output from the sound lamp control device to the display control device. 27, the jackpot process in FIG. 27, the probability change end process in FIG. 28, the short time end process in FIG. 29, the fluctuation start process in FIG. 39, the payout ball count process in FIG. 32, by executing the firing control signal interrupt process of FIG. 32, various catches such as the total number of acquired balls 81a1 are displayed in the acquired ball number display area 81a as in the above embodiments. It may be configured to display the number of balls. Alternatively, the voice lamp control device counts the number of acquired balls performed in each of the flowcharts of FIGS. 26 to 32, and outputs a command indicating the obtained number of acquired balls to the display control device. Based on the command (command indicating the number of acquired balls), similarly to each of the above embodiments, various acquired numbers of balls such as the total acquired number of balls 81a1 may be displayed in the acquired number of balls display area 81a.

  Further, a control device (sound lamp control device) for controlling sound output and lighting of various lamps is connected to the main control device 110, and the control device (display control device) controlled by the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by sound lamp control. In the configuration of connecting to the device, the display control means may be further connected to the main control device 110 to directly send commands and control signals from the main control device 110 to the display control device.

  Alternatively, a control device (display control device) that is controlled by the third symbol display device 81 is connected to the main control device 110, and a control device (sound lamp control device) that controls sound output and lighting of various lamps is displayed control device. In this case, each command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the display control device, and the display control device may be configured to instruct the sound lamp control device to control sound output or lighting of various lamps. .

  Further, in each of the above embodiments, the main control device 110 is configured to output the firing control signal (firing pulse) to the firing control device 112 and the effect control device 117, but the main control device 110 outputs the firing control signal. It is good also as a structure which outputs only to the firing control apparatus 112, and outputs the command which shows having received the control signal or the firing control signal to the presentation control apparatus 117, whenever the firing control apparatus 112 receives a firing control signal.

  Further, in each of the above embodiments, the main control device 110 is configured to output the firing control signal to the effect control device 117 every 0.6 seconds based on the firing permission signal input from the payout control device 111. The control device 110 outputs a start command to the effect control device 117 when the launch permission signal is received from the payout control device 111, and outputs an end command to the effect control device 117 when the fire permission signal stops thereafter. In the period from the reception of the start command to the reception of the end command, it is determined that a predetermined interval (for example, every 0.6 seconds) is the launch timing of the ball, and at that timing, the big hit medium launch ball The number of fired balls such as the number may be counted.

  Further, in each of the above embodiments, the payout control device 111 is configured to output the firing permission signal to the main control device 110, but the payout control device 111 outputs the firing permission signal to the firing control device 112, and fire control is performed. The apparatus 112 may be configured to execute a process similar to the launch control process of FIG. 17 to control the launch timing of the sphere. Alternatively, the output from the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b is input to the firing control device 112, and the firing control device 112 has a predetermined interval only when the touch sensor 51a is on and the stop switch 51b is off. You may comprise so that control which launches a ball | bowl at an interval (for example, 0.6 second interval) may be performed.

  When these configurations (that is, the configuration in which the launch control device 112 controls the launch timing of the sphere) are adopted, the launch control device 112 receives input from the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b at the launch timing of the sphere. Based on the launch timing of the sphere, a control signal or a command indicating that it is the launch timing of the sphere may be output to the effect control device 117.

  Further, when the launch control device 112 is configured to input a launch permission signal from the payout control device 111, the launch control device 112 receives a launch permission signal from the payout control device 111, After that, when the firing permission signal is interrupted, an end command is output to the effect control device 117, and the effect control device 117 receives a start command and receives a finish command at a predetermined interval ( For example, it is possible to determine that every 0.6 seconds) is the launch timing of the ball, and count the number of shot balls at that timing.

  When the output from the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b is input to the launch control device 112, the launch control device 112 has a condition that the touch sensor 51a is on and the stop switch 51b is off. Is established, the start command is output to the effect control device 117, and then the touch sensor 51a is turned off and the stop switch 51b is turned off or the stop switch 51b is turned on. In this case, the end command may be output to the effect control device 117. In such a configuration, the production control device 117 determines that a predetermined interval (for example, every 0.6 seconds) is the launch timing of the sphere in the period from when the start command is received until the end command is received, What is necessary is just to comprise so that the number of shot balls may be counted at the timing.

  In each of the above embodiments, the main control device 110 is configured to output the firing control signal (firing pulse) to the effect control device 117, but the command corresponding to the firing control signal (that is, the firing timing). Command) may be output to the effect control device 117.

  Further, in each of the embodiments described above, the payout control device 111 is configured to output the firing permission signal to the main control device 110, but the payout control device 111 outputs the firing permission signal to the effect control device 117, and effects control is performed. The apparatus 117 may be configured to execute the same process as the launch control process of FIG. 17 to control the launch timing of the sphere.

  Alternatively, the payout control device 111 outputs a start command to the effect control device 117 when the touch sensor 51a is on and the stop switch 51b is off, and then the touch sensor 51a is off. And an end command may be output to the effect control device 117 when the stop switch 51b is turned off or the stop switch 51b is turned on. In such a configuration, the production control device 117 determines that a predetermined interval (for example, every 0.6 seconds) is the launch timing of the sphere in the period from when the start command is received until the end command is received, What is necessary is just to comprise so that the number of shot balls may be counted at the timing.

  Alternatively, the output from the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b is input to the effect control device 117. In the effect control device 117, after the condition that the touch sensor 51a is on and the stop switch 51b is off is satisfied, Thereafter, a predetermined interval (for example, every 0.6 seconds) is set in a period until the touch sensor 51a is turned off and the stop switch 51b is turned off or until the stop switch 51b is turned on. What is necessary is just to comprise so that it may be judged that it is the launch timing of a sphere and the number of shot spheres is counted at that timing.

  Further, in each of the above embodiments, the production control device 117 is configured to count the number of shot balls based on the launch control signal (launch pulse) output by the main control device 110 as a ball launch instruction. Instead of this firing control signal, the following control signal may be employed, and the production control device 117 may increment the number of fired balls by 1 each time the control signal is received.

  For example, a sensor that detects that a sphere has come into contact with the return ball prevention member 68 is provided, and the main controller 110 outputs a control signal in place of the launch control signal when the launch of the sphere is detected by this sensor. You may make it output to 117.

  Alternatively, a sensor capable of detecting a ball that has passed through the winning openings 63, 64, 65a and the out port 66 (that is, all the balls discharged from the game board 13) is provided, and the controller 110 uses this sensor to launch the ball. May be output to the effect control device 117 in place of the firing control signal. In such a case, the sensor may be provided at each of the prize winning openings 63, 64, 65a and the out opening 66, or may be provided at a merging point of the balls passing through the winning prize openings 63, 64, 65a and the out opening 66, respectively.

  Alternatively, a sensor is provided at a location where the fired sphere always passes (for example, between the rail 61 and the rail 62), and when the firing of the sphere (that is, the passage of the sphere) is detected by this sensor, the firing control signal A control signal in place of the above may be output to the effect control device 117.

  Further, in each of the above embodiments, the main control device 110 outputs a prize ball command to the payout control device 111 and the effect control device 117, but the main control device 110 sends the prize ball command to the payout control device 111. Each time the payout control device 111 receives a prize ball command, the effect control device 111 outputs the prize ball command or a corresponding command (ie, another command indicating the number of payout balls indicated by the prize ball command). It is good also as a structure output to 117.

  In each of the above embodiments, the number of acquired balls such as the total number of acquired balls 81a1 is displayed on the third symbol display device (acquired ball number display area 81a). (In other words, the number of balls paid out as prize balls) may be displayed. For example, you can display the total number of acquired balls (the number of balls acquired during a series of advantageous periods) and the number of balls that are paid out during a series of advantageous periods, The average value of the number of payout balls due to each jackpot generated during a series of advantageous states may be displayed together with the average value of the number of balls acquired for each jackpot.

  In each of the above embodiments, the number of acquired balls such as the total number of acquired balls 81a1 is displayed on the third symbol display device (acquired ball number display area 81a). The acquired number of balls may be displayed on the screen. Alternatively, a command indicating the number of each acquired ball is output to a hall computer that centrally manages the pachinko machines 10 in the hall, and via a hall computer, a data display installed above each pachinko machine 10 or a dedicated display It is good also as a structure displayed on this indicator. In addition, it is good also as a structure which calculates the number of various acquired balls with a hall computer. Or it is good also as a structure which outputs the data of the number of acquired balls so that data can be printed from the printer provided beside the pachinko machine 10, etc.

  Further, in each of the above embodiments, a numerical value (for example, the total number of acquired balls 81a1 or the number of acquired balls during this jackpot or the number of balls acquired by the player within a series of advantageous states (ie, the balance of the balls) , The average number of balls acquired during jackpots and the average number of balls acquired during short and long times) is displayed in the acquired number-of-balls display area 81a. However, the number of balls in a period not in an advantageous state (that is, in the normal mode) is displayed. It is good also as a structure which displays a balance. For example, in the normal mode, the balance of the sphere (that is, the number obtained by subtracting the number of shot balls from the number of paid-out balls) is displayed on the third symbol display device (for example, the acquired ball number display area 81a) and updated as needed. You may do it.

  In each of the above embodiments, the high-probability mode and the time reduction mode are included as a series of advantageous states. However, only the jackpot (special game state) may be advantageous. In such a case, a period of advantageous state is defined as a period when a jackpot (for example, a jackpot that occurs within a predetermined number of fluctuations) is satisfied when a predetermined condition is satisfied. What is necessary is just to comprise so that the number of acquired balls (namely, total acquisition number 81a1) in a period of an advantageous state, the average number of big hits, etc. may be acquired (calculated).

  Further, in each of the above embodiments, the advantageous state includes the high probability mode and the time reduction mode. However, the time reduction mode may be omitted, and the advantageous state may be the jackpot and the high probability mode.

  Further, in each of the above embodiments, the predetermined number of acquired balls displayed in the acquired number-of-plays display area 81a at the end of a series of advantageous state periods (the average number of acquired balls in the jackpot or the average number of acquired balls in the probability variation time short and medium) Etc.) is deleted after 5 seconds from the display, but may be displayed until the next jackpot occurs (that is, until the next advantageous state occurs). Moreover, it is good also as a structure displayed regularly (for example, at intervals of 20 seconds) during the period until the next big hit.

  Further, in the first embodiment, every time a series of advantageous period ends, the average number of acquired balls in jackpot (average value of the number of acquired balls in each jackpot that occurred during a series of advantageous states), It is configured to calculate and display the average number of acquired balls in the time of probability change (average value of the number of acquired balls in each high probability mode and each time shortening mode generated during a series of advantageous states). Instead of this, or in addition to this, the average value of the number of balls acquired in each jackpot (special game state) generated after the RAM 273 is initialized by power-on or the like, each high probability mode and each time reduction mode You may calculate and display the average value of the number of acquired balls in.

  The average value of the number of acquired balls in each jackpot generated after the RAM 273 is initialized by turning on the power, for example, is stored by accumulating the number of acquired balls in the jackpot generated after the RAM 273 is initialized by turning on the power. And a counter for counting the total number of jackpots that have occurred since the RAM 273 was initialized by turning on the power or the like may be provided to calculate and display an average value at a predetermined timing. Similarly, the average value of the number of acquired balls in each high probability mode and each time reduction mode generated after the RAM 273 is initialized by turning on the power is, for example, the high value generated after the RAM 273 is initialized by turning on the power. A memory for accumulating and storing the number of acquired balls in the probability mode and the time shortening mode, and for counting the total number of times of the high probability mode and the time shortening mode generated after the RAM 273 is initialized by power-on or the like. A counter may be provided so that the average value is calculated and displayed at a predetermined timing.

  In addition, as a display timing of these average values (that is, the average value of each acquired number of balls accumulated since the RAM 273 is initialized by power-on or the like), for example, the time when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player. There is a start timing of a customer waiting effect (title screen, demo screen) displayed when a predetermined time has elapsed. In this case, the display of each average value is continued while the customer waiting effect is displayed, so that the player can easily select the stand (pachinko machine 10) on which the player plays. Or you may make it display these average values regularly (for example, every 1 minute) also including the period when the player is performing a game.

  In addition, these average values (that is, the average value of each acquired number of balls accumulated since the initialization of the RAM 273 by turning on the power, etc.) are determined during the waiting for the stage (while the title screen and the demonstration screen are displayed). The button (for example, the frame button 22) may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when operated by the player. Alternatively, the average value of these may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while the player is operating (pressing) a predetermined button during the customer waiting effect. In addition, you may provide the button for exclusive use for displaying the average value of each acquired number of balls.

  In the first embodiment, when the high probability mode or the time shortening mode is ended according to the end condition defined by the number of executions of the variable display, the total number of acquired balls ( The number of acquired balls during a series of advantageous states is calculated and displayed. Instead, when the number of special figure holding balls N> 0 and at least one of the holding balls is selected at the timing when this series of advantageous period ends, , And display the number of acquired balls (the number of paid-out balls minus the number of fired balls) generated by the reserved ball to the total number of acquired balls calculated at the end of a series of advantageous period May be. The digestion period of a retention ball that occurs during a series of advantageous conditions is considered to be part of that series of advantageous conditions because the retention ball occurred during the series of advantageous conditions. be able to. Therefore, the number of acquired balls by jackpot generated by digesting the reserved balls can be recognized by the player in association with the total number of acquired balls during a series of advantageous states. Therefore, a player who has obtained a larger number of acquired balls by including the number of acquired balls by jackpot generated by digestion of the reserved balls in the total number of acquired balls during the series of advantageous states that ended immediately before. Can improve the player's satisfaction. Note that the number of acquired balls during the digestion period of the reserved balls generated during the series of advantageous states may be added to the total number of acquired balls during the series of advantageous states.

  Alternatively, after a timing when a series of advantageous period ends, a predetermined number (for example, 250) of spheres is targeted, and if a big hit is generated by at least one of the targeted spheres, the sphere The number of acquired balls in the jackpot generated by (the number obtained by subtracting the number of fired balls from the number of paid-out balls) may be added to the total number of acquired balls calculated at the end of a series of advantageous state periods. . The number of winning balls due to the jackpot from the timing when a series of advantageous period ends until a predetermined number of balls are consumed is also calculated for the player during the series of advantageous period ended immediately before. There is no sense of incongruity as part of the total number of acquired balls. Therefore, after the end timing of a series of advantageous state periods, the number of acquired balls due to jackpots that occurred during a period when a predetermined number of balls are consumed is included in the total number of acquired balls during the immediately preceding series of advantageous state periods As a result, the player can be impressed that a larger number of acquired balls has been obtained, and the player's satisfaction can be enhanced. Note that the number of acquired balls during the period when the “predetermined number” of balls is consumed may be added to the total number of acquired balls during a series of advantageous states.

  The “predetermined number” is preferably a numerical value (for example, 200, 150, 100, or the like) that is equal to or less than the number of spheres that can be stored in the upper plate 17. By setting the “predetermined number” to be equal to or less than the number of balls that can be stored in the upper plate 17, the period in which the player does not add balls to the upper plate 17 is the total number of acquired balls during a series of advantageous states. It is difficult to give the player a sense of incongruity with adding to the total number of acquired balls during the series of advantageous states that have just ended.

  In addition, after the end timing of a series of advantageous state periods, the number of winning balls due to the jackpot that occurred during the period when a predetermined number of balls are consumed is included in the total number of acquired balls during the immediately preceding period of advantageous state In the case of adopting the configuration, the number of winning balls in the jackpot caused by the holding balls generated during a period when a predetermined number of balls are consumed is added to the total number of balls acquired during a series of advantageous states. May be.

  In each of the above embodiments, the production control device 117 is in the high probability mode period (that is, from the start to the end of the high probability mode) based on the probability change start command and the probability change end command output from the main control device 110. It was configured to grasp. Instead, the effect control device 117 may grasp the period of the high probability mode based on the type command or the like.

  In other words, the production control device 117 can grasp that the game mode shifts to the high probability mode after the jackpot based on the type command indicating the probability variation jackpot, so the timing at which the jackpot ends is high for the production control device 117. It can be grasped (recognized) as the start of the probability mode. Then, the production control device 117 subsequently receives a type command indicating a jackpot (probability jackpot or normal jackpot) or the number of times the type command indicating a miss satisfies the end condition of the high probability mode (in each of the above embodiments, 10000 times), the variation time indicated by the variation pattern command corresponding to the type command (that is, the variation pattern command set based on the lottery performed with the same winning as the type command) has elapsed. The timing can be grasped as the end of the high probability mode, and thereby the period of the high probability mode (that is, from the start to the end of the high probability mode) can be grasped. The effect control device 117 can grasp the timing at which the jackpot ends based on a jackpot end command output from the main control device 110 as in the above embodiments, for example. Alternatively, the main control device 110 is configured to output a command indicating that to the effect control device 117 when the round ends during the jackpot, and the effect control device 117 ends the jackpot based on the command. You may make it grasp | ascertain a timing.

  Further, in each of the above embodiments, the production control device 117 is in the time reduction mode period (that is, from the start to the end of the time reduction mode) based on the short time start command and the short time end command output from the main control device 110. However, similar to the above-described determination of the period of the high probability mode, the presentation control device 117 may determine the period of the time reduction mode based on the type command or the like.

  In each of the above embodiments, the production control device 117 is configured to grasp (recognize) the end of the advantageous state based on the advantageous state end command output from the main control device 110. Instead, the production control device 117 counts the number of times that the type command indicating detachment satisfies the end condition of each mode in the high probability mode or the time reduction mode that can be grasped based on the type command (10000 in the above embodiment, respectively). Or 100 times), the timing at which the fluctuation time indicated by the fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the type command has elapsed may be recognized as the end of the advantageous state.

  In each of the above embodiments, each time the production control device 117 receives a firing control signal (firing pulse), the firing control signal interrupt process (see FIG. 32) is executed. The change of the control signal is monitored in the main process (see FIG. 22), and when the launch control signal is input (that is, when the signal rises high), the same process as the launch control signal interrupt process of FIG. You may comprise so that a process may be performed.

  In the launch control process (see FIG. 17) in each of the above embodiments, when the launch permission signal is input and the launch permission flag 203c is off (S621: Yes, S622: No), the ball feed control signal And a launch control signal are output (S625, S626), but S625 and S626 may not be executed. That is, when the launch permission signal is input and the launch permission flag 203c is off, the ball feed control signal and the launch control signal may not be output.

  Further, in the second and third embodiments, the “average number of acquired balls during probability variation time” is calculated as an average value of the number of acquired balls per one high probability mode or one time shortening mode. Similar to the modification of the first embodiment, the average value of the number of acquired balls per change display (that is, the second value) in each high probability mode or each time shortening mode that occurred during a series of advantageous states. The average number of balls acquired in the short and long time of the probability change).

  Further, in the second embodiment, while the frame button 22 is pressed (operated) during the customer waiting effect, the average number of balls acquired during the big hit and the average number of balls acquired during the short period of time for all probability changes are displayed. Although it is configured to display in the area 81a, the number of obtained balls is detected at the timing when the frame button 22 is pressed (that is, the effect control device 117 detects the rising from low to high of the signal input from the frame button 22). Display in the acquired ball number display area 81a for a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds). Alternatively, it is a predetermined period from the timing when the hand is released from the frame button 22 (that is, the timing when the production control device 117 detects the falling of the signal input from the frame button 22 from high to low). The acquired number of balls may be displayed in the acquired number of balls display area 81a (for example, for 5 seconds).

  Further, in the second embodiment, while the frame button 22 is pressed (operated) during the customer waiting effect, the average number of balls acquired during the big hit and the average number of balls acquired during the short period of time for all probability changes are displayed. Although it is configured to display in the area 81a, display and non-display of these acquired number of balls (the average number of acquired balls for the total hit and the average number of acquired balls for all probability change time), and the frame button 22 during the customer waiting effect It is good also as a structure switched whenever it is pressed down. That is, during the customer waiting effect, when the frame button 22 is pressed in a state where the number of acquired balls such as the average number of acquired balls is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the number of acquired balls is When the frame button 22 is pressed while the acquired number of balls is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the customer waiting effect, displayed on the three symbol display device 81 (acquired ball number display area 81a). May be configured to erase the displayed number of acquired balls.

  Further, in the second embodiment, when the customer waiting effect is being performed and the frame button 22 is pressed, the average number of balls acquired during the big hit and the average number of balls acquired during the short period of time are displayed. Although it is set as a condition to be displayed on 81a, it is configured to display these acquired number of balls in the acquired number-of-balls display area 81a when the frame button 22 is pressed even when the effect is not in the customer waiting stage. Also good. For example, a frame button is displayed during a period in which the total number of acquired balls, the average number of hits during the jackpot, and the number of balls acquired during the short period of time are displayed in the acquired number-of-plays display area 81a at the end of a series of advantageous states. When 22 is pressed, in addition to the number of acquired balls (total acquired number of balls, average number of acquired balls per jackpot, number of balls acquired during short-term probability change), the average acquired balls per total jackpot at the operation timing of the frame button 22 You may comprise so that a number and the average number of acquired balls may be displayed.

  Moreover, in the said 2nd Embodiment, in order to display the frame button 22 for making a player operate at the time of a production | presentation in the total acquisition number display area 81a, it displays the average number of acquired balls in total hit and the average number of acquired balls in all probability change time. However, a dedicated button or switch for displaying the average number of acquired balls per hit and the average number of acquired short and medium average times in the total acquired number display area 81a is used. It is good also as a structure to provide. By providing a dedicated button, even during the production using the operation of the frame button 22, the average number of acquired balls and the average number of acquired balls during the total probability change time are displayed in the total acquired number display area 81 a. Is possible.

  Further, in the second embodiment, when the frame button 22 is pressed during the customer waiting effect, an area for displaying the number of acquired balls (average number of acquired balls per total size, average number of acquired balls during all probability change time) is displayed. Although the same area as the display area of each acquired ball number during the execution of the game (that is, the acquired ball number display area 81a), the display area of the acquired ball number when the frame button 22 is pressed during the customer waiting effect is displayed. It may be a region different from the acquired ball number display region 81a. For example, the area where the number of acquired balls is displayed when the frame button 22 is pressed during the customer waiting effect may be the center area of the screen of the third symbol display device 81. The number of acquired balls, such as the average number of balls acquired in every hit and the average number of balls acquired during all time, can be an index for the player to select a more advantageous base for himself. By displaying in the center area of the screen of the symbol display device 81, the player can easily confirm the number of acquired balls.

  Further, in the second embodiment, when the frame button 22 is pressed during the customer waiting effect, the average number of hit balls during the total hit and the average number of shots obtained during the short period of time are displayed in the acquired ball number display area 81a. However, the contents displayed in the acquired ball number display area 81a when the frame button 22 is pressed during the guest waiting effect include the average acquired ball number for the total hit and the average acquired ball number for all probability variation time short and medium. Without limitation, the number of acquired balls of other types may be displayed. For example, when the frame button 22 is pressed during the customer waiting effect, the total number of balls acquired during the immediately preceding advantageous period, the average number of hits during jackpot, A number or the like may be displayed. Alternatively, the number of acquired balls such as the total number of acquired balls counted during a series of advantageous states is stored for each of a plurality of advantageous states, and The total number of acquired balls counted during a series of advantageous states may be displayed in a table or graph.

  Further, in the second embodiment, the number of acquired balls limited to the big hit during a series of advantageous states is stored in the first acquired ball number cumulative memory 273aa after the RAM 273 is initialized by power-on or the like. Accumulated and stored, and the number of times that a big hit has occurred in a series of advantageous states is accumulated and stored in the big hit number cumulative memory 273ac after the RAM 273 is initialized by turning on the power, etc., and the first acquisition Based on the value stored in the ball number cumulative memory 273aa and the value stored in the jackpot count cumulative memory 273ac, the average number of hit balls is calculated. Instead, each time a series of advantageous state periods ends, a set of the value stored in the advantageous state big hit medium acquired ball number memory 273h and the value of the big hit number counter 273b at that time is a set. When the frame button 22 is pressed during the customer waiting effect, the sum of the values in the advantageous state big hit number memory 273h in each series of advantageous states is stored in each series. By dividing by the sum of the big hit number counter 273b in the advantageous state, the average number of hit balls in the whole big hit may be calculated.

  Alternatively, each time a series of advantageous period ends, the value of the average number of balls acquired in S1270 and the value of the number of hits counter 273b at that time are stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 273 as a set. Then, when the frame button 22 is pressed during the customer waiting effect, the value of the average number of hit balls during the series of advantageous states and the value of the jackpot counter 273b are multiplied by the series of each round. By calculating the value of the number of acquired balls only during the jackpot in the period of advantageous state, and dividing the calculated value by the sum of the number of jackpot counters 273b in the series of advantageous states for each round, the average acquisition per total jackpot The number of balls may be calculated.

  In the second embodiment, the number of acquired balls only in the high probability mode or the time reduction mode in the series of advantageous states is set to the second time after the RAM 273 is initialized by power-on or the like. Accumulated and stored in the accumulated number-of-acquisition memory 273ab, the number of times that the high probability mode or the time shortening mode has occurred during a series of advantageous states is displayed. Accumulated and stored in the number-of-times accumulating memory 273ac, and based on the value stored in the second acquired number-of-balls accumulating memory 273ab and the value stored in the probability-change-time-short-time accumulated memory 273ad, It was set as the structure which calculates. Instead of this, it is also possible to calculate the total probability varying short and medium average acquired number of balls in the same manner as the above-mentioned total hit average average acquired number of balls.

  Further, in the second embodiment, when the frame button 22 is pressed during the customer waiting effect, the average number of hit balls during the total hit and the average number of shots obtained during the short period of time are displayed in the acquired ball number display area 81a. However, regardless of pressing of the frame button 22, the number of acquired balls can be set at a predetermined timing, for example, every fixed time (for example, every 1 minute or every 3 minutes), or a series of advantageous states. It is good also as a structure which is displayed on the acquired number-of-balls display area 81a every time is completed.

  Moreover, in the said 3rd Embodiment, it was set as the structure which complete | finishes the addition period at the timing which the 150th ball | bowl was launched from the start of the addition period, but it was launched after the 150th sphere was launched. It is good also as a structure which waits for the period (for example, 5 second) anticipated that a ball | bowl reaches | attains the 1st entrance 64, and complete | finishes an additional period. Alternatively, if a holding ball is generated during the addition period, a period during which the holding ball generated during the addition period is digested even after 150 balls have been launched since the addition period started. Alternatively, the additional period may be terminated after waiting.

  In the third embodiment, the value of the acquired number-of-balls memory 273g during the advantageous state is updated even during the additional period. However, the value of the acquired number-of-balls memory 273g during the advantageous state may not be updated. In other words, the number of acquired balls during the additional period may not be included in the number of acquired balls during a series of advantageous periods. In such a case, the processing of S3481 in the payout ball count processing (see FIG. 44) in the third embodiment and the processing of S3503 in the firing control signal interrupt processing (see FIG. 45) may be omitted. Good.

  In the third embodiment, the period from the end of the series of advantageous states to the launch of 150 balls is defined as the additional period. However, the additional period is determined from the end of the series of advantageous states. The number of fired spheres is not particularly limited. For example, a numerical value such as 100, 200, or 250 may be adopted. In this case also, it is preferable that the numerical value is equal to or less than the number of spheres that can be stored in the upper plate 17, as in the third embodiment.

  In the third embodiment, the period from the end of the series of advantageous states to the launch of 150 balls is defined as the additional period. However, the additional period is determined from the end of the series of advantageous states. The number of fired spheres is not particularly limited. For example, a period after a series of advantageous states ends (for example, 5 seconds or 10 seconds) may be employed.

  Alternatively, when there is a holding ball at the timing when a series of advantageous period ends (that is, the number of special figure holding balls N> 0), the period during which the holding ball is consumed may be set as the additional period. In such a case, if there is a holding ball in which at least one jackpot is selected among the holding balls at the timing when the series of advantageous period ends, the series of advantageous period will be extended. . The digestion period of a retention ball that occurs during a series of advantageous conditions is considered to be part of that series of advantageous conditions because the retention ball occurred during the series of advantageous conditions. be able to. Thus, when there is a big hitting ball in the holding ball, there is an additional period that is a digestion period of the holding ball and an extension of a series of advantageous periods based on the big hit that occurred during the additional period. Since it becomes easy for the player to relate, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable with the extension of a series of advantageous state periods, and to prevent the interest of the game from being impaired due to the uncomfortable feeling.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, although it was comprised so that a winning to the 1st entrance 64 and the passage of the 2nd entrance 67 might be suspended up to 4 times, respectively, the maximum number of times of suspension is limited to 4 times. It may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). In addition, the number of times the variable display is held based on the winning at the first entrance 64 is different for the part of the third symbol display device 81 by a number or by dividing the number of four divided areas by the number of times of the hold. It may be displayed in a mode (for example, color or lighting pattern), and a light emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first symbol display device 37, and the number of holding times is notified by the light emitting member. You may do it.

  In addition, as shown in the above embodiment, the variable display, which is a kind of dynamic display, is not limited to the one that scrolls the symbol as identification information in the vertical direction on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, It may be performed by moving and displaying a symbol along a predetermined route such as a direction or an L shape. In addition, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the display of variation of the symbol. For example, one or a plurality of characters may be displayed in various manners together with the symbol or displayed in a variety of manners separately from the symbol. The effect display etc. which are displayed are also included. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

  In the above embodiment, the effect control device 117 ends the change time when the value of the change time counter (not shown) is “0” in S1246 of the display effect process (see FIG. 24). However, the main control device 110 outputs a stop command at the timing of setting the stop display in S309 (see FIG. 10), and the effect control device 117 ends the variable time upon receipt of the stop command. The structure which determines with having been carried out may be sufficient.

  You may implement this invention in the pachinko machine etc. of a type different from the said embodiment. For example, the present invention may be applied to a so-called second type pachinko gaming machine having a winning device having a special area such as a V zone. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, the game machine may be implemented as another game machine such as an alepacchi or a sparrow ball.

  You may implement this invention in the pachinko machine etc. of a type different from the said embodiment. For example, once a big hit, a pachinko machine that raises the expected value of the big hit until a big hit state occurs (for example, two times or three times) including that (for example, a two-time right item, a three-time right item) May also be implemented. Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a special area such as a V-zone and has a special gaming state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, the game machine may be implemented as various game machines such as an alepatchi, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating a control lever in a state where a symbol effective line is determined by inserting coins, and a symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating a stop button. Is. Accordingly, the basic concept of the slot machine is that it is provided with a display device for confirming and displaying the identification information after variably displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and resulting from the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variation display of the identification information is started, and the variation display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific condition. In this case, the game medium is typically a coin, medal, etc. Take as an example.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided that displays a symbol after a symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols is variably displayed, and has a handle for launching a ball. What is not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of spheres based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the change of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or With the passage of time, the variation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the determined symbol at the time of stoppage is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large amount of balls are paid out to the lower tray.

  The concept of various inventions included in the gaming machine of the present invention and the various embodiments described above will be shown below.

  Control means for controlling a game based on the use of the game medium; and a payout means for paying out a number of game media according to the established condition when a predetermined condition is established during the game controlled by the control means. A medium acquisition number acquisition means for acquiring a medium acquisition number that is a difference between a game medium used in the game and a game medium paid out by the payout means, and the medium acquisition number acquisition means. A gaming machine A1 comprising medium acquisition number output means for displaying or outputting a value based on the number of acquired media.

  According to the gaming machine A1, the medium acquisition number that is the difference between the used game medium and the game medium paid out by the payout means is acquired by the medium acquisition number acquisition means and displayed or output by the medium acquisition number output means. . Therefore, in games where game media is used on the one hand and game media is paid out on the other hand, the number of game media actually acquired by the player, not the number of game media that the player has apparently acquired through payout (In other words, the player can feel the difference between the used game media and the game media paid out by the payout means, or the number of acquired media as the balance). In general, the game media used to play a game are paid by the player, so that the player can realize the number of media acquired in the game performed using the game media. It is possible to enhance the interest of games (games performed using game media obtained by paying consideration).

  In the above embodiment, the main control device 110 is exemplified as the control means of the gaming machine A1, and the payout control device 111 is exemplified as the payout means of the gaming machine A1. In the above embodiment, as the medium acquisition number acquisition means of the gaming machine A1, the processes of S1262, S1270, S1271 in the acquired ball number display process (see FIG. 25), and S1483 in the payout ball number counting process (see FIG. 31). , S1484, S1489, and the processes of S1503, S1504, and S1509 in the launch control signal interrupt process (see FIG. 32). Moreover, in the said embodiment, the process of S1263, S1266, and S1272 in an acquired ball number display process (refer FIG. 25) is illustrated as a medium acquisition number output means of gaming machine A1.

  The gaming machine A1 includes launching means for launching game media for use in a game, and the medium acquisition number obtaining means uses information based on launching by the launching means and information based on payout by the payout means. The game machine A2 is characterized in that the number of acquired media is acquired.

  According to the gaming machine A2, since the number of acquired media is acquired based on the information based on the launch by the launching means and the information based on the payout by the paying means, the number of acquired media can be acquired with suitable accuracy. The reliability of the number of acquired media displayed or output can be improved. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from having distrust in the number of acquired media displayed or output.

  In the above embodiment, the launching control device 112 is exemplified as the launching means of the gaming machine A2.

  The gaming machine A2 includes operation means and operation detection means for detecting that the operation means is operated by a player, and the launching means launches a game medium based on detection of an operation by the operation detection means. The medium acquisition number acquisition means acquires the medium acquisition number using information based on detection of an operation by the operation detection means and information based on payout by the payout means. A gaming machine A3.

  According to the gaming machine A3, a game medium is launched based on the detection of the operation of the operation means by the operation detection means, and the number of acquired media is information based on the detection of the operation by the operation detection means and information based on the payout by the payout means Therefore, the number of acquired media can be acquired with suitable accuracy, and the reliability of the number of acquired media displayed or output can be improved. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from having distrust in the number of acquired media displayed or output. In addition, since the operation of the operation means is performed by the player, the player can realize the number of media acquired in the game (that is, the game performed by the player) performed based on the operation of the operation means by the player. , You can enhance the fun of the games you play.

  In the above embodiment, the operation handle 51 is exemplified as the operation means of the gaming machine A3, and the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are exemplified as the operation detection means of the gaming machine A3.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the control means is advantageous compared to the normal state when a lottery means for performing a lottery when a start condition is satisfied and when a predetermined result is selected by the lottery means. An advantageous state generating means for generating an advantageous state, wherein the medium acquisition number acquisition means is a series of advantageous state periods formed from one or more advantageous states generated by the advantageous state generating means; A gaming machine A4, which acquires the number of acquired media.

  According to the gaming machine A4, the medium acquisition number during the series of advantageous states formed from one or a plurality of advantageous states is acquired by the medium acquisition number acquisition means, so during the series of advantageous states The medium acquisition number in is displayed or output by the medium acquisition number output means. Since the advantageous state is an advantageous state over the normal state and is also advantageous to the player, the balance (that is, the number of acquired media) of the game medium during a series of advantageous states caused by the player's game. Is information in which a player who pays for a game medium used for a game is particularly interested. Therefore, if the player can feel that he / she has obtained a sufficient number of media during the series of advantageous states by displaying or outputting the number of media acquired during the series of advantageous states The player's satisfaction with the game is greatly increased.

  On the other hand, if the player feels that the number of media gained during the series of advantageous states is insufficient, he can be suspicious of the nail adjustment, and the player will be Can give a chance to change. Therefore, it is possible to give a possibility of avoiding a situation where the player keeps playing with an unfavorable nail adjustment game machine, and it is possible to prevent the player from being frustrated. Further, the number of acquired media displayed or output by the number of acquired media output means can be an index for the player to select a more advantageous gaming machine by himself, so that the player can select a gaming machine that he can satisfy himself. It is possible to play a game that you are satisfied with.

  The “advantageous state” in the gaming machine A4 includes both the jackpot (special gaming state) in the above embodiment and a gaming mode (for example, a high probability mode or a time reduction mode) advantageous compared to the normal gaming mode. .

  In the above embodiment, the lottery means of the gaming machine A4 is exemplified by the process of S603 in the start winning process (see FIG. 16). Further, in the above embodiment, as the advantageous state generation means of the gaming machine A4, the big hit generation by the jackpot processing (see FIG. 14), or the probability changing flag 203a or the short-time flag 203b in the jackpot processing S435 or S457 is turned on. The occurrence of the high probability mode or the time shortening mode due to being set to exemplifies.

  In the gaming machine A4, the control means includes a change display executing means for executing a change display of the identification information when a start condition is satisfied, and the advantageous state generating means is configured to output at least the predetermined result by the lottery means. Special game state generation for generating a special game state as the advantageous state over a predetermined special game state period after the end of the variation display by the variation display execution means when the first result which is a part is selected The gaming machine comprises special game state occurrence number storage means for storing the number of special game states generated by the special game state generation means during the series of advantageous states. The medium acquisition number acquisition means is the medium when the special gaming state is generated by the special gaming state generation means during the series of advantageous states. A special game state medium acquisition number acquisition unit for acquiring the acquisition number is included, and the medium acquisition number output unit includes the medium acquisition number acquired by the special game state medium acquisition number acquisition unit, and the special game. Based on the number of times of the special gaming state stored in the state occurrence number storage means, the number of acquired media per time of the special gaming state during the series of advantageous state is displayed or output. A gaming machine A5 characterized by this.

  According to the gaming machine A5, the number of acquired media per special game state generated during a series of advantageous state periods is displayed or output, so that the player can experience a series of advantageous state periods experienced by the player. In the middle, you can feel the number of media acquired in one special game state. Generally, in the special game state, the number of game media to be paid out during that period is almost constant, whereas the number of game media used in that period is indefinite, so in the special game state period The number of acquired media mainly varies depending on the number of used game media. That is, the number of acquired media in the special gaming state period mainly varies depending on how the nail is adjusted. Therefore, the player guesses a situation that may be advantageous or disadvantageous to himself, such as how to adjust the nail, by referring to the number of medium acquisitions per special gaming state that occurred during a series of advantageous states. be able to. As a result, it is possible to give a possibility to avoid the situation where the player continues to play the game with an unfavorable nail adjustment game machine, so that the player can be satisfied and perform a satisfactory game. , Can enhance the fun of the game.

  In the above embodiment, the fluctuation display execution means of the gaming machine A5 is exemplified by fluctuation processing (see FIG. 10), and the special gaming state generation means of the gaming machine A5 is a jackpot by jackpot processing (see FIG. 14). The occurrence of is illustrated. In the above embodiment, the special game state occurrence number storage means of the gaming machine A5 is exemplified by the big hit number counter 273b, and the special game state medium acquisition number acquisition means of the gaming machine A5 is the payout ball count processing. The process of S1483 in (refer FIG. 31) and the process of S1503 in the launch control signal interruption process (refer FIG. 32) are illustrated.

  In the gaming machine A4 or A5, the control means includes a change display executing means for executing a change display of the identification information when a start condition is satisfied, and the advantageous state generating means is configured to output the predetermined result by the lottery means. Special game that generates a special game state as the advantageous state over a predetermined special game state period after the end of the change display by the change display execution means when the first result that is at least a part of is selected The medium acquisition number acquisition unit is configured to include a state generation unit, wherein the medium acquisition number acquisition unit is in a period of the series of advantageous states and the special game state is generated by the special game state generation unit. A special game state medium acquisition number acquisition unit for acquiring the medium acquisition number in the case of being generated, and the gaming machine is generated by the special game state generation unit. Special game state occurrence number accumulation storage means for accumulating and storing the number of times of the special game state, and in the special game state for accumulating and storing the medium acquisition number acquired by the medium acquisition number acquisition means during the special game state Medium acquisition number accumulation storage means, and the medium acquisition number output means is stored in the medium acquisition number accumulation storage means in the special gaming state and in the special gaming state occurrence number accumulation storage means. The gaming machine A6 is characterized in that it displays or outputs the number of acquired media per time in the special gaming state based on the number of times of the special gaming state.

  According to the gaming machine A6, since the number of acquired media per special game state, which is one of the advantageous states, is displayed or output, the player can acquire the number of media acquired in one special game state. Can be realized. Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to grasp the number of media that the player can acquire per special game state, and the player can more easily feel the balance of the game media. In addition, since the number of media acquired per special game state can be an index for the player to select a gaming machine in the hall, the player can respond to his / her request by displaying or outputting this numerical value. A gaming machine can be selected.

  In the above embodiment, the fluctuation display execution means of the gaming machine A6 is exemplified by fluctuation processing (see FIG. 10), and the special gaming state generation means of the gaming machine A6 is jackpot processing by the jackpot processing (see FIG. 14). The occurrence of is illustrated.

  In any one of the gaming machines A4 to A6, the advantageous state generating means is configured to play a game mode at a predetermined timing when a second result that is at least a part of the predetermined result is selected by the lottery means. Including an advantageous mode generating means for generating a mode more advantageous than the normal mode over the predetermined advantageous mode period as the advantageous state, and the gaming machine has the advantage during the series of advantageous states. An advantageous mode generation number storage means for storing the number of advantageous modes generated by the mode generation means, wherein the medium acquisition number acquisition means is in the period of the series of advantageous states and the advantageous mode generation means; The medium acquisition number output means for acquiring the medium acquisition number when the advantageous mode is generated by the medium is obtained. Is based on the number of medium acquisitions acquired by the medium acquisition number acquisition means during the advantageous mode and the number of the advantageous modes stored in the advantageous mode occurrence number storage means during the series of advantageous states. The gaming machine A7 is characterized in that it displays or outputs the number of acquired media per time in the advantageous mode.

  According to the gaming machine A7, since the number of medium acquisitions per advantageous mode that occurred during a series of advantageous states is displayed or output, the player can play during the series of advantageous states that he / she experiences. It is possible to realize the number of mediums acquired in one advantageous mode. Therefore, the player can easily grasp the number of media that the player can acquire per advantageous mode, and the balance of the game media can be more easily realized. In addition, since the number of acquired media per advantageous mode can be an index for the player to select a gaming machine in the hall, the player can select a gaming machine according to his / her request. In the gaming machine A7, the “second result” may be the same as or different from the “first result”.

  In the above embodiment, as the advantageous mode generation means of the gaming machine A7, the high probability mode by the fact that the probability variation flag 203a or the time reduction flag 203b is set to ON in S435 or S457 of the jackpot process (see FIG. 14). Or generation | occurrence | production of time reduction mode is illustrated. In the above embodiment, the advantageous mode occurrence number storage means of the gaming machine A7 is exemplified by the probable variation end number counter 273f, and the advantageous mode medium acquisition number acquisition means of the gaming machine A7 is the payout ball count processing ( The process of S1489 in FIG. 31) and the process of S1509 in the launch control signal interrupt process (see FIG. 32) are exemplified.

  In any one of the gaming machines A4 to A7, the advantageous state generating means is a game mode at a predetermined timing when the lottery means selects a second result that is at least a part of the predetermined result. Including an advantageous mode generating means for generating a mode more advantageous than the normal mode over the predetermined advantageous mode period as the advantageous state, and the medium acquisition number acquiring means is configured to be in the period of the series of advantageous states. And an advantageous mode medium acquisition number acquisition means for acquiring the medium acquisition number when the advantageous mode is generated by the advantageous mode generation means, wherein the gaming machine is configured to generate the advantageous mode. The advantageous mode occurrence number accumulation storage means for accumulating and storing the number of advantageous mode times generated by the means, and the medium acquisition number acquisition means during the advantageous mode. An advantageous mode medium acquisition number accumulating storage means for accumulating and storing the obtained medium acquisition number, and the medium acquisition number output means includes a medium acquisition number stored in the advantageous mode medium acquisition number accumulation storage means; A gaming machine that displays or outputs the number of mediums acquired per advantageous mode based on the number of advantageous modes stored in the advantageous mode occurrence number accumulating storage means. A8.

  According to the gaming machine A8, the number of acquired media per advantageous mode, which is one of the advantageous states, is displayed or output, so that the player can realize the number of media acquired in one advantageous mode. can do. Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to know the number of media that the player can acquire per advantageous mode, and the player can more easily feel the balance of the game media. In addition, since the number of media acquired per advantageous mode can be an index for the player to select a gaming machine in the hall, the numerical value is displayed or output so that the player can play the game according to his / her request. The machine can be selected. In the gaming machine A8, the “second result” may be the same as or different from the “first result”.

  In the above embodiment, the advantageous mode generation means of the gaming machine A8 is a high-probability mode in which the probability variation flag 203a or the short-and-short-term flag 203b is set to ON in S435 or S457 of the jackpot process (see FIG. 14). Or generation | occurrence | production of time reduction mode is illustrated.

  In any one of the gaming machines A4 to A8, the medium acquisition number acquisition unit is configured to acquire the medium in a series of advantageous state periods formed from one or more advantageous states generated by the advantageous state generation unit. When the occurrence of an advantageous state by the advantageous state generation means occurs within a predetermined period after the end of the advantageous state period, the medium acquisition number is acquired during the advantageous state period. The gaming machine A9 is characterized in that it is added to the number of acquired media acquired during the series of advantageous states.

  According to the gaming machine A9, the sum of the number of medium acquisitions during a series of advantageous states and the number of medium acquisitions in the advantageous state that occurred within a predetermined period after the end of the period is acquired by the medium acquisition number acquisition means. These are displayed or output by the medium acquisition number output means. The number of media acquisitions in the advantageous state that occurred during a given period after the series of advantageous state periods can be easily recognized in relation to the media acquisition number during the series of advantageous state periods, so that a larger number of media acquisitions can be obtained. The player can be impressed and the satisfaction of the player can be enhanced.

  The “predetermined period” in the gaming machine A9 may be, for example, a preset period (for example, 3 minutes), or a period during which the variable display held during the advantageous state is consumed. Alternatively, it is intended to include a period required to consume a predetermined number of game media.

  In any one of the gaming machines A4 to A9, the control means includes a fluctuation display execution means for executing a fluctuation display of the identification information when a starting condition is satisfied, and the advantageous state generation means is configured to When a second result, which is at least a part of the predetermined result, is selected, a game mode is generated at a predetermined timing over the predetermined advantageous mode period as a mode more advantageous than the normal mode. An advantageous mode generating means is configured to store the number of variable displays executed by the variable display executing means in the advantageous modes generated by the advantageous mode generating means during the series of advantageous states. An advantageous mode fluctuation number storage means, and the medium acquisition number acquisition means is in the advantageous mode during the series of advantageous states. And a medium acquisition number output means for acquiring the medium acquisition number during the advantageous mode, wherein the medium acquisition number output means includes the medium acquisition number acquired by the medium acquisition number acquisition means during the advantageous mode, and Based on the number of times of variable display stored in the number of times of change during mode storage, the medium per change display during the series of advantageous states and in the advantageous mode A gaming machine A10 that displays or outputs the number of acquisitions.

  According to the gaming machine A10, since the number of medium acquisitions per time during the series of advantageous states and in the advantageous mode is displayed or outputted, the player can In the advantageous mode during a series of experienced advantageous states, it is possible to realize the number of medium acquisitions that can be obtained per change display (that is, once the start condition is satisfied). Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to grasp the number of media that the player can acquire per change display in the advantageous mode and in the advantageous mode. It is easier to realize the balance. In addition, the number of medium acquisitions per change display during a series of advantageous states and in the advantageous mode can be an index for the player to select a gaming machine in the hall. A person can select a gaming machine according to his / her request. In the gaming machine A10, the “second result” may be the same as or different from the “first result”.

  In any one of the gaming machines A4 to A10, the control means includes a fluctuation display execution means for executing a fluctuation display of the identification information when a start condition is satisfied, and the advantageous state generation means is configured by the lottery means, When a second result, which is at least a part of the predetermined result, is selected, a game mode is generated at a predetermined timing over the predetermined advantageous mode period as a mode more advantageous than the normal mode. An advantageous mode generation means, wherein the medium acquisition number acquisition means is in the advantageous mode generated by the advantageous mode generation means during the series of advantageous states; and A medium acquisition number acquisition unit in a second advantageous mode for acquiring the medium acquisition number when the variable display is executed by the variable display execution unit; The gaming machine includes an advantageous mode variation number accumulation storage unit that accumulates and stores the number of times of variation display executed by the variation display execution unit in the advantageous mode generated by the advantageous mode generation unit; Second advantageous mode medium acquisition number accumulating storage means for accumulating and storing the medium acquisition number acquired by the two advantageous mode medium acquisition number acquisition means, wherein the medium acquisition number output means comprises the second The variable display during the advantageous mode based on the number of medium acquisitions stored in the medium acquisition number accumulating storage means during the advantageous mode and the number of times of the variable display stored in the variable number of times accumulating storage means during the advantageous mode. The game machine A11 is characterized in that it displays or outputs the number of acquired media per time.

  According to the gaming machine A11, the number of medium acquisitions per change display in the advantageous mode, which is one of the advantageous states, is displayed or output. It is possible to realize the number of acquired media that can be acquired (that is, once the start condition is satisfied). Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to grasp the number of media that the player can acquire per change display in the advantageous mode, and the player can more easily feel the balance of the game media. In addition, since the number of media acquired per change display in the advantageous mode can be an index for the player to select a gaming machine in the hall, the player can display his / her own numerical value to display his / her own value. It is possible to select a gaming machine according to the request. In the gaming machine A11, the “second result” may be the same as or different from the “first result”.

  A gaming machine A12 according to any one of the gaming machines A1 to A11, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and a ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in an operation port disposed at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning a prize (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display device is confirmed and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which values (including data written on magnetic cards as well as premium balls) are given.

  A gaming machine A13 according to any one of the gaming machines A1 to A11, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, examples of the game media include coins and medals.

  Any one of the gaming machines A1 to A11, wherein the gaming machine is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the operation of the identification information, the change of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed Special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stoppage is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.

  Control means for controlling a game based on the use of the game medium; and a payout means for paying out a number of game media according to the established condition when a predetermined condition is established during the game controlled by the control means. In a gaming machine comprising: a medium acquisition number acquisition means for acquiring a medium acquisition number that is a difference between a game medium used in the game and a game medium paid out by the payout means; and a second operable by the player A medium acquisition number output for displaying or outputting a value based on the medium acquisition number acquired by the medium acquisition number acquisition means when the player operates the operation means and the second operation means during a predetermined period A gaming machine B1 comprising means.

  According to the gaming machine B1, the medium acquisition number that is the difference between the used game medium and the game medium paid out by the payout means is acquired by the medium acquisition number acquisition means, and the acquired medium acquisition number is a predetermined value. When the second operation means is operated by the player during the period, it is displayed or output by the medium acquisition number output means. Therefore, in games where game media is used on the one hand and game media is paid out on the other hand, the number of game media actually acquired by the player, not the number of game media that the player has apparently acquired through payout A value based on (that is, the difference between the game media used and the game media paid out by the payout means or the media acquisition number which is the balance) can be reported to the player at a timing desired by the player in a predetermined period. it can. The value based on the number of acquired media can be used as an index for the player to select a more advantageous stand (game machine) by himself / herself, and is therefore displayed by the player operating the second operating means as necessary. Based on the value (value based on the number of acquired media), it is possible to select a table that is satisfactory to itself. Thereby, since the game which he can satisfy can be performed, the interest of the game which a player himself pays a price can be enhanced.

  In the above embodiment, the main control device 110 is exemplified as the control means of the gaming machine B1, and the payout control device 111 is exemplified as the payout means of the gaming machine B1. Moreover, in the said embodiment, the process of S2605 and S2606 in the acquired number-of-acquisition display process during a customer waiting effect (see FIG. 38) is exemplified as the medium acquisition number acquisition means of the gaming machine B1. Moreover, the frame button 22 is illustrated as a 2nd operation means of game machine B1. In the above embodiment, the medium acquisition number output means of the gaming machine B1 is exemplified by the processing of S2607 in the number-of-acquisition ball display processing during the customer waiting effect (see FIG. 38).

  The gaming machine B1 includes launching means for launching game media for use in a game, and the medium acquisition number obtaining means uses information based on launching by the launching means and information based on payout by the payout means. The game machine B2 is characterized in that the number of acquired media is acquired.

  According to the gaming machine B2, since the number of acquired media is acquired based on the information based on the launching by the launching means and the information based on the payout by the paying out means, the number of acquired media can be acquired with suitable accuracy. The reliability of the number of acquired media displayed or output can be improved. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from having distrust in the number of acquired media displayed or output.

  In the above embodiment, the launch control device 112 is exemplified as the launching means of the gaming machine B2.

  The gaming machine B2 includes operation means and operation detection means for detecting that the operation means is operated by a player, and the launching means launches a game medium based on detection of an operation by the operation detection means. The medium acquisition number acquisition means acquires the medium acquisition number using information based on detection of an operation by the operation detection means and information based on payout by the payout means. A gaming machine B3 characterized by this.

  According to the gaming machine B3, a game medium is launched based on the detection of the operation of the operation means by the operation detection means, and the number of acquired media is information based on the detection of the operation by the operation detection means and information based on the payout by the payout means Therefore, the number of acquired media can be acquired with suitable accuracy, and the reliability of the number of acquired media displayed or output can be improved. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from having distrust in the number of acquired media displayed or output. In addition, since the operation of the operation means is performed by the player, the player can realize the number of media acquired in the game (that is, the game performed by the player) performed based on the operation of the operation means by the player. , You can enhance the fun of the games you play.

  In the above embodiment, the operation handle 51 is exemplified as the operation means of the gaming machine B3, and the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are exemplified as the operation detection means of the gaming machine B3.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B3, a predetermined image display means for displaying a predetermined image when no game is played is provided, and the medium acquisition number output means displays the predetermined image on the predetermined image display means. The predetermined period is set as the predetermined period, and when the second operation unit is operated by the player during the predetermined period, a value based on the medium acquisition number acquired by the medium acquisition number acquisition unit is set. A gaming machine B4 characterized by being displayed or output.

  According to the gaming machine B4, when the second operation means is operated by the player, the period for displaying or outputting the value based on the number of acquired media is determined by the predetermined image display means when the game is not performed. Since the image is displayed, it is displayed or output if the second operating means is operated on a vacant table (a table on which nobody is playing and a predetermined image is displayed). Based on the value based on the number of acquired media, it is possible to select a table that is satisfactory to itself. Thereby, since the game which he can satisfy can be performed, the interest of the game which a player himself pays a price can be enhanced.

  In any of the gaming machines B1 to B4, the control means is advantageous over the normal state when a lottery means for performing a lottery when a start condition is satisfied and when a predetermined result is selected by the lottery means. An advantageous state generating means for generating an advantageous state, wherein the medium acquisition number acquisition means is a series of advantageous state periods formed from one or more advantageous states generated by the advantageous state generating means; A gaming machine B5, which acquires the number of acquired media.

  According to the gaming machine B5, the medium acquisition number during the series of advantageous states formed from one or a plurality of advantageous states is acquired by the medium acquisition number acquisition means, so during the series of advantageous states The number of acquired media in the medium can be displayed or output by the medium acquired number output means. The advantageous state is a state that is more advantageous than the normal state and is also advantageous to the player, so that the player can balance the game media during the series of such advantageous states (that is, the number of acquired media). By displaying and referring to the value based on the table, it becomes possible to select a more advantageous stand (game machine) by itself.

  The “advantageous state” in the gaming machine B5 includes both a jackpot (special game state) in the above embodiment and a game mode (for example, a high probability mode or a time reduction mode) advantageous compared to the normal game mode. .

  In the above embodiment, the lottery means of the gaming machine B5 is exemplified by the process of S603 in the start winning process (see FIG. 16). Further, in the above embodiment, as the advantageous state generating means of the gaming machine B5, the occurrence of jackpot due to the jackpot processing (see FIG. 14), or the probability change flag 203a or the short-time flag 203b is turned on in S435 or S457 of the jackpot processing The occurrence of the high probability mode or the time shortening mode due to being set to exemplifies.

  In the gaming machine B5, the control means includes a fluctuation display execution means for executing a fluctuation display of the identification information when a start condition is satisfied, and the advantageous state generation means is configured to perform at least the predetermined result by the lottery means. Special game state generation for generating a special game state as the advantageous state over a predetermined special game state period after the end of the variation display by the variation display execution means when the first result which is a part is selected The medium acquisition number acquisition means includes the medium acquisition number when the special game state is generated by the special game state generation means during the series of advantageous states. A special game state medium acquisition number acquisition means for acquiring the number of special game states generated by the special game state generation means. A special gaming state occurrence number accumulation storage means for storing; and a special gaming state medium acquisition number accumulation storage means for accumulating and storing the medium acquisition number acquired by the special gaming state medium acquisition number acquisition means, The medium acquisition number output means includes a medium acquisition number stored in the medium acquisition number accumulation storage means during the special gaming state when the second operation means is operated by a player during a predetermined period, and the special acquisition number A gaming machine that displays or outputs the number of acquired media per time in the special gaming state based on the number of times of the special gaming state stored in the cumulative number of occurrences of gaming state. B6.

  According to the gaming machine B6, when the player operates the second operation means, the number of acquired media per time in the special gaming state (one of the advantageous states) at that timing is displayed or output. In particular, the number of medium acquisitions displayed or output is accumulated and stored in the number of special gaming states accumulated in the special gaming state occurrence number accumulating storage means and in the medium acquisition number accumulating storage means in the special gaming state. Acquired based on the number of acquired media (the number of acquired media during the special gaming state by the means for acquiring the number of acquired media), so that the acquired media is displayed or output as the accumulated data increases. The number (the number of acquired media per special game state) makes it possible to determine a more advantageous stand more accurately by itself.

  In the above embodiment, the fluctuation display execution means of the gaming machine B6 is exemplified by fluctuation processing (see FIG. 10), and the special game state generation means of the gaming machine B6 is jackpot by jackpot processing (see FIG. 14). The occurrence of is illustrated.

  In the above embodiment, the medium acquisition number acquisition means during the special gaming state of the gaming machine B6 includes the processing in S1483 in the payout ball count processing (see FIG. 31) and the firing control signal interruption processing (see FIG. 32). The process of S1503 is illustrated. Further, as the special game state occurrence number accumulation storage means of the gaming machine B6, a big hit number accumulation counter 273ac is exemplified, and as the medium acquisition number accumulation storage means during the special game state of the gaming machine B6, the first acquired ball number accumulation memory 273aa is exemplified.

  In the gaming machine B5 or B6, when the second result which is at least a part of the predetermined result is selected by the lottery unit, the advantageous state generating unit changes the game mode to a normal mode at a predetermined timing. An advantageous mode generating means for generating a mode more advantageous than a mode as the advantageous state over a predetermined advantageous mode period, wherein the medium acquisition number acquiring means is during the series of advantageous states, And it is comprised including the medium acquisition number acquisition means during advantageous mode when the advantageous mode is generated by the advantageous mode generation means, and the game machine is generated by the advantageous mode generation means. Advantageous mode occurrence number accumulation storage means for accumulating and storing the number of advantageous modes obtained, and the medium acquired by the medium acquisition number acquisition means during the advantageous mode. Medium acquisition number accumulation storage means during advantageous mode for accumulating and storing the number of acquisitions, the medium acquisition number output means, when the second operating means is operated by a player during a predetermined period, Based on the number of medium acquisitions stored in the advantageous mode medium acquisition number accumulating storage means and the number of the advantageous modes stored in the advantageous mode occurrence number accumulating storage means, the medium per time of the advantageous mode A gaming machine B7 that displays or outputs the number of acquisitions.

  According to the gaming machine B7, when the player operates the second operation means, the number of media acquired per time in the advantageous mode (one of the advantageous states) at that timing is displayed or output. Therefore, it is possible to determine whether or not the stand is advantageous to itself based on the displayed number of acquired media, and it is possible to select a stand that is satisfactory to the stand. Therefore, since it is possible to play a satisfactory game by the table selected by the player, it is possible to increase the interest of the game that the player himself pays for the game. In the gaming machine B7, the “second result” may be the same as or different from the “first result”.

  In the above embodiment, as the advantageous mode generation means of the gaming machine B7, the high probability mode due to the fact that the probability variation flag 203a or the time reduction flag 203b is set to ON in S435 or S457 of the jackpot process (see FIG. 14). Or generation | occurrence | production of time reduction mode is illustrated.

  In the above embodiment, the medium acquisition number acquisition means during the advantageous mode of the gaming machine B7 includes the processing of S1489 in the payout ball count processing (see FIG. 31) and S1509 in the firing control signal interruption processing (see FIG. 32). This process is exemplified. Further, in the above embodiment, the advantageous mode occurrence number accumulation storage means of the gaming machine B7 is exemplified by the probability change time short-time accumulation counter 273ad, and the advantageous mode medium acquisition number accumulation storage means of the gaming machine B7 is the second acquisition. The ball number accumulation memory 273ab is exemplified.

In any one of the gaming machines B5 to B7, the control unit includes a variation display execution unit that executes variation display of the identification information when a start condition is satisfied, and the advantageous state generation unit is configured to When a second result, which is at least a part of the predetermined result, is selected, a game mode is generated at a predetermined timing over the predetermined advantageous mode period as a mode more advantageous than the normal mode. An advantageous mode generation means, wherein the medium acquisition number acquisition means is in the advantageous mode generated by the advantageous mode generation means during the series of advantageous states; and And a second advantageous mode medium acquisition number acquisition means for acquiring the medium acquisition number when the variable display is executed by the variable display execution means. The gaming machine includes an advantageous mode variation number accumulation storage unit that accumulates and stores the number of variation displays executed by the variation display execution unit in the advantageous mode generated by the advantageous mode generation unit, and the second mode. Second advantageous mode medium acquisition number accumulating storage means for accumulating and storing the medium acquisition number acquired by the medium acquisition number acquisition means during the advantageous mode, and the medium acquisition number output means during a predetermined period When the second operation means is operated by the player, the number of medium acquisitions stored in the second advantage mode medium acquisition number accumulation storage means and the advantage mode change number accumulation storage means are stored in the second advantage mode. The gaming machine B8 is characterized by displaying or outputting the number of medium acquisitions per change display during the advantageous mode based on the number of change displays being performed.
According to the gaming machine B8, when the player operates the second operation means, the medium acquisition that can be acquired per change display in the advantageous mode at that timing (that is, once the start condition is satisfied). Since the number is displayed or output, the player can determine whether or not the stand is advantageous to the player based on the displayed number of acquired media, and can select a stand that he or she can satisfy. It becomes possible. Therefore, since it is possible to play a satisfactory game by the table selected by the player, it is possible to increase the interest of the game that the player himself pays for the game. In the gaming machine B8, the “second result” may be the same as or different from the “first result”.

  One of the gaming machines B1 to B8, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and a ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in an operation port disposed at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning a prize (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display device is confirmed and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which values (including data written on magnetic cards as well as premium balls) are given.

  A gaming machine B10 according to any one of the gaming machines B1 to B8, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, examples of the game media include coins and medals.

  A gaming machine B11 according to any one of the gaming machines B1 to B8, wherein the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the operation of the identification information, the change of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed Special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stoppage is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.

  Control means for controlling a game based on the use of the game medium; and a payout means for paying out a number of game media according to the established condition when a predetermined condition is established during the game controlled by the control means. Medium acquisition number acquisition means for acquiring a medium acquisition number which is a difference between a game medium used in the game and a game medium paid out by the payout means within one special period, and the medium The medium acquisition number output means for displaying or outputting a value based on the medium acquisition number acquired by the acquisition number acquisition means, and the medium based on the establishment of a predetermined end condition that is a condition for ending the special period An acquisition end means for ending acquisition of the number of medium acquisitions in the one special period by the acquisition means, and a condition for starting the special period within a predetermined period after the end condition is satisfied. When a predetermined start condition is satisfied, the medium acquisition number acquired by the medium acquisition number acquisition means is acquired by the acquisition end means within one special period that is started based on the satisfaction of the start condition. A gaming machine C1 comprising an adding means for adding to the number of completed media acquisitions.

  According to the gaming machine C1, the medium acquisition number that is the difference between the game medium used in the game and the game medium paid out by the payout means is acquired by the medium acquisition number acquisition means within one special period, and the medium acquisition It is displayed or output by the number output means. Therefore, in games where game media is used on the one hand and game media is paid out on the other hand, the number of game media actually acquired by the player, not the number of game media that the player has apparently acquired through payout (In other words, the player can feel the difference between the used game media and the game media paid out by the payout means, or the number of acquired media as the balance). In general, the game media used to play a game are paid by the player, so that the player can realize the number of media acquired in the game performed using the game media. It is possible to enhance the interest of games (games performed using game media obtained by paying consideration).

  In addition, based on the fact that a predetermined end condition for ending the special period is satisfied, the acquisition of the number of medium acquisitions in one special period is ended by the acquisition end means. After the end condition is satisfied, When a predetermined start condition for starting the special period is satisfied within the predetermined period, the medium acquired by the medium acquisition number acquisition means within one special period that is started based on the satisfaction of the start condition The number of acquisitions is added by the adding means to the number of medium acquisitions acquired by the acquisition ending means. Therefore, since the number of media acquisitions larger than the number of media acquisitions acquired in one special period will be displayed or output, the player can be impressed that a large number of media acquisitions has been obtained, Thereby, a player's satisfaction and superiority can be enhanced, and the interest of the game can be further improved.

  In the above embodiment, the main control device 110 is exemplified as the control means of the gaming machine C1, and the payout control device 111 is exemplified as the payout means of the gaming machine C1. In the above embodiment, as the medium acquisition number acquisition means of the gaming machine C1, the processing of S1262, S1270, S1271 in the acquired ball number display process (see FIG. 41) of the third embodiment, the payout ball of the third embodiment Examples of the processes of S1483, S1484, and S1489 in the number counting process (see FIG. 44) and the processes of S1503, S1504, S1509, and S3503 in the firing control signal interrupt process (see FIG. 45) are illustrated. In the above embodiment, examples of the medium acquisition number output means of the gaming machine C1 include the processes of S1263, S1266, and S1272 in the acquired ball number display process (see FIG. 41) of the third embodiment.

  In the above embodiment, as acquisition means for the gaming machine C1, in the launch control signal interrupt process (see FIG. 45) of the third embodiment, a process branching to the Yes side in S3501 is performed. It is exemplified that the process of S1504 is not executed. Further, in the above embodiment, as the adding means of the gaming machine C1, in the launch control signal interrupt process (see FIG. 45) of the third embodiment, a process branching to the Yes side is performed in S3501, and in S3504 It is exemplified that the processes of S3505 to S3507 are not executed when the process of branching to the No side is performed.

  The gaming machine C1 includes a launching unit that launches a game medium for use in a game, and the medium acquisition number acquiring unit uses information based on launching by the launching unit and information based on payout by the paying unit. The game machine C2 is characterized in that the number of acquired media is acquired.

  According to the gaming machine C2, since the number of acquired media is acquired based on the information based on the launch by the launching means and the information based on the payout by the paying out means, the number of acquired media can be acquired with suitable accuracy. The reliability of the number of acquired media displayed or output can be improved. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from having distrust in the number of acquired media displayed or output.

  In the above embodiment, the launching control device 112 is exemplified as the launching means of the gaming machine A2.

  The gaming machine C2 includes operation means and operation detection means for detecting that the operation means has been operated by a player, and the launching means launches a game medium based on detection of an operation by the operation detection means. The medium acquisition number acquisition means acquires the medium acquisition number using information based on detection of an operation by the operation detection means and information based on payout by the payout means. A gaming machine C3 characterized by this.

  According to the gaming machine C3, the game medium is launched based on the detection of the operation of the operation means by the operation detection means, and the number of acquired media is information based on the detection of the operation by the operation detection means and information based on the payout by the payout means Therefore, the number of acquired media can be acquired with suitable accuracy, and the reliability of the number of acquired media displayed or output can be improved. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from having distrust in the number of acquired media displayed or output. In addition, since the operation of the operation means is performed by the player, the player can realize the number of media acquired in the game (that is, the game performed by the player) performed based on the operation of the operation means by the player. , You can enhance the fun of the games you play.

  In the above embodiment, the operation handle 51 is exemplified as the operation means of the gaming machine C3, and the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are exemplified as the operation detection means of the gaming machine C3.

  In the gaming machine C2 or C3, the game machine C2 or C3 includes storage means for storing the game medium to be launched by the launching means so that the player can replenish it, and the predetermined period is a period in which a predetermined number of game media are fired by the launching means. The predetermined number is equal to or less than the number of game media that can be stored in the storage means.

  According to the gaming machine C4, the period during which a predetermined number of game media are fired by the launching means is a predetermined condition that is a condition for starting a special period after an end condition that is a condition for ending the special period is satisfied. This is a period for monitoring whether or not the start condition is satisfied (that is, a predetermined period), and the predetermined number is equal to or less than the number that can be stored in the storage means for storing the game media to be launched by the launching means. Here, since the storage means is configured so that the player can replenish game media, the predetermined period is set to a period in which the number of game media that can be stored in the storage means is launched by the launch means. The period during which the player does not perform the operation of replenishing the storage medium with the game medium can be set as the predetermined period. When the player performs an operation of replenishing the storage medium with the game medium, there is a possibility that the predetermined period may be felt as “long”, and during the predetermined period, a predetermined start condition is established and the addition is performed. Even if the media acquisition number is added by means, the player may feel uncomfortable with the addition. On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C4, by setting the predetermined period as a period during which the number of game media that can be stored in the storage unit is launched by the launching unit, the predetermined period is “long” to the player. Since the player can suppress a sense of incongruity with respect to the addition of the number of acquired media without feeling it, it is possible to prevent the interest of the game from being impaired by the sense of discomfort.

  In the above embodiment, the upper plate 17 is exemplified as the storage means of the gaming machine C4.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C3, the control means executes a change display execution means for executing a change display of the identification information based on the establishment of the start condition, and executes the change display of the identification display by the change display execution means. Fluctuation display holding means for holding the execution of the variation display of the identification display by the fluctuation display execution means based on the establishment of the one or more start conditions when one or more start conditions are established. The gaming machine C5 is characterized in that the predetermined period is a period in which the variation display of the identification display suspended by the variation display suspension unit within the special period is performed by the variation display execution unit.

  According to the gaming machine C5, after an end condition that is a condition for ending the special period is satisfied, a period for monitoring whether or not a predetermined start condition that is a condition for starting the special period is satisfied (ie, , A predetermined period) is a period during which the variable display of the identification display held by the variable display holding means within the special period is executed by the variable display executing means. Here, the change display of the identification information held during the special period can be regarded as a part of the special period because the hold occurred during the special period. Therefore, a predetermined period (that is, a period for monitoring whether or not a predetermined start condition that is a condition for starting the special period is satisfied after an end condition that is a condition for ending the special period is satisfied) and The addition of the number of medium acquisitions based on a predetermined start condition established during a predetermined period is easy for the player to associate, so that it is difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable with the addition of the medium acquisition number by the adding means. It is possible to prevent the interest of the game from being impaired due to a sense of incongruity.

  In the above embodiment, the variation display executing means of the gaming machine C5 is exemplified by the variation start process (see FIG. 12), and the variation display holding means of the gaming machine C5 is in the start winning process (see FIG. 16). In S603, data is stored in the reserved second area to the reserved fourth area.

  In any of the gaming machines C1 to C5, the adding means, when a predetermined start condition that is a condition for starting a special period is satisfied within a predetermined period after the end condition is satisfied, The gaming machine C6, wherein the number of medium acquisitions acquired by the medium acquisition number acquisition unit within the predetermined period is added to the number of medium acquisitions acquired by the acquisition end unit.

  According to the gaming machine C6, when a predetermined start condition for starting the special period is satisfied within a predetermined period after the end condition is satisfied, the game machine C6 starts based on the satisfaction of the start condition. In addition to the medium acquisition number acquired by the medium acquisition number acquisition unit within the special period, the medium acquisition number acquired by the medium acquisition number acquisition unit within the predetermined period is also acquired by the acquisition end unit by the addition unit Is added to the number of acquired media. Therefore, since a larger number of media acquisitions will be displayed or output, the player can be impressed that more media acquisitions have been obtained, A sense of superiority can be enhanced, and the entertainment of the game can be further improved.

  In the above embodiment, as the adding means of the gaming machine C6, the process of S3503 in the launch control signal interrupt process (see FIG. 45) of the third embodiment is exemplified.

  In any of the gaming machines C1 to C6, there is provided a non-display unit that hides the medium acquisition number displayed by the medium acquisition number output unit when the end condition is satisfied. Game machine C7.

  According to the gaming machine C7, when the end condition is satisfied, the medium acquisition number displayed by the medium acquisition number output unit is hidden by the non-display unit, so that the special period ends. Therefore, it is possible to suppress giving the player a sense of incongruity as if the number of acquired media has been acquired. Therefore, the period of a series of advantageous states can be extended without a sense of incongruity, and the interest of the game can be prevented from being impaired by the sense of incongruity.

  In the above embodiment, the non-display means of the gaming machine C6 is exemplified by the process of S1279 in the acquired ball number display process (see FIG. 41) of the third embodiment.

  One of the gaming machines C1 to C7, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and a ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in an operation port disposed at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning a prize (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display device is confirmed and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which values (including data written on magnetic cards as well as premium balls) are given.

  A gaming machine C9 according to any one of the gaming machines C1 to C7, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, examples of the game media include coins and medals.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C7, the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the operation of the identification information, the change of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed Special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stoppage is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
110 Main control device 117 Production control device

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine or the like.

  For example, when a starting condition is established, a lottery is given to the gaming machine, and when a predetermined result is selected by the lottery, a special gaming state (for example, a gaming state called a win) is given after the symbol stops. There is something to generate. In addition, for example, after a special gaming state is ended, the gaming machine is in a predetermined advantageous state (for example, a state called probability variation or probability variation, a state called time reduction or time reduction, etc.) for a predetermined period. There is something to generate.

JP 2011-072569 A

  In the gaming machines exemplified above, it is always required to improve the interest of the game.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described circumstances and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of games.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 has a control means for controlling a game based on the use of a game medium, and when a predetermined condition is established during a game controlled by the control means, A payout means for paying out a number of game media according to the established condition, an operation means operable by the player, and an operation for detecting that the operation means has been operated by the player detection means, based on detection of the operation by the operation detecting means of that, a firing means for firing the game medium for use in a game, the information based on the firing of game media due to the firing means, said dispensing means by using the information based on the payout of Ru good game medium, a medium win number obtaining means for obtaining a media acquisition number is a difference between the game media to be paid out by the game medium and the payout device used in a game, the media Comprising been a medium tally output means for displaying or outputting a value based on the medium tally obtained by acquiring the number acquisition means, said control means includes selecting means for performing lottery if the start condition is satisfied, the selecting means When a predetermined result is selected, an advantageous state generating unit that generates an advantageous state that is advantageous compared to the normal state, a change display executing unit that executes a change display of the identification information when the start condition is satisfied, When one or more start conditions are established during execution of the change display of the identification information by the change display execution means, the change display execution means by the change display execution means based on the establishment of the one or more start conditions. A change display holding unit for holding execution, and the advantageous state generating unit finishes the change display by the change display executing unit when a predetermined result is selected by the lottery unit. The special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous as compared with the normal state as the advantageous state, and the gaming as the advantageous state after the special gaming state generated by the special gaming state generating means ends. The mode is set to an advantageous mode that is more advantageous than the normal state, and the probability that the special gaming state occurs is higher than the normal state according to the predetermined result selected by the lottery means. An advantageous mode setting means for setting the first advantageous mode, or a second advantageous mode in which the probability of occurrence of the special gaming state is the same as the normal state, and the medium acquisition number acquisition means A sequence from the start of the special gaming state to the end of the second advantageous mode by the end condition defined by the number of executions of the change display. Medium acquisition number storage means for storing the total number of medium acquisitions acquired in the special gaming state during the advantageous state period, and when the series of advantageous state periods ends, the change display suspension For at least one change display held by the means, a confirmation means for confirming whether or not the special gaming state occurs when the at least one or more change display ends, and a special gaming state is generated by the confirmation means And adding means for adding the medium acquisition number acquired in the special gaming state to the total number of medium acquisition numbers stored in the medium acquisition number storage means when it is confirmed that tally output means, a value based on the total number of the medium tally said medium tally is stored in said medium win number storage means are added by said adding means 示又outputs.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the game .

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a front view of a game board. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a schematic diagram for demonstrating the display screen of a 3rd symbol display apparatus. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the outline | summary of various counters. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of RAM of an effect control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation process performed in the main process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the reservation ball | bowl storage area forward transfer process performed in the fluctuation | variation process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the change start process performed in the change process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of the fluctuation | variation completion performed in the fluctuation | variation process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot process performed in the main process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed in the timer interruption process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the discharge control process performed in the timer interruption process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows a NMI interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU in a payout control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in a payout control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU in an effect control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in an effect control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the audio | voice lamp effect process performed in the main process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the display effect process performed in the main process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the acquired number-of-balls display process performed in the main process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the command reception interruption process performed by MPU in an effect control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of jackpot completion performed in the command reception interruption process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of the end of probability change performed in the command reception interruption process of FIG. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing a time-saving end process executed in the command reception interrupt process of FIG. 26. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of the fluctuation | variation start performed in the command reception interruption process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the payout ball number count process performed in the command reception interruption process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the discharge control signal interruption process performed by MPU in an effect control apparatus. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of RAM273 of the production | presentation control apparatus 117 in the modification of 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the command reception interruption process in the modification of 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of the change start in the modification of 1st Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of RAM of the presentation control apparatus of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the audio lamp effect process of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the number-of-acquisition display process during waiting for a waiting effect performed in the voice lamp effect process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the acquired ball number display process of 2nd Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of RAM of the presentation control apparatus of 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the acquired ball number display process of 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of the end of probability change of 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the processing at the time-short end of 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the payout ball | bowl count process of 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the discharge control signal interruption process of 3rd Embodiment.

  Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed of a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball ball game is performed when the ball flows down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 has a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 5) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower dish unit 15 that covers the lower side of the front frame 14 are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower dish unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. 14 and the lower pan unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and a window part 14c that is formed in an approximately elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central part thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be seen on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16. On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 that stores balls is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes forward and the upper surface is opened, and prize balls and rental balls are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the sphere thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launch unit 112a by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. This frame button 22 is used by the player when, for example, changing the effect pattern of the variable display (variation effect) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or changing the effect content at the reach effect. Operated.

  In addition, the front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the periphery (for example, a corner portion). These light-emitting means play a role of enhancing the effect of the game during the game by changing or controlling the light-emitting mode by turning on or flashing according to the change in the gaming state at the time of big hit or predetermined reach. On the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 incorporating light emitting means such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these lighting parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and the lighting parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking of the built-in LEDs at the time of jackpot or reach effects. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is being hit or that the reach is one step before the jackpot.

  Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has built-in light emitting means such as LEDs and can display the payout of a prize ball and when an error occurs. In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, on the lower side of the right illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) is visible from the front surface of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin that is chrome-plated is attached to an area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42 and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state where a bill or a card is inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, Loans are made. That is, a ball used for a game is lent out when the player pays a consideration such as a bill. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining amount as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. In addition, in a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of the parts so that the component configuration is common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing a ball that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape having an open upper surface. Yes. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 that is operated by a player to drive a ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is disposed, and the operation of the ball launching unit 112a is permitted inside the operation handle 51. Touch sensor 51a (refer to FIG. 5), a push button type stop switch 51b (refer to FIG. 5) for stopping the launch of the sphere during the pressing operation, and the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. A variable resistor 51c (see FIG. 5) that detects the change in electrical resistance is incorporated.

  When the player rotates the operation handle 51 clockwise without operating the stop switch 51b, the touch sensor 51a is turned on, and the resistance value of the variable resistor 51c changes according to the amount of rotation operation, and is variable. A sphere is launched with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the resistor 51c. As a result, a ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 by the player. Note that in a state where the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

  In the lower part of the front of the lower plate 50, a ball removal lever 52 is provided for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. The ball removal lever 52 is always urged in the right direction. By sliding the ball release lever 52 in the left direction against the urge, the bottom opening formed in the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as “a thousand box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of ball nails, windmills and rails 61 and 62, a general winning opening 63, The ball entrance 64, the variable winning device 65, the second ball entrance 67 (through gate), the variable display device unit 80, and the like are assembled, and the peripheral edge thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. In FIG. 2, a part of a nail, a metal fitting, or the like is deleted and illustrated for easy understanding of the reference numerals. The general winning port 63, the first winning port 64, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and the wood screw is provided from the front side of the game board 13. It is fixed by etc. Further, the front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). Below, the structure of the game board 13 is demonstrated.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and the strip-shaped metal plate is located on the inner side of the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and rear. A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a front surface of the game board 13 and is a substantially circular area formed by dividing the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 (a winning hole or the like is provided, Falling area).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launching unit 112a to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the front end portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the sphere, and the ball launched at a predetermined momentum or more hits the return rubber 69 and gains momentum. Is bounced back to the center while being attenuated. A resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62 is a base. The plate 60 is driven and fixed.

  A first symbol display device 37 for mainly displaying the first symbol is disposed on the upper right side of the game area as viewed from the front (upper right side in FIG. 2). The first symbol display device 37 is provided with a 7-segment LED 37a, an LED 37b, and the like. The 7-segment LED 37a is used for displaying the number of rounds during the big hit game and displaying an error.

  On the other hand, the LED 37b is composed of a three-color light emitting diode (three-color LED) having red, green, and blue emission colors, and displays the first symbol by its lighting color (lighting mode). Specifically, each time the ball wins the first entrance 64, the color change display (variation display) of the LED 37b is performed, and the first symbol (that is, the lighting color of the LED 37b) when the variation display is stopped. The winning lottery result made by the main controller 110 (see FIGS. 3 and 5) triggered by winning at the first entrance 64 is displayed deterministically.

  More specifically, when the ball wins the first entrance 64, the LED 37b displays the three-color LEDs in a color change display (variation display) at a high speed in the order of red → green → blue → red →. When elapses, it is fixedly displayed in one of the colors. When the big hit lottery is won, the LED 37b is fixedly displayed in red or green (for example, stopped for several seconds).

  In particular, the confirmation display in red indicates that the winning jackpot type is “probable jackpot”. When the LED 37b is displayed in red, the game mode after the special gaming state (big win) is over, the jackpot probability of the jackpot lottery is higher than the normal probability, and the hit probability of the second symbol described later is the normal probability. The higher probability mode (probability variation mode, probability variation mode) is improved.

  On the other hand, the confirmation display in green indicates that the winning jackpot type is “ordinary jackpot”. When the LED 37b is displayed in green, the game mode after the special gaming state is ended, the jackpot probability of the jackpot lottery is a normal probability, but the time reduction mode in which the hit probability of the second symbol is higher than the normal probability (Time reduction mode).

  In addition, in the high probability mode and the time reduction mode, instead of changing the winning probability of the second symbol, the time for opening the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 It is good also as what changes the frequency | count that an electric accessory opens | releases per hit.

  Further, when the jackpot lottery is not won, that is, when the result of the jackpot lottery is “out”, the LED 37b is fixedly displayed in blue. When the LED 37b is confirmed and displayed in blue, the game mode after the special game state is ended is a normal mode in which the jackpot probability of the jackpot lottery and the hit probability of the second symbol are both normal probabilities.

  In addition to the LED 37a and LED 37b described above, the first symbol display device 37 is provided with a plurality of LEDs (not shown) for notifying various information. Whether the plurality of LEDs are in the gaming mode of the pachinko machine 10 (for example, whether it is a high probability mode, a time reduction mode, a normal mode, etc.), or whether a variation is being displayed (during variation). No., the number of times that the winning of the ball to the first entrance 64 (pending) is put on hold, etc. are notified by the lighting state.

  The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning openings 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In addition, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 includes a third liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “LCD”) that displays the third symbol in a variable manner with a winning (winning) to the first entrance 64 as a trigger. A symbol display device 81, a second symbol display portion 83 composed of LEDs that variably display the second symbol triggered by the passage of a sphere at the second entrance 67 (through gate), and a second entrance 67 ( There is provided a second symbol holding lamp 84 indicating the number of balls held through the through gate).

  The display content of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by an effect control device 117 (see FIG. 5), which will be described later, and, for example, three symbol rows of left, middle, and right are displayed. Each symbol row is constituted by a plurality of third symbols, and these third symbols are scrolled horizontally for each symbol row so that the third symbols are variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. (See FIG. 4 (a)). In the present embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 is constituted by a large 8-inch liquid crystal display, and the variable display device unit 80 surrounds the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81 so as to surround the center frame. 86 is arranged. In the present embodiment, in the first symbol display device 37, the gaming state accompanying the control of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 5) and the display of the first symbol indicating the lottery result (lighting of the LED 37b) are displayed. On the other hand, a decorative display (variation effect) according to the display of the first symbol is performed on the third symbol display device 81. Instead of the LCD, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment has various stop symbols (for example, the first symbol indicating the probability variation jackpot, the first symbol indicating the normal jackpot) in the first symbol display device 37 after the lottery lottery is started. If any of the balls wins (enters) the first entrance 64 before displaying any one of the first symbols indicating disengagement, the maximum number of winning (entrance) is 4 Hold until times. The number of holding times is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 as described above, and is also indicated by the number of lights of the special figure holding lamp 85. Hereinafter, the number of holdings for the first entrance 64 may be referred to as a special figure holding ball number N. Four special figure holding lamps 85 are provided corresponding to the maximum number of holding times, and are arranged above the third symbol display device 81.

  In the present embodiment, it is configured so that the winning at the first entrance 64 is held up to four times at maximum, but the maximum number of times of holding (that is, the maximum value that the special figure holding ball number N can take) It is not limited to four times, and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). Also, the special figure holding lamp 85 is deleted, and the variable display holding number based on the winning at the first entrance 64 is numerically displayed on a part of the third symbol display device 81 or divided into four areas. May be displayed in a different form (for example, color or lighting pattern) by the number of times of holding. Further, when the number of holding times is displayed on the first symbol display device 37, the special figure holding lamp 85 may not be provided.

  Each time the sphere passes through the second entrance 67 (through gate), the second symbol display unit 83 alternates between the symbol “◯” and the symbol “X” as the display symbol (second symbol). The variable display to light is performed. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when the variable display on the second symbol display unit 83 stops at a predetermined symbol (“◯” symbol), the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is only for a predetermined time. It is configured to be in an open state so that the ball can easily enter the first entrance 64.

  The number of passes through the second entrance 67 (through gate) of the ball is held up to a maximum of 4 times, and the number of hold times is lit and displayed on the second symbol hold lamp 84. Note that the variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display unit 83 as in this embodiment, as well as the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol. Alternatively, a part of the display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the number of balls held for the second entrance 67 (through gate) is not limited to the maximum number of 4 times as in the case of the number of holds for the first entrance 64, and is 3 times or less. Alternatively, the number may be set to 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Moreover, it is good also as a structure which displays the holding | maintenance count of the ball | bowl about the 2nd entrance 67 using LED provided in the 1st symbol display apparatus 37. FIG. When displaying the number of times the ball is held for the second entrance 67 on the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81, the second symbol hold lamp 84 may not be provided.

  Below the variable display device unit 80, a first entrance 64 into which a sphere can enter is disposed. When a ball enters the first entrance 64, the first entrance switch 208a (see FIG. 5) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first entrance switch 208a is turned on. Then, the main control device 110 performs a lottery lottery, the first symbol stop symbol corresponding to the lottery result is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 (LED 37b), and the display of the first symbol display device 37 is displayed. A decorative display corresponding to the is displayed by the third symbol display device 81.

  The first entrance 64 is also one of the entrances through which 5 balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters the first entrance 64 and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters the general prize opening 63 are calculated. Although it is configured the same, different numbers may be used. For example, the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters the first entrance 64 may be 20.

  A variable winning device 65 is disposed below the first ball opening 64, and a horizontally-long rectangular specific winning port (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery in the main controller 110 is a big hit, after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) has elapsed, the LED 37b of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on so as to become a big hit stop symbol. At the same time, a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special gaming state, the special winning opening 65a that is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (in this embodiment, until 30 seconds elapse or 10 balls are won).

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed when a predetermined time elapses, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 16 times (16 rounds), for example. The state in which the opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state advantageous to the player, and the player is given a gaming value (game value) from a normal time (non-special gaming state). A lot of prize balls are paid out.

  Specifically, the variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally-long rectangular opening / closing plate covering the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid for opening / closing driving forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis (shown in FIG. 5). Part of the solenoid 209). The special winning opening 65a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball is easy to win the specific winning opening 65a. It operates to repeat the state and the state alternately.

  The special game state is not limited to the above-described form. When the game area is provided with a large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a, and the LED 37b of the first symbol display device 37 is lit in a manner corresponding to the jackpot, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, A special game in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning port 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball wins into the specific winning port 65a while the specific winning port 65a is opened. You may make it form as a state.

  Adhesive spaces K1 and K2 for adhering certificate stamps, identification labels, and the like are provided at the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13. It can be visually recognized through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball that has not entered any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a is guided through an out port 66 to a ball discharge path (not shown). A number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (instruments) such as a windmill are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110) and an effect control board (effect control device 117). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control apparatus 111), a firing control board (launching control apparatus 112), a power supply board (power supply apparatus 115), and a card unit connection board 116. Yes.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 and a dispensing unit 93 that form a protective cover. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as necessary.

  The main control device 110, the effect control device 117, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are accommodated.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover so that they cannot be opened by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). Consolidated). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to cover the box base and the box cover. This seal seal is made of a brittle material. If the seal is to be peeled off in order to open the substrate boxes 100, 102, or if the substrate boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are removed. Cut to the side. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal.

  The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 that is located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out a ball by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 5). ing. Balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished to the tank 130, and a required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated, for example, to eliminate ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball clogging in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 5). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 4, the display content displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is demonstrated. FIG. 4A and FIG. 4B are schematic diagrams for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81.

  As shown in FIG. 4A, the third symbol is composed of 10 kinds of main symbols composed of 10 kinds of character symbols corresponding to the numbers from “0” to “9”, and 1 formed smaller than this main symbol. It is composed of different types of sub-patterns (in this embodiment, shell picture patterns). These main symbols and sub symbols constitute a symbol row (virtual symbol reel) by arranging the main symbols in ascending or descending order of numbers and arranging the sub symbols between the main symbols.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result by the main control device 110 is a big hit, a variable display is performed in which the same main symbols are aligned and stopped, and after the variable display (that is, the same After the main symbols are aligned and stopped, the jackpot is configured to occur. When shifting to the high probability mode (probability variation mode) after the big hit, the variable display in which the main symbols to which odd numbers are added (corresponding to “high probability symbols”) stops together. On the other hand, when shifting to the normal mode after the big hit, the variable display is performed in which the main symbols to which the even numbers are added (corresponding to “normal symbols”) are stopped.

  In this embodiment, the variation direction of the symbol is the horizontal direction X, and in the variation in the horizontal direction (horizontal scrolling), each symbol row includes three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 of upper, middle, and lower. The third symbol is displayed in three stages of left, middle and right for each symbol row (Z1 to Z3). Accordingly, the third symbol display device 81 displays a total of nine third symbols of 3 rows × 3 columns. Here, the upper symbol row Z1 is arranged so that the numbers corresponding to the main symbol row appear in descending order, and the middle symbol row Z2 and the lower symbol row Z3 are arranged so that the numbers of the main symbol appear in ascending order. ing.

  Five effective lines are set on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 4A, five lines of a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a right rising line L4, and a left rising line L5 are set as effective lines.

  When a ball enters the first entrance 64 (wins) and a variation display is performed that scrolls in a predetermined variation direction (lateral direction X in this embodiment), the variation display is performed after a predetermined variation time. The upper symbol sequence Z1 → the lower symbol sequence Z3 → the middle symbol sequence Z2 are stopped in this order. At this time, if a combination of jackpot symbols (in this embodiment, the same main symbol combination) stops on one of the active lines, a jackpot is generated, and a jackpot video (a jackpot effect is produced during the jackpot game). ) Is displayed.

  In the present embodiment, the changing direction (scrolling direction) is the horizontal direction X, but the changing direction may be the vertical direction (that is, the direction orthogonal to the horizontal direction X). When the change direction is the vertical direction (vertical scroll), the effective line is the upper line (Z1 line in FIG. 4A), middle line (Z2 line in FIG. 4A), lower line ( A line Z3 in FIG. 4A), a right rising line L4, and a left rising line L5 may be used. In the case of vertical scrolling, for example, the variable display is stopped in the order of left symbol row L1 '→ right symbol row L3 → middle symbol row L2.

  Further, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to form an acquired ball number display area 81a in the upper right area of the screen of the third symbol display device 81, as shown in FIG. 4 (b). The acquired ball number display area 81a includes the number of award balls paid out from the pachinko machine 10 (hereinafter referred to as “the number of payout balls”) and the balls used in the game (that is, the front surface of the game board 13). This is an area for displaying the balance (difference) with the number of balls struck in). In the following, the balance between the number of paid-out balls and the balls used for the game is referred to as “number of acquired balls”.

  In the acquired ball number display area 81a, various acquired ball numbers are displayed at timings defined respectively. In the example shown in FIG. 4B, the total acquired number of balls 81a1 is displayed in the acquired number of balls display area 81a. In FIG. 4B, the display contents other than the acquired ball number display area 81a are omitted. As will be described in detail later, the total number of acquired balls 81a1 is the number of acquired balls during a series of advantageous periods (hereinafter, this acquired number of balls is referred to as “total number of acquired balls”). After the transition to the time reduction mode, the acquired ball number display area 81a is displayed at the timing when the first variation display is started.

  The “advantageous state” is a state advantageous to the player. In the present embodiment, the game state is a special game state (big hit) and the game mode is a high probability mode or a time reduction mode. It consists of. The “period of advantageous state” means the period from the start of the special gaming state that occurred in the normal mode to the end of the high probability mode or the time shortening mode according to the end condition defined by the number of executions of the variable display. It is a period in which one or more advantageous states occur continuously.

  In FIG. 4B, the total acquired ball number 81a1 is illustrated as the acquired ball number displayed in the acquired ball number display area 81a. However, as the acquired ball number displayed in the acquired ball number display area 81a, In addition to the total number of acquired balls 81 a 1, for example, the number of acquired balls in one jackpot period (hereinafter, this acquired number of balls is referred to as “the number of hit balls in the current jackpot”) or during a series of advantageous states In addition, the average value of the number of acquired balls in each jackpot (hereinafter referred to as “the average number of acquired balls in the jackpot”), each high probability mode and each time reduction mode that occurred during a series of advantageous states There is an average value of the number of acquired balls (hereinafter, this acquired number of balls will be referred to as “average number of acquired balls during probability variation”).

  The display of the acquired number of balls in the acquired number of balls display area 81a is an image of a transparent background in which the acquired number of balls to be displayed (total acquired number of balls 81a1, etc.) is displayed in the acquired number of balls display area 81a at the display timing. Is performed by superimposing the image on the image being displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  According to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the number of acquired balls such as the total acquired number of balls 81a1 is displayed in the acquired ball number display area 81a, so that the balance of balls in the game (that is, the number of acquired balls) Can be realized by the player. If the player is able to obtain a sufficient number of balls, he can increase the interest of the game he / she is using with the balls he / she has paid for, thereby satisfying the game. The degree can be increased.

  Generally, for gaming machines such as pachinko machines, it is always required to improve the interest of the game so that the satisfaction of the player can be increased. In response to this request, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as described above, the number of acquired balls such as the total number of acquired balls 81a1 is displayed in the acquired ball number display area 81a. Interest can be raised, and the player's satisfaction with the game can be increased.

  On the other hand, when compared with pachinko machines having the same specifications, the balance of balls (that is, the number of acquired balls) mainly varies depending on the degree of nail adjustment. Therefore, the numerical value of the number of acquired balls can be an index for the player to select a platform that is more advantageous to the player. For this reason, when the number of acquired balls displayed in the acquired ball number display area 81a is a value that is not very sufficient for the player, the pachinko machine 10 in the game is changed to another pachinko machine that is more advantageous to itself. It is also possible. As a result, the player can use the pachinko machine that he / she understands and selects, so that the player can play a satisfactory game.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing a configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The main control device 110 controls the operation of the entire pachinko machine 10, and sends various commands to sub-control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the effect control device 117, and controls the operation of the sub-control device. To do. Various commands transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device only in one direction. Note that a command indicating the state of the sub control device may be transmitted from the sub control device to the main control device 110.

  The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A RAM 203, counters C1 to C4, CS1 to CS3, and CINI1 to CINI2, which will be described later, and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 6, the reserved ball storage area, the counter buffer, the counters C1 to C4, CS1 to CS3, CINI1 to CINI2, and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described. . FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram showing an outline of each counter.

  The reserved ball storage area, the counter buffer, the counters C1 to C4, CS1 to CS3, CINI1 to CINI2, and the like are used for jackpot determination, display setting of the first symbol display device 37, and display of the second symbol display unit 83. It is used by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 to perform a lottery of the results.

  For the jackpot lottery or display setting of the first symbol display device 37, the first hit random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery, the first hit type symbol counter C2 used for the jackpot symbol selection, and the stop pattern selection counter C3, a first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the first random number counter C1, and variation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 used for variation pattern selection are used. The second symbol random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the second symbol display unit 83, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second symbol random number counter C4. Each time these counters are updated, 1 is added to the previous value and a loop counter that returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each of these counters C1 to C4, CS1 to CS3, and CINI1 to CINI2 is at an interval of 4 ms, which is an execution interval of the main process (see FIG. 9), or at an interval of 2 ms, which is an execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15). The updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer provided in a work area (not shown) of the RAM 203. When executing the various control programs, when the values of the counters C1 to C4, CS1 to CS3, and CINI1 to CINI2 are referred to, the values of the counters stored in the counter buffer are referred to. Is done.

  The reserved ball storage area is a memory for storing the values of the counters C1 to C3 in accordance with the winning timing when the ball wins (wins) the first entrance 64. In this reserved ball storage area, four reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) are stored so that the data (values of the counters C1 to C3) acquired at the ball winning timing can be stored up to four times. ) And one execution area referred to in the change start process (see FIG. 12).

  In each of the four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) in the holding ball storage area, an area for storing the value of the first random number counter C1 and the value of the first type counter C2 are stored. And an area for storing the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3. In the present embodiment, three areas in which the values of the counters C1 to C3 are stored are provided in each reserved area in one reserved ball storage area, but a plurality of reserved ball storage areas are provided. These three areas may be divided into a plurality of reserved ball storage areas and stored. For example, a part (one or two areas) of three areas for storing the values of the counters C1 to C3 is provided in one of the two reserved ball storage areas, and the remaining areas are provided. You may comprise so that it may provide in the other holding ball storage area.

  As described above, in the reserved ball storage area, data (values of the counters C1 to C3) acquired at the timing when the ball has won the first entrance 64 can be stored up to four times. In the case of storing the data of the times, the data in order from the area with the smaller area number (first to fourth) among the vacant areas of the four reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) Is memorized. That is, the data corresponding to the winnings that are older in time are stored in the reserved area having a smaller area number. Therefore, data corresponding to the oldest winning in terms of time is stored in the reserved first area.

  The execution area in the reserved ball storage area includes an area for storing the value of the first random number counter C1, an area for storing the value of the first hit type counter C2, and a value of the stop pattern selection counter C3. An area for storage is provided. In a variation process (see FIG. 10) described later, data (values of the counters C1 to C3) stored in the reserved first area of the reserved ball storage area are referred to after being shifted to the execution area. Based on this, the lottery result is determined. Then, the variable display and the stop display corresponding to the lottery result are performed on the first symbol display device 37 (LED 37b) or the like.

  Next, each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is configured so that, for example, 1 is added in order within a range of 0 to 738, and after reaching the maximum value (that is, 738), it returns to 0. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first per-random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 738), and executes timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 15). It is updated once every time and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 9).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the stored ball is stored in the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. The area is stored in the corresponding area in the empty reserved area having the smallest area number in the reserved ball storage area. In the present embodiment, the number of random numbers that are jackpots is the normal probability in the normal mode or the time shortening mode (when the jackpot probability is normal) and the high probability mode (when the jackpot probability is higher than normal). Two types of status) are set. There are two types of random numbers that are jackpots at normal probability (when the jackpot probability is normal), and the values are “373, 727”. On the other hand, there are 13 types of random numbers that are jackpots at a high probability (a state in which the jackpot probability is higher than usual), and the values are “59, 109, 163, 211, 263, 317, 367, 421, 479, 523. , 631, 683, 733 ". It should be noted that a table (not shown) that stores a random number value for determining whether or not a big hit is obtained from the value (random number value) of the first random number counter C1 is provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110.

  The first hit type counter C2 is a counter for determining the big hit type. In the present embodiment, the jackpot types determined by the first jackpot type counter C2 include jackpots that become a high probability mode after the jackpot end (probable variation jackpots) and jackpots that enter the time reduction mode after the jackpot end (normal jackpots). Yes, one of these two types of jackpot types is determined according to the value of the first hit type counter C2 obtained at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64.

  In the present embodiment, the first hit type counter C2 is configured so that 1 is sequentially added within a range of 0 to 4, and after reaching the maximum value (that is, 4), it returns to 0. The value of the first hit type counter C2 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interruption process in FIG. 15 described later), and at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. , Stored in the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 203, more specifically, the corresponding area in the empty reserved area with the smallest area number in the reserved ball storage area. In the present embodiment, the value of the random number that becomes the jackpot that becomes a high probability mode after the jackpot ends (probability jackpot) is “1, 2, 3”, and the jackpot that becomes the time reduction mode after the jackpot ends (normal jackpot) The value of the random number that becomes “0” is “0, 4”. A table that stores random values for determining whether the jackpot that becomes the high probability mode after the jackpot ends or the jackpot that becomes the time reduction mode after the jackpot ends, from the value (random number value) of the first hit type counter C2 (see FIG. (Not shown) is provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110.

  In the present embodiment, among the data (the values of the counters C1 to C3) acquired at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64, it is determined as “big hit” based on the value of the first random number counter C1. In addition, when it is determined based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 that “the jackpot which becomes the high probability mode after the jackpot is finished”, the jackpot becomes the “probable change jackpot”. On the other hand, when it is determined that “big hit” is based on the value of the first hit random number counter C1 and “hit is set to the time reduction mode after the big hit” is determined based on the value of the first hit type counter C2, The jackpot is a “normal jackpot”.

  Therefore, based on the value of the first per-random number counter C1 and the value of the first per-type counter C2, a display mode corresponding to two types of big hits (probability big hit or normal big hit), and one type of display corresponding to losing One of the three display modes in total with the mode is selected as the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37.

  Note that the “probability jackpot” in the present embodiment is a jackpot in which the game mode becomes the high probability mode after the jackpot with the maximum number of rounds of 16 rounds until a predetermined end condition is satisfied (16 round probability jackpot). Jackpot). In this embodiment, the end condition of the high probability mode is when a big hit (probable big hit or normal big hit) occurs next, or when a predetermined number of fluctuations (10000 fluctuations in this embodiment) has elapsed. It is said.

  In the high probability mode, the jackpot probability of the first symbol is set to a high probability (probability higher than the normal probability), and the hit probability of the second symbol is also a predetermined number of fluctuations (in this embodiment, 100 fluctuations). The interval is assumed to be higher than the normal probability. In the present embodiment, in the high probability mode, the hit probability of the second symbol is set to a high probability only for a predetermined number of fluctuations. However, the hit probability of the second symbol is set as the end condition of the high probability mode. You may comprise so that it may remain high probability until it is materialized. Further, in the present embodiment, the termination condition of the high probability mode is the case where the predetermined number of fluctuations has passed or the case where the next jackpot occurs, but it may be only the case where the next jackpot occurs.

  In addition, the “ordinary jackpot” in the present embodiment is a jackpot in which the game mode is set to the time reduction mode until a predetermined end condition is satisfied after the jackpot having the maximum number of rounds of 16 rounds (16 round normal mode). Jackpot). In this embodiment, the end condition of the time reduction mode is when a predetermined number of fluctuations (in this embodiment, 100 fluctuations) has passed, or when a big hit (probability big hit, normal big hit) occurs next. It is said.

  In the time shortening mode, the jackpot probability of the first symbol is a normal probability, but the hit probability of the second symbol is higher than the normal probability. In the present embodiment, the termination condition of the time reduction mode is set to the case where the predetermined number of fluctuations has passed or the case where the next big hit occurs, but the predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations) has passed. It is good only if you do.

  In the present embodiment, the maximum number of rounds of “probability jackpot” or “ordinary jackpot” is 16 rounds, but the maximum number of rounds is not limited to 16 rounds, but various values (for example, 7 rounds, 15 rounds, etc.) ). In this embodiment, the maximum number of rounds for “probable jackpot” and the maximum number of rounds for “normal jackpot” are both 16 rounds, but the maximum number of rounds is different for “probability jackpot” and “normal jackpot”. May be. For example, the maximum number of rounds for “probable jackpot” may be 16 rounds, and the maximum number of rounds for “normal jackpots” may be 7 rounds.

  The stop pattern selection counter C3 is, for example, incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 238, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 238). In the present embodiment, the stop pattern selection counter C3 selects the effect pattern displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and after reaching, the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol and stopped. “Rear out of front / rear” (for example, in the range of 0 to 8), and “Leach other than out of front / rear out of reach” (for example, in the range of 9 to 38) after the occurrence of reach, and the final stop symbol is stopped before and after the reach symbol Three stop patterns (a mode of a display result of dynamic display) are selected as “completely out” (for example, a range of 39 to 238) in which reach does not occur.

  The value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. More specifically, it is stored in the corresponding area in the empty reserved area with the smallest area number in the reserved ball storage area.

  Note that a table (not shown) referred to for selecting a stop pattern from the value (random value) of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. Selection is made based on this table and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3. Note that such a table is provided with a plurality of tables so that the range of values of the stop pattern selection counter C3 that can take one stop pattern is different. This is because the current state of the pachinko machine 10 is a high probability state (a state where the jackpot probability is higher than normal), a normal state (a state where the jackpot probability is normal), This is because the selection ratio of each stop pattern is changed according to the above.

  For example, in a high-probability state (a state where the jackpot probability is higher than normal), since the jackpot is likely to occur, the range of random number values corresponding to the stop pattern “completely out” is 10 so that the reach effect is not selected more than necessary. A table as wide as ˜238 is selected, and “completely out” is easily selected. In this table, the range of random values for “front / rear out of reach” is narrowed to 0-5, and the range of random values for “non-front / rear out of reach” is also narrowed to 6-9. It becomes difficult to select “reach other than miss”.

  In addition, in order to secure the time for entering the ball into the first entrance 64 if each random number value is not stored (held) in the reserved ball storage area in the normal state (the state where the jackpot probability is normal). A table having a narrow range of random values 51 to 238 corresponding to the stop pattern of “completely out” is selected, and it is difficult to select “completely out”. In this table, the range of random values of “front / rear out of reach” is 0 to 8, the range of random values of “reach other than back and forth out” is 9 to 50, and “reach other than back and forth out of reach” is easily selected. It has become. Therefore, in the normal state (the state where the jackpot probability is normal), it is possible to secure the time for entering the ball into the first entrance 64, so that the variable display by the third symbol display device 81 is easily performed continuously.

  Next, among the three variation type counters CS1 to CS3, the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 will be described. One variation type counter CS1 is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 198, for example, and reaches a maximum value (that is, 198) and then returns to 0. The other variation type counter CS2 Within the range of 0 to 240, 1 is added in order, and after reaching the maximum value (that is, 240), it returns to 0. In the following description, CS1 may be referred to as a “first variation type counter” and CS2 may be referred to as a “second variation type counter”.

  The first variation type counter CS1 is a counter used for selecting (selecting) a variation display (dynamic display) pattern (variation pattern) of the third symbol. The value of the first variation type counter CS1 is updated once every time a main process (see FIG. 9) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process.

  In the present embodiment, three types of variation patterns of normal variation, normal reach variation, and super reach variation are set as variation patterns that can be selected based on the value of the first variation type counter CS1. Each variation pattern selected based on the value of the first variation type counter CS1 is configured to have different production times (variation times).

  Among these fluctuation patterns, the “normal fluctuation” is a fluctuation pattern (that is, a deviation fluctuation) in which the display result of the loss appears without the reach display. In the present embodiment, “normal fluctuation” is configured as a fluctuation pattern having a fluctuation time of 11 seconds.

  “Normal reach variation” is a so-called normal reach variation pattern with reach display. In the present embodiment, “normal reach fluctuation” is configured as a fluctuation pattern having a fluctuation time of 20 seconds.

  “Super reach fluctuation” is a reach pattern in which a predetermined effect appears between the occurrence of reach and the stop of the final symbol. In the present embodiment, the “super reach variation” is configured as a variation pattern with a variation time of 40 seconds. In addition, as a predetermined effect that appears between the occurrence of reach and the stop of the final symbol in “super reach fluctuation”, a specific character appears, a specific background display, For example, the symbols may be changed in a specific manner (for example, the symbols may be enlarged or reduced, or the symbols may fluctuate and fluctuate).

  When selecting a variation pattern from the value (random number value) of the first variation type counter CS1, a first selection table (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 is selected and referenced. This first selection table includes a jackpot type (probability big hit or normal jackpot) determined by the value of the first hit type counter C2, and a stop symbol (completely missed, missed before and after reach) determined by the stop pattern selection counter C3. Or, each reach) is different in each first selection table, and the allocation of the range of the first variation type counter CS1 to the variation pattern is different. That is, the selection probability of the variation pattern differs for each first selection table.

  On the other hand, in the reach pattern (in this embodiment, normal reach or super reach), the second variation type counter CS2 is a variation pattern from when a symbol other than the final stop symbol stops and a reach occurs, to when the final stop symbol stops. It is a counter for determining the number. The value of the second variation type counter CS2 is updated once every time a main process (see FIG. 9) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process.

  In the following description, the number of fluctuation symbols determined based on the value of the second fluctuation type counter CS2 until the final stop symbol stops after occurrence of reach may be simply referred to as “fluctuation symbol number”. That is, in the present embodiment, the middle symbol sequence after the symbol (left symbol) of the left symbol column Z1 and the symbol (right symbol) of the right symbol column Z3 are stopped in the normal reach according to the value of the second variation type counter CS2. The number of change symbols until the Z2 symbol (medium symbol) stops is determined.

  A second selection table (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 is used to determine the number of fluctuation symbols from the value of the second fluctuation type counter CS2 (random number value) until the final stop symbol stops after the occurrence of reach. Is selected and referenced. The second selection table includes a jackpot type (probability big hit or normal jackpot) determined by the value of the first hit type counter C2, and a stop symbol (completely missed, missed before and after reach) determined by the stop pattern selection counter C3. Or the range of the second variation type counter CS2 is different in each variation pattern selection table with respect to the number of variation symbols until the final stop symbol stops after the occurrence of reach. . That is, according to the second selection table, the selection probability of the number of changing symbols until the final stop symbol stops after the reach occurs differs.

  The pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment selects the type of the fluctuation pattern based on the value of the first fluctuation type counter CS1, and based on the value of the second fluctuation type counter CS2, the last stop symbol is stopped after the reach occurs. Determine the number of fluctuating symbols. That is, a rough variation pattern such as the type of reach such as normal reach is determined by the first variation type counter CS1, and more detailed symbols such as normal reach A, normal reach B, etc. are determined by the second variation type counter CS2. A variation aspect is determined. That is, by combining the variation type counters CS1 and CS2, a wide variety of variation display can be easily realized.

  Next, the variation type counter CS3 will be described. For example, the value of the variation type counter CS3 is sequentially incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 162, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 162). In the following description, CS3 is referred to as a “third variation type counter”.

  The third variation type counter CS3 is a counter for selecting an effect pattern of the notice effect. In other words, the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment slides the fluctuating symbol (so-called “slip effect”) or returns the symbol (so-called “return effect”) in addition to the variation of the third symbol. Since a notice effect such as passing a notice character for notifying the occurrence of the reach effect can be performed, the effect pattern of the notice effect is selected by the variation type counter CS3. Specifically, in order to shorten the time required for the notice effect to add to the variable time (for example, +0.5 seconds, +1 second, +2 seconds, etc.) An effect pattern in which the variation time is subtracted (for example, −1 second) or an effect pattern in which the variation time is not added or subtracted is selected.

  That is, based on the value of the third variation type counter CS3, the effect time addition / subtraction value is determined. By adding or subtracting the effect time addition / subtraction value determined based on the value of the third variation type counter CS3 to the variation time determined based on the value of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2, the first symbol or the third symbol The variation time of the variation display (that is, the variation time from the start of the variation display of the symbol to the stop of the final stop symbol) is determined. Therefore, in addition to the variation type counters CS1 and CS2, the variation display can be further diversified by combining the variation type counter CS3.

  As in the case of the stop pattern selection counter C3 described above, the variation type counter CS3 also has a different range of effect patterns for the notice effect selected for the value of the variation type counter CS3 (random value). A plurality of tables are provided. That is, whether the current state of the pachinko machine 10 is a high probability state (a state where the jackpot probability is higher than normal), a normal state (a state where the jackpot probability is normal), a special figure holding ball number N, Depending on the table, etc., tables with different selection ratios of the production patterns are provided. Such a table (not shown) is provided in the ROM 202 similarly to the above-described variation type counters CS1 and CS2.

  The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 250, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 250). For example, in this embodiment, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 is periodically updated every timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15), and the second entrance 67 (through gate) on either the left or right side of the ball. Acquired when it is detected that the image has passed. There are 149 types of random numbers to be selected, and the range is “5 to 153”. Note that a table (not shown) that stores a random number value for determining whether or not to win from the value of the second random number counter C4 (random number value) is provided in the ROM 202.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second per-random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 250), and once every timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15). In addition to being updated, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 9).

  Returning again to FIG. The RAM 203 also has a probability changing flag 203a, a time reduction flag 203b, and a launch permission flag 203c.

  Both the probability changing flag 203a and the hour / short flag 203b are flags for indicating the game mode after the big hit. Specifically, when the probability change flag 203a is set to on (that is, “1”), the game mode after the jackpot is the high probability mode (probability change mode), or in the high probability mode. If the game mode is set to off (that is, “0”), the game mode is not the high probability mode. The probability variation flag 203a is set to ON when a probability variation jackpot is selected in the jackpot lottery performed in response to a winning at the first entrance 64. After that, when the end condition for the high probability mode is satisfied, the probability changing flag 203a is switched from on to off.

  In this embodiment, the probability variation flag 203a is set to ON at the timing when the jackpot game corresponding to the probability variation jackpot ends after the probability variation jackpot is selected in the jackpot lottery. Further, in the present embodiment, the end condition of the high probability mode is that when the number of executions of the variable display performed in the high probability mode reaches a predetermined number (10000 in the present embodiment) or in the high probability mode. In the jackpot lottery, the jackpot is selected, and the probability changing flag 203a is switched from on to off at the timing when the corresponding variable display ends when these end conditions are satisfied. In other words, in this embodiment, the probability variation flag 203a is switched from ON to OFF at the timing when the variation display corresponding to the normal jackpot ends when the normal jackpot is selected in the jackpot lottery in the high probability mode. When the number of changes (the number of executions of change display) reaches a predetermined number, the change display is switched from on to off at the timing when the change display ends.

  On the other hand, when the hour / short flag 203b is set to ON (that is, “1”), it indicates that the game mode after the jackpot is the time reduction mode or the time reduction mode. When set to off (that is, “0”), it indicates that the game mode is not the time reduction mode. The hour / short flag 203b is set to ON when a normal jackpot is selected in the jackpot lottery performed in response to a winning at the first entrance 64. Then, when the termination condition for the time reduction mode is satisfied after that, the hour / middle flag 203b is switched from on to off.

  In this embodiment, the hour / short flag 203b is set to ON at the timing when the jackpot game corresponding to the normal jackpot ends after the normal jackpot is selected in the jackpot lottery. In the present embodiment, the condition for ending the time reduction mode is whether the number of fluctuations in the time reduction mode (100 in the present embodiment) has been reached, or whether the jackpot is selected in the jackpot lottery during the time reduction mode. The short / middle flag 203b is switched from on to off at the timing when the corresponding variable display ends when these end conditions are satisfied. In other words, in the present embodiment, the time / short flag 203b is switched from ON to OFF at the timing when the variation display corresponding to the probability variation jackpot ends when the probability variation jackpot is selected in the jackpot lottery in the time reduction mode. When the number of fluctuations reaches a predetermined number, it is switched from on to off at the timing when the fluctuation display ends.

  The launch permission flag 203c is a flag indicating whether or not the launch of the ball is permitted. Specifically, when the launch permission flag 203c is set to on (ie, “1”), it indicates that the launch of the ball is permitted, and is set to off (ie, “0”). Indicates that the ball is not allowed to fire. The main control device 110 (MPU 201) is set at predetermined intervals (in this embodiment, every 0.6 seconds) while the emission permission flag 203c is set to ON (that is, while the emission of the sphere is permitted). The sphere is instructed to be emitted by outputting a firing control signal (firing pulse) and a ball feed control signal to the firing control device 112. Further, although details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, by outputting the firing control signal also to the effect control device 117, the number of balls that the effect control device 117 (MPU 271) has fired can be grasped. It is configured.

  The firing permission flag 203c is set to ON when the firing permission signal from the payout control device 111 rises from low to high. On the other hand, the firing permission flag 203c is set off when the firing permission signal falls from high to low. Although the details will be described later, the launch permission signal is generated when the player rotates the operation handle 51 clockwise without operating the stop switch 51b (that is, the player operates the operation handle 51 with the intention of launching the ball). (In the case of a rotation operation), it goes high, and goes low when the player releases the operation handle 51 or operates the stop switch 51b. Therefore, the launch permission flag 203c is set to ON when the player rotates the operation handle 51 with the intention of launching the ball, and is turned OFF when the player releases the operation handle 51 or operates the stop switch 51b. Is set.

  Note that the probability changing flag 203a, the time reduction flag 203b, and the firing permission flag 203c are all initialized to OFF each time the RAM 203 is cleared by an operation of the RAM erase switch 122 or the like.

  In addition to the counters and flags described above, the RAM 203 stores a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, I / O And a work area (work area) in which values such as are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to hold (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up.

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by the main process (see FIG. 9), and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in a startup process (see FIG. 8) when the power is turned on. Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input immediately, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 18) as a process at the time of a power failure is immediately executed, and information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 constituted by an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 includes a payout control device 111, a launch control device 112, an effect control device 117, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 82, a second symbol hold lamp 84, 1 entrance switch 208a, various switches 208 including a switch group or a sensor group (not shown), a large opening solenoid for opening / closing the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a, a solenoid for driving an electric accessory, etc. Is connected to a solenoid 209.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  Similarly to the RAM 203 of the main controller 110, the RAM 213 stores a stack area for storing the contents of internal registers of the MPU 211, a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 211, various flags and counters, I / O And a work area (work area) in which values such as O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the power failure signal SG1 is also input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed, and information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 213. Note that the NMI interrupt process executed by the payout control apparatus 111 is the same process as the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 18) executed by the main control apparatus 110.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110 and the payout motor 216 are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball that has been paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  Also, the payout control device 111 has a signal conversion circuit 241. The signal conversion circuit 241 is a circuit that outputs a firing permission signal based on inputs from the touch sensor 51 a and the stop switch 51 b of the operation handle 51. The signal conversion circuit 241 mainly includes an AND circuit that is a logic circuit, and sets the firing permission signal to high only when the touch sensor 51a is on and the stop switch 51b is off (that is, firing permission). Output a signal). On the other hand, if the touch sensor 51a or the stop switch 51b does not satisfy the above condition, the firing permission signal becomes low (that is, the firing permission signal is not output).

  The firing control device 112 rotates the operation handle 51 when a firing control signal (a firing pulse) and a ball feed control signal are input from the main control device 110 (that is, when a ball firing instruction is given). The ball launching unit 112a is controlled so that the ball is launched with the launch strength according to the amount.

  Specifically, when receiving a ball feed control signal from the main controller 110, the launch control device 112 supplies a voltage having a predetermined magnitude to a ball feed solenoid (not shown) of the ball launch unit 112a. As a result, the ball feed solenoid feeds one ball to the launch position. In addition, when the launch control device 112 receives a launch control signal (launch pulse) from the main control device 110, the launch control device 112 supplies a voltage to a launch solenoid (not shown) of the ball launch unit 112a. At this time, the magnitude of the voltage applied to the firing solenoid is set according to the resistance value of the variable resistor 51c of the operation handle 51. Thereby, the launch solenoid strikes the ball at the launch position on the front surface of the game board 13 with a strength corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 (fires the ball).

  Here, as described above, the main controller 110 detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 by the touch sensor 51a, and has a stop switch (stop switch) 51b for stopping the launch of the ball. The fire control device 112 is instructed to fire a ball on the condition that it is not operated. Therefore, the launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when the above condition is satisfied.

  The effect control device 117 sets the sound output in the sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, sets the number of lamps to be turned on in the special figure holding lamp 85, and turns on the lamps in the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34 In addition, it controls the setting of turning off and on, the variable display of the third symbol on the third symbol display device (LCD) 81 and the jackpot effect.

  The effect control device 117 includes an MPU 271, an image controller 274, a character ROM 275, a video RAM 276, an input / output port 277, an output port 278, and bus lines 279 and 280.

  An input / output port 277 is connected to the MPU 271 which is an arithmetic unit via a bus line 279 including an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 277 is connected to the main controller 110, the image controller 274, the audio output device 226, the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34, the special figure holding lamp 85, and the frame button 22. ing.

  As described above, the frame button 22 is used to change the effect pattern of the variable display (variable effect) displayed on the third symbol display device 81, or to change the effect content during the reach effect. This is a button operated (pressed) by. The frame button 22 outputs a low signal in a non-operation state (a state where the frame button 22 is not pressed), and outputs a high signal in an operation state (a state where the frame button 22 is pressed).

  A character ROM 275 and a video RAM 276 are connected to the image controller 274, and an output port 278 is connected via a bus line 280. A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 278. Note that the pachinko machine 10 is a different model that has the same symbol configuration displayed on the third symbol display device 81, even if it is a different model that has different winning probabilities and the number of prize balls that are paid out in one jackpot. Therefore, the production control device 117 is made into a common part to reduce the cost.

  In the present embodiment, the effect control device 117 collectively performs control of sound output, control of turning on and off various lamps, and control of variable display of the third symbol on the third symbol display device (LCD) 81. However, it may be configured such that various controls are shared by a plurality of control devices. For example, control of voice output and control of lighting and extinguishing of various lamps are performed by a dedicated control device (voice lamp control device), and control of variable display of the third symbol on the third symbol display device (LCD) 81 is performed. A dedicated control device (display control device) may be used.

  The MPU 271 is an arithmetic unit as a one-chip microcomputer. The MPU 271 includes a ROM 272 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 271 and fixed value data, and various circuits such as a RAM 273 used as a work memory.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 7, the structure of RAM273 of the production | presentation control apparatus 117 is demonstrated. FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 273 of the effect control device 117. As shown in FIG. 7, in the RAM 273, a big hit flag 273a, a big hit number counter 273b, a probability changing flag 273c, a time changing flag 273d, a probability changing time short start flag 273e, and a probability changing time short number counter 273f are advantageous. State-acquired ball number memory 273g, advantageous state big hit medium acquired ball number memory 273h, advantageous state probability change time short and medium acquired ball number memory 273i, big hit medium hit ball number counter 273j, jackpot medium hitting ball number memory 273k, Launched ball number previous value memory 273l, current jackpot medium shot ball memory 273m, paid-out ball number previous value memory 273n, current jackpot medium paid-out ball number memory 273o, probability variation short and medium firing ball number counter 273p, probability variation time short Medium payout ball number memory 273q, advantageous state end command reception flag 273r, And or end display flag 273S, has a variation start display flag 273T, a probability variation time reduction at the end display flag 273U, a first display flag 273V, and a second display flag 273W.

  The jackpot flag 273a is a flag indicating whether or not the jackpot is being hit (during jackpot game). Specifically, when the big hit flag 273a is set to on (that is, “1”), it indicates that the big hit is being set, and when it is set to off (that is, “0”), Indicates that it is not a big hit. The jackpot flag 273a is set to ON when the effect control device 117 receives a jackpot start command indicating that the jackpot game is started from the main controller 110. Thereafter, when the effect control device 117 receives a jackpot end command indicating that the jackpot game is to be ended from the main control device 110, the jackpot flag 273a is set off.

  The jackpot count counter 273b is a series of advantageous state periods (that is, a period from the start of the special gaming state generated in the normal mode to the end of the high probability mode or the time shortening mode by the end condition defined by the number of fluctuations). It is a counter for counting the number of times that the jackpot has occurred. The jackpot counter 273b is incremented by one each time the effect control device 117 receives a jackpot end command from the main controller 110. Every time the production control device 117 receives from the main control device 110 an advantageous state end command indicating that the high probability mode or the time reduction mode is ended by the end condition defined by the number of fluctuations, the average winning ball for the big hit After calculating the number, the jackpot counter 273b is cleared to zero.

  Both the probability changing flag 273c and the hour / short flag 273d are flags for indicating the game mode after the big hit. Specifically, when the probability change flag 273c is set to ON (that is, “1”), it indicates that the game mode after the big hit is a high probability mode (probability change mode), and OFF (that is, “0”). ) Is set, it indicates that the game mode is not the high probability mode. The probability change flag 273c is set to ON when the production control device 117 receives a probability change start command output at a timing when the main control device 110 is set to the high probability mode. Then, when the effect control device 117 receives a probability change end command output from the main control device 110 at the timing of ending the high probability mode, the probability change flag 273c is set to OFF.

  On the other hand, when the hour / short flag 273d is set to ON (that is, “1”), it indicates that the game mode after the big hit is the time reduction mode (time reduction mode), and is OFF (that is, “0”). Is set to indicate that the game mode is not the time reduction mode. The short time flag 273d is set to ON when the production control device 117 receives a short time start command output at a timing when the main control device 110 is set to the time reduction mode. Then, when the effect control device 117 receives a time-short end command output from the main control device 110 at a timing to end the time reduction mode, the time-short / medium flag 273d is set to OFF.

  The probability change short start flag 273e is a flag for indicating a period during which the variable display has not been executed yet after the game mode has shifted to the high probability mode or the time reduction mode. This probability change time short start flag 273e is set to ON (ie, “1”) when the effect control device 117 receives a probability change start command or a time short start command from the main control device 110. Thereafter, the probability change short start flag 273e is set to off (that is, “0”) when the effect control device 117 receives the change start command from the main control device 110.

  The short time counter 273f for the probability change time is a counter for counting the number of times that the game mode is set to the high probability mode or the time reduction mode during a series of advantageous states. Each time the effect control device 117 receives a probability change end command or a time-short end command from the main control device 110, it is incremented by one to the probability change time count counter 273f. Then, every time the effect control device 117 receives the advantageous state end command from the main control device 110, after calculating the average number of balls acquired at the time of probability variation, the probability variation time count counter 273f is cleared to zero.

  The number-of-obtained balls memory 273g during the advantageous state is terminated by a termination condition defined by the number of times the high probability mode or the time shortening mode is started from the start of the special gaming state generated in the normal mode. It is a memory for storing the number of acquired balls (that is, the balance of the number of paid-out balls and the balls used for the game) in the period up to. In the advantageous state acquired ball number memory 273g, in the advantageous state (that is, the state in which the big hit medium flag 273a, the probability changing flag 273c, or the short-time medium flag 273d is set to ON), the effect control device 117 receives the firing control signal. Is subtracted one by one every time is received from the main controller 110. In addition, in the advantageous state, the acquired number-of-balls memory 273g is incremented with the number of payout balls indicated by the received prize ball command every time the effect control device 117 receives the prize ball command from the main control device 110 in the advantageous state. . Then, the advantageous state acquired number-of-balls memory 273g displays the total number of acquired balls (total number) displayed in the acquired number-of-successes display area 81a when the production control device 117 receives the advantageous state end command from the main control unit 110. The number of acquired balls 81a1 (see FIG. 4) is cleared to zero.

  The advantaged state jackpot medium acquired ball number memory 273h is a memory for storing the number of acquired balls limited to the jackpot during a series of advantageous state periods. Every time the effect control device 117 receives the firing control signal from the main control device 110 in the state where the big hit / medium flag 273a is set to ON, it is subtracted by one from the advantageous state big hit / medium acquired ball number memory 273h. In addition, each time the effect control device 117 receives a prize ball command from the main control device 110 in the state where the big hit flag 273a is set to ON in the advantageous state big hit medium winning ball number memory 273h, the received award is received. The number of payout balls indicated by the ball command is added. Then, the advantage-hit / hit-acquired ball number memory 273h is a jackpot / medium average-hit ball displayed in the obtained-hit number display area 81a when the production control device 117 receives an advantageous state end command from the main controller 110. Cleared to zero when the number is deleted.

  The advantageous state probability changing time short and medium acquired ball number memory 273i is a memory for storing the acquired number of balls only during the high probability mode or the time shortening mode during a series of advantageous state periods. Each time the effect control device 117 receives the firing control signal from the main control device 110 in the state where the probability changing flag 273c or the hour / short flag 273d is set to ON in the advantageous state probability changing time short and medium acquired ball number memory 273i. One is subtracted. Further, the effect control device 117 receives a prize ball command from the main control device 110 in the state where the probability change flag 273b or the hour / short flag 273d is set to ON in the advantageous state probability change time medium / short time baseball acquisition memory 273i. Each time, the number of payout balls indicated by the received prize ball command is added. Then, the advantageous state probability changing time medium and short number of acquired balls number memory 273i, when the production control device 117 receives the advantageous state end command from the main control device 110, the probability changing time short and medium average displayed in the acquired number of balls display area 81a. Cleared to zero when the number of acquired balls is cleared.

  The jackpot medium firing ball counter 273j is a counter for counting the total number of balls fired from the ball launching unit 112a during jackpot after the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. Each time the effect control device 117 receives a firing control signal (firing pulse) from the main control device 110 in a state where the big hit / medium flag 273a is set to ON, it is incremented by one. The

  The jackpot medium payout ball number memory 273k stores the number of payout balls since the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on (that is, the number of payout balls paid out), which is limited to the big hit. It is a memory to do. Each time the effect control device 117 receives a prize ball command from the main control device 110 with the jackpot flag 273a set to ON, the received prize ball command indicates in the jackpot / medium payout ball number memory 273k. The number of balls to be paid out is added.

  The number-of-fired ball previous value memory 273l is a memory for storing the value of the big hit middle shot ball number counter 273j at the end of the big hit. Each time the effect control device 117 receives a big hit end command from the main control device 110, the value of the big hit middle shot ball number counter 273j is stored in the previous shot number memory 273l.

  The jackpot medium hit ball number memory 273m is a memory for storing the number of balls shot from the ball launch unit 112a during the single jackpot period generated this time. Each time the effect control device 117 receives a jackpot end command from the main control device 110, the jackpot / medium shot ball memory 273m has a jackpot / medium shot ball counter before updating the previous shot ball number memory 273l. A value obtained by subtracting the value of the previous shot number memory 273l from the value of 273j is stored.

  The previous payout ball number memory 273n is a memory for storing the value of the big hit medium payout ball number memory 273k at the end of the big hit. Each time the effect control device 117 receives a jackpot end command from the main control device 110, the value in the jackpot medium payout ball number memory 273k at that time is stored in the payout ball count previous value memory 273n.

  The current jackpot payout ball memory 273o is a memory for storing the number of payout balls during the single jackpot that occurred this time. In this jackpot / medium payout ball number memory 273o, every time the effect control device 117 receives a jackpot end command from the main control device 110, the jackpot / medium payout ball number memory 273n is updated before updating the payout ball number previous value memory 273n. A value obtained by subtracting the value of the previous value memory 273n of the payout ball number from the value of 273k is stored.

  The probability variation time short and medium firing ball number counter 273p indicates the number of balls launched from the ball launch unit 112a in the high probability mode (probability variation mode) or in the time reduction mode (time reduction mode) after the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. It is a counter for counting the total number. Each time when the production control device 117 receives a firing control signal from the main control device 110 with the probability changing flag 273c or the time shortening flag 273d set to ON, the probability changing short / medium shot ball counter 273p is set to one each. Is added.

  The probability change short / medium payout ball memory 273q is a payout ball number after the power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10, and is a memory for storing the payout ball number only in the high probability mode or the time reduction mode. It is. Each time the effect control device 117 receives a prize ball command from the main control device 110 with the probability changing flag 273c or the hour / short flag 273d set to ON in the probability changing short / medium payout ball number memory 273q, it is received. The number of payout balls indicated by the winning ball command is added.

  The advantageous state end command reception flag 273r is a flag for indicating that the effect control device 117 has received the advantageous state end command from the main control device 110. This advantageous state end command reception flag 273r is set to ON (ie, “1”) when the effect control device 117 receives an advantageous state end command from the main control device 110. Thereafter, the advantageous state end command 273r is cleared to zero when the process executed upon reception of the advantageous state end command, specifically, the elimination of the acquired number of balls displayed in the acquired number of balls display area 81a is executed. Is done.

  The jackpot end display flag 273s displays a predetermined number of acquired balls (in the present embodiment, the number of hits during the jackpot and the total number of acquired balls) in the acquired number of balls display area 81a of the third symbol display device 81 after the jackpot ends. It is a flag indicating whether or not it is a timing to display. Specifically, when the jackpot end display flag 273s is set to on (that is, “1”), it indicates that it is the display timing of the number of acquired balls after the jackpot ends, and is off (that is, “0”). ")" Indicates that it is not the timing. In the present embodiment, it is configured to display the number of currently acquired big hits in the acquired number of balls display area 81a at the timing when each big hit is completed. Therefore, the jackpot end display flag 273s is a value necessary for the calculation of the number of hit balls during this jackpot when the production control device 117 receives a jackpot end command from the main control device 110 (the number of hit balls during this jackpot, this time The number is set to ON on condition that the number of balls in the jackpot) is obtained. Thereafter, when the current number of winning balls and the total number of acquired balls are displayed in the acquired number of balls display area 81a, the jackpot end display flag 273s is set to OFF.

  The change start display flag 273t is a flag indicating whether or not it is the timing for displaying the total number of acquired balls (the number of acquired balls in a series of advantageous state periods) in the acquired ball number display area 81a with the start of variable display It is. When the change start display flag 273t is set to ON (that is, “1”), it is the timing to display the total acquired number of balls in the acquired number of balls display area 81a with the start of the change display. If it is set to off (that is, “0”), it indicates that it is not the timing. In the present embodiment, after the jackpot is over, the game mode is shifted to the high probability mode or the time reduction mode, and the total number of acquired balls is displayed in the acquired ball number display area 81a at the timing when the first variation display is started. It is configured as follows. Therefore, the change start time display flag 273t is set to ON when the effect control device 117 receives the change start command from the main control device 110, on condition that the probability change time short start flag 273e is set to ON. . Thereafter, when the total number of acquired balls is displayed in the acquired ball number display area 81a, the change start display flag 273r is set to OFF.

  The probability change time end display flag 273u is a predetermined number of acquired balls (in this embodiment, the total number of acquired balls) when the high probability mode or the time shortening mode ends and a series of advantageous period ends. This is a flag indicating whether or not it is time to display the jackpot average acquired number of balls and the average number of acquired balls during the probability variation time period in the acquired number of balls display area 81a. When the probability change short end display flag 273u is set to ON (that is, “1”), it indicates that it is the timing to display these acquired ball numbers in the acquired ball number display area 81a, and OFF (that is, "0") indicates that it is not the timing. Probability change short end display flag 273u is provided on condition that advantageous state end command reception flag 273r is set to ON when production control device 117 receives a probability change end command or a time reduction end command from main control device 110. Set to on. Thereafter, when the total number of acquired balls, the average number of acquired balls in the jackpot, and the average number of acquired balls in the short time in probability change are displayed in the acquired number of balls display area 81a, the display flag 273u in the probability change time short end is set to OFF. The

  The first display flag 273v is a flag for indicating that the total acquired number of balls displayed in the acquired number of balls display area 81a with the start of the variable display is being displayed. When the first display flag 273v is set to on (ie, “1”), it indicates that the total number of acquired balls is being displayed, and is set to off (ie, “0”). In the case, it indicates that it is outside the display period. In this embodiment, the total number of acquired balls displayed at the start of the first fluctuation in the high probability mode or the time shortening mode is continued until the series of advantageous states including the high probability mode or the time shortening mode ends. Displayed. Therefore, the first display flag 273v is set to ON with the first fluctuation start in the high probability mode or the time reduction mode. After that, in the state where the effect control device 117 has received the advantageous state end command from the main control means (that is, the advantageous state end command reception flag 273r is set to ON), the probability change end command or the short time end command is main controlled. When received from the device 110, the first display flag 273v is set to OFF.

  The second display flag 273w is a predetermined acquired number of balls displayed in the acquired number of balls display area 81a at the end of a series of advantageous state periods (in the present embodiment, the total number of acquired balls, the average winning ball in jackpots) Number and the average number of acquired balls during the probability variation time period). When the second display flag 273w is set to on (that is, “1”), it indicates that the acquired number of balls is being displayed, and is set to off (that is, “0”). In the case, it indicates that it is outside the display period. The second display flag 273w is set to ON when the acquired number of balls is displayed in the acquired number of balls display area 81a at the end of a series of advantageous state periods. After that, when a predetermined erasing timing (for example, a predetermined time after the display is started, a start timing of the next variable display, a stop display with a stop symbol indicating a big hit, etc.) arrives, the second display The middle flag 273w is set to off.

  The big hit flag 273a, the probability change flag 273c, the short time flag 273d, the probability change short start flag 273e, the advantageous state end command reception flag 273r, the big hit end display flag 273s, the change start time display flag 273t, and the probability change short time end display The flag 273u, the first displaying flag 273v, and the second displaying flag 273w are all initialized to OFF each time the RAM 273 is initialized, such as when the power is turned on.

  Also, the jackpot count counter 273b, the probability change time count counter 273f, the advantageous state earned ball number memory 273g, the advantage state jackpot medium earned ball number memory 273h, the advantage state probability change time short and medium earned ball number memory 273i, and the big hit medium shot ball counter 273j , Jackpot medium payout ball number memory 273k, previous shot number of ball shot memory 273l, current jackpot medium shot ball number memory 273m, payout ball number previous value memory 273n, current jackpot medium payout ball number memory 273o, short-term shot ball counter during probability change Both the 273p and the probability change short / medium paying ball number memory 273q are initialized and set to zero (zero clear) every time the RAM 273 is initialized, such as when the power is turned on.

  Returning again to FIG. The RAM 273 stores the contents of the internal register of the MPU 271 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 271 and the work area (work area for storing various flags and counters, I / O values, etc. Area). Further, the RAM 273 includes various memories, flags, counters, and the like.

  The image controller 274 adjusts the timing of the character ROM 275, the video RAM 276, the input / output port 277, and the output port 278 to intervene in reading and writing data, and reads the display data stored in the video RAM 276 at a predetermined timing. It is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The character ROM 275 is a memory that stores data for presentation such as symbols (background symbols, third symbols, and decorative symbols) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a compressed form. The character ROM 275 stores, for example, various data for effects used for variable display (variable effects) and jackpot effects, a character pattern of the third symbol, a background symbol, a notice character symbol, and the like. Various types of data for presentation correspond to data (variation display data) used for each variation display of normal variation (out-of-range variation), normal reach variation, and the like.

  The character ROM 275 stores the data for presentation as described above in a compressed state in order to reduce the amount of data to be stored. In the present embodiment, the production data is composed of approximately 1024 Mbytes, and the approximately 1024 Mbytes of data is compressed to approximately 768 Mbytes and stored in the character ROM 275. Only the necessary presentation data compressed and stored in the character ROM 275 is read out and decompressed, and then written in a predetermined area of the video RAM 276.

  The video RAM 276 is a memory for storing effect data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a decompressed state (a state where it can be used immediately). The video RAM 276 has a variable display data storage area (not shown). This variable display data storage area (not shown) is a memory for storing data for performing variable display (variable effect) and jackpot effect in the third symbol display device 81, and each effect is displayed in the third symbol display device 81. When started, an image corresponding to the data stored in the variable effect data storage area is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to time.

  The various data is read from the character ROM 275 and stored in the variable effect data storage area because the processing speed of the RAM is generally higher than that of the ROM. For example, when the presentation data is read from the character ROM 275 and displayed on the third symbol display device (LCD) 81, if the amount of data to be read is large, it takes time to read, and smooth display is not possible or clear. This is because the display may not be possible. This is also because the processing of the display data (for example, changing the size of the decorative design or changing the color of the background design) is easier when stored in the RAM.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And a switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in the voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and drives various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, the 5 volt voltage, and the backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 as necessary voltages.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 18), store the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 and the RAM 213, and complete it.

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 clear the respective backup data and the payout control device 111 for clearing the backup data. A payout initialization command is transmitted to the payout control device 111.

  Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the pachinko machine 10 having the above configuration will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 8 to 18. The processing of the MPU 201 includes a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the startup process, and a timer interrupt process that is periodically started (in a 2 ms cycle in this embodiment). And activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal, and are roughly divided into NMI interrupt processing.

  First, referring to FIG. 8, a startup process when the main controller 110 is turned on will be described. FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing start-up processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. This start-up process is activated by a reset at power-on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S101). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in advance in the stack pointer and waits for the sub-side control device (peripheral control devices such as the effect control device 117 and the payout control device 111) to be operable. Therefore, a wait process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed (S102). Next, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S103).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S104). If it is turned on (S104: Yes), the process proceeds to S111. On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S104: No), it is further determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S105), and if not stored (S105: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown has not been completed normally, the process proceeds to S111 also in this case.

  If power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S105: Yes), a RAM determination value is calculated (S106). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S107: No), that is, the calculated RAM determination is performed. If the value does not match the RAM determination value stored when the power is shut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and the process moves to S111 even in such a case. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203, as will be described later in the processing of S213 in FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S111, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 as a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S111). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and enters a state in which game ball payout control can be started. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S112, S113) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall starts business, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S112, S113) is executed. Similarly, initialization processing (S112, S113) of the RAM 203 is executed even when the information on occurrence of power interruption is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the RAM initialization process (S112, S113), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S112), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S113). After the initialization process of the RAM 203 (S112, S113), the process proceeds to S110.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S104: No), the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored (S105: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value etc.) is normal ( S107: Yes), the information on the occurrence of power interruption is cleared while the backed up data is held in the RAM 203 (S108). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state at the time of driving power interruption is transmitted (S109), and the process proceeds to S110. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213. In the process of S110, the interruption is permitted and the process proceeds to a main process described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 9, the main process executed after the startup process described above will be described. FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, each process of S201 to S206 is executed as a periodic process with a period of 4 ms, and the counter update process of S209 and S210 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main process, first, output data such as a command updated in the previous process is transmitted (output) to the hall computer 600 via each sub-side control device (peripheral control device) or the external output terminal board 260. (S201). By this external output process (S201), for example, the presence / absence of winning detection information detected by the switch reading process of S501 (see FIG. 15) is determined. If there is winning detection information, the payout control device 111 and the effect control device 117 , A winning ball command corresponding to the number of winning balls (the number of paying balls) according to the winning detection information is set and transmitted. In addition, by the external output process (S201), a variation pattern command, a type command, a stop command, an effect time addition / subtraction command, and the like necessary for the third symbol display by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the effect control device 117. When the ball is to be launched, the ball feed control signal is transmitted to the launch control device 112 and the launch control signal is transmitted to the launch control device 112 and the effect control device 117 by external output processing (S201). .

  After the process of S201, each value of the variation type counters CS1, CS2, CS3 is updated (S202). Specifically, 1 is added to the variation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3, and when the counter values reach the maximum value (198, 240, 162 in this embodiment), they are cleared to 0, respectively. Then, the update values of the variation type counters CS 1, CS 2 and CS 3 are stored in the corresponding area in the counter buffer in the RAM 203.

  When the update of the variation type counters CS1, CS2 and CS3 is completed, the winning ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S203), and the process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37 is performed. A variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol and the like by the three symbol display device 81 is executed (S204). Details of the variation process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the end of the variation process, the jackpot process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a of the variable winning device 65 is executed in the case of the jackpot state (S205). Specifically, the specific prize opening 65a is opened for each round of the big hit state, and then a predetermined time (30 seconds in the present embodiment) elapses or a predetermined number (this implementation) is given to the special prize opening 65a. In the embodiment, when 10 balls are entered, the process of closing the specific winning opening 65a is repeatedly executed by a predetermined number of rounds (16 rounds in the present embodiment). Details of the jackpot process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, a display control process of the second symbol (for example, the symbol “◯” or “x”) by the second symbol display device 82 is executed (S206). Briefly, on the condition that the ball has passed through the second entrance (through gate) 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired at the timing of the passage, and the second symbol display device 82 is obtained. In the display unit 83, the second symbol variation display is performed. Then, the lottery of the second symbol is performed based on the value of the second random number counter C4. When the winning state of the second symbol is reached, the electric accessory associated with the first entrance 64 is released for a predetermined time.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S207). If the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S207: No), a power failure signal is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. SG1 is not output and the power supply is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the previous main process (S208). If the predetermined time has already passed (S208: Yes), the process proceeds to S201, and the processes after S201 described above are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed since the start of the previous main process (S208: No), the first time is reached until the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the next main process execution timing. The updating of the initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 is repeatedly executed (S209, S210).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S209). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (738, 250 in this embodiment). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding areas in the counter buffer in the RAM 203.

  Next, the fluctuation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 are updated (S210). Specifically, 1 is added to the variation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3, and when the counter values reach the maximum value (198, 240, 162 in this embodiment), they are cleared to 0, respectively. Then, the update values of the variation type counters CS 1, CS 2 and CS 3 are stored in the corresponding area in the counter buffer in the RAM 203.

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S201-S206 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the next main process execution timing is not constant and varies. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first per-random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second per-random number counter C4) can be updated at random. Similarly, the variation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 can be updated at random.

  In the process of S207, if the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S207: Yes), the power failure is caused by the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 15) has been executed, the power-off process after S211 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S211), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as payout control device 111 and effect control device 117). Transmit (S212). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S213), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S214), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area to be backed up in the RAM 203.

  Note that the processing of S207 is performed at the timing when the series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S201 to S206 is completed, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S209 and S210 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main controller 110, the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power interruption state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. It can start from the process of S201. That is, the process can be started from the process of S201 as in the case where the process is initialized in the startup process. Therefore, in the process at power-off, the stack pointer is not stored in the initial setting process (S101) without saving the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 to the stack area or saving the stack pointer value. By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the process of S201. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden on the main control device 110 and to perform accurate control without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run away.

  Next, the variation process (S204) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the variation process (S204) executed in the main process (see FIG. 9). In the variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is currently being hit (S301). The jackpot includes the jackpot game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the first symbol display device 37 in the jackpot and the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game ends. As a result of the determination, if it is a big hit (S301: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  If it is not a big hit (S301: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S302), and if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is not changing. (S302: No), the value of a special figure reservation ball counter (not shown) provided in the RAM 203, that is, the number N of special figure reservation balls is acquired (S303). After the process of S303, it is determined whether or not the special figure holding ball number N is larger than 0 (S304). If the special figure holding ball number N is 0 (S304: No), this process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the number of special figure holding balls N> 0 (S304: Yes), the number N of special figure holding balls (that is, the value of the special figure holding ball counter) is decremented by 1 (S304) and provided in the RAM 203. A reserve ball storage area forward process for sequentially shifting data stored in the reserve first to fourth areas of the reserve ball storage area (not shown) to the execution area side is executed (S305). Detailed processing executed in the reserved ball storage area forward processing (S305) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After execution of the reserved ball storage area forward processing (S305), the first symbol display device 37 executes variation start processing for starting the variation display of the first symbol (S306), and ends the variation processing (S204). The detailed process executed in the change start process (S306) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, as a result of checking in the process of S302, if it is determined that the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S302: Yes), a special figure control timer (not shown) provided in the RAM 203 is displayed. It is determined whether or not the fluctuation time has elapsed by referring to (S307). A special figure control timer (not shown) is a timer that manages the time from the start of change to the end of change. The display time during the change of the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the change pattern selected by the change type counters CS1 and CS2 and the addition / subtraction value of the effect time selected by the change type counter CS3. If the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S307: No), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S308).

  In the present embodiment, among the LEDs 37b of the first symbol display device 37, until the fluctuation time elapses after the fluctuation starts, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off. The green LED is turned on, and if the green LED is lit, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on. If the blue LED is lit, the blue LED is turned off. And a display mode for turning on the red LED is set.

  Here, the stop symbol displayed by the stop display of the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the value of the first hit random number counter C1 as to whether or not it is a big hit. Furthermore, with regard to the jackpot stop symbol, depending on the value of the first hit type counter C2, the stop symbol when the jackpot is set to the high probability mode after the jackpot (that is, the probability variation jackpot) and the time reduction mode after the jackpot is set (ie , Usually a big jackpot) stop symbol. For example, if it is a probable big hit, red LED 37b is lit as a stop symbol, and if it is a normal big hit, green LED 37b is lit as a stop symbol. On the other hand, if the lottery result (the value of the first random number counter C1) is out of place, the LED 37b is lit in blue as a stop symbol. In addition, although the lighting of each LED is released when the next fluctuation display is started, it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation stops.

  Note that the variation process is executed every 4 ms, but if the LED lighting color is changed every time the variation process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted once each time the variation process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The counter value is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  On the other hand, if the variation time of the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed (S307: Yes), the stop display is set to end (stop) the variation display being executed in the first symbol display device 37. (S309) A variation end time process for determining whether it is the end time of the high probability mode or the time reduction mode is executed (S310), the variation process (S204) is terminated, and the main process (see FIG. 9). Return to. Note that detailed processing executed in the variation end processing (S310) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 11, the above-described reserved ball storage area progressive process (S305) will be described. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the reserved ball storage area forward process (S305) executed in the fluctuation process (see FIG. 10).

  In the reserved ball storage area forward process (S305), first, each data (first random number counter value, first hit type counter value, and stop pattern stored in the reserved first area of the reserved ball storage area) The value of the selection counter is shifted to the execution area (S351).

  Next, each data stored in the reserved second area to the reserved fourth area is shifted to an area having a smaller area number (S352). In the present embodiment, data is shifted only for the reserved area where data is stored (held) among the second to fourth reserved areas. Therefore, since a data shift process is not performed for a reserved area in which data is not stored (held), the number of data shifts can be reduced, and a control burden can be reduced.

  Moreover, you may comprise so that each data of a 2nd-4th reserved area may be shifted to the area where an area number is 1 small irrespective of the presence or absence of data, respectively. In that case, since it is not necessary to determine whether or not data is stored (held) in the second to fourth reserved areas, the number of steps of the program can be reduced. Therefore, since the capacity of the program can be reduced, the free capacity of the ROM 202 can be increased.

  Next, 1 is subtracted from the value of the special figure reservation ball counter (number N of special figure reservation balls) (S353), and a hold number command indicating the value of the special figure reservation ball counter after the subtraction is set (S354). The hold number command set by the process of S354 is output to the effect control device 117 by the external output process of S201 executed next time in the main process (see FIG. 9). When the output hold number command is received by the effect control device 117, the same number of lamps as the special figure hold ball number N indicated by the hold number command are turned on in the special figure hold lamp 85.

  Next, according to the value of the special figure holding ball counter (the number N of special figure holding balls), the LED (not shown) for displaying the number of holdings in the first symbol display device 37 is turned on, and a new holding number is obtained. Displayed according to the lighting state (S355), the reserved ball storage area forward-forwarding process (S305) is terminated, and the process returns to the fluctuation process (see FIG. 10).

  Next, the above-described change start process (S306) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the change start process (S306) executed in the change process (see FIG. 10).

  In the variation start process (S306), first, it is determined whether or not a big hit is made based on the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area (S401). Whether or not it is a big hit is determined based on the relationship between the value of the first random number counter C1 and the mode at that time.

  In the present embodiment, if the value of the first random number counter C1 is “310” or “608” at the normal probability (in the normal mode or the time reduction mode), it is determined that the jackpot is determined by the processing of S401. Is done. On the other hand, at the time of high probability (high probability mode), the value of the first random number counter C1 is “28, 63, 90, 127, 154, 188, 210, 250, 278, 305, 343, 375, 400, 426, 471, 509, 535, 568, 598, 618 ”, it is determined that the jackpot is determined by the processing of S401.

  When it is determined that the game is a big hit by the process of S401 (S401: Yes), it is determined whether or not the probability big hit is based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area. (S402). In the present embodiment, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “1, 2, 3”, it is determined that the probable big hit is obtained by the process of S403. On the other hand, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “0, 4”, since the big hit type is usually a big hit, it is determined that it is not a probable big hit by the process of S402.

  If it is determined by the process of S402 that it is a probable big hit (S402: Yes), the probable big hit flag (not shown) provided in the RAM 203 is set to ON (S403), and the process proceeds to S404. To do. On the other hand, when it is determined by the process of S402 that it is not the probability variation jackpot (S402: No), the probability variation jackpot flag is set to off (S412), and the process proceeds to S404.

  The probability variation jackpot flag (not shown) is a flag for indicating whether the jackpot type selected by the jackpot lottery is a probability variation jackpot or a normal jackpot. Specifically, when the probability variation jackpot flag is set on (ie, “1”), it indicates that probability variation jackpot has been selected, and when it is set off (ie, “0”), Usually indicates that a jackpot has been selected. This probability variation jackpot flag is set to ON or OFF according to the result of determination by the process of S402 described above.

  In S404, the display mode (lighting state of LED 37b) at the time of jackpot displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S404). Specifically, in S404, the display mode corresponding to the jackpot type (that is, the stop pattern at the time of jackpot) determined based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area is the first display mode. Setting is made so that it is displayed on one symbol display device 37.

  After the process of S404, the variation pattern at the time of jackpot is determined based on the jackpot type indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area and the values of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 ( S405).

  That is, based on the value of the first variation type counter CS1, a rough variation time is determined from the normal reach variation (20 seconds) and the super reach variation (40 seconds), and the second variation type counter CS2 Based on this value, the variation time (in other words, the number of variation symbols) until the last stop symbol (in this embodiment, the symbol (medium symbol) in the middle symbol row Z2) stops after the occurrence of reach is determined. By determining the variation pattern by the processing of S405, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the jackpot symbol is determined. .

  Note that the above-described variation time can be set using only the value of the first variation type counter CS1 without using the value of the second variation type counter CS2, and only by the value of the first variation type counter CS1. Whether to set the value or both values of the two variation type counters CS1 and CS2 may be determined as appropriate according to the value of the first variation type counter CS1 and the game conditions each time. .

  On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not a big hit in the process of S401 (S401: No), the display mode (LED 37b lighting state) at the time of disconnection displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S410). Specifically, in S410, based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area, the stop pattern at the time of detachment (rear / rear reach, reach other than front / rear reach, or complete disengagement) is determined. After that, setting is performed so that a display mode corresponding to the determined stop symbol is displayed on the first symbol display device 37.

  After the processing of S410, based on the stop pattern at the time of release indicated by the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area and the value of the change type counters CS1 and CS2, the change pattern at the time of release Is determined (S411).

  That is, in the same manner as the process of S405 described above, based on the value of the first variation type counter CS1, the rough variation (11 seconds), normal reach variation (20 seconds), super reach variation (40 seconds) is roughly selected. In addition to determining the variation time of the symbol variation, the variation time until the final stop symbol (in the present embodiment, the middle symbol row Z2 (medium symbol)) stops after the occurrence of reach is determined based on the value of the second variation type counter CS2. decide. By determining the variation pattern by the processing of S411, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. .

  In the process of S410, if “front / rear out of reach” or “reach other than front / rear out of reach” is set as the display mode at the time of release, reach fluctuation (normal reach fluctuation, super reach fluctuation) is always determined by the process of S411. As shown, the table is preset.

  After the process of S405 or S411, an effect time (addition / subtraction value of effect time) to be added to or subtracted from the variation time determined by these processes is determined (S406). At this time, the effect time to be added or subtracted is determined based on the value of the third type counter CS3 stored in the counter buffer provided in the work area (not shown) in the RAM 203.

  After the processing of S406, a variation pattern command corresponding to the variation pattern (variation time) determined by the processing of S405 or S411 is set (S407), and then the display mode set by the processing of S404 or S410 (ie, stop) Set the type command according to the symbol. (S408). Thereafter, an effect time addition / subtraction command corresponding to the effect time addition / subtraction value determined in the process of S406 is set (S409), the fluctuation start process (S306) is terminated, and the process returns to the fluctuation process (see FIG. 10).

  As described above, after the “holding number command” is set in the reserved ball storage area forward process (see FIG. 11), the “variation pattern command” and “type” are set in the change start process (see FIG. 12). Commands are set in the order of “command” and “calculation time addition / subtraction command”. In the external output process (S201) in the main process (see FIG. 9), since the commands are output in the order in which the commands are set, when the 3rd symbol display device 81 starts the variable display of the 3rd symbol. The commands are output to the effect control device 117 in the order of “pending number command”, “variation pattern command”, “type command”, and “calculation time addition / subtraction command”.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 13, the above-described process at the end of change (S310) will be described. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the change end process (S310) executed in the change process (see FIG. 10).

  As shown in FIG. 13, in the process at the end of change (S310), first, it is determined whether or not the probability change flag 203a is on (S421), and if the probability change flag 203a is off (S421: No). The process proceeds to S429.

  On the other hand, if the probability change flag 203a is turned on as a result of the determination in the process of S421 (S421: Yes), 1 is added to a fluctuation number counter (not shown) provided in the RAM 203 (S422). Note that a variation counter (not shown) is a counter for counting the number of variation displays (variation count) executed in the high probability mode (probability variation mode) or the time reduction mode (time reduction mode).

  After the process of S422, it is determined whether or not the stop symbol set in S309 of the above-described change start process (see FIG. 12) is a big hit (S423). At this time, if the stop symbol is off (S423: No), it is determined whether the value of the variation counter is 10,000 or more (S424).

  As a result of the determination by the processing of S424, if the value of the variation counter is 10000 or more (S424: Yes), the high probability mode is terminated when the termination condition defined by the variation count is satisfied, and the jackpot ( Since no special game state occurs, the game mode shifts to the normal mode, and the series of advantageous state periods ends. Therefore, in such a case, an advantageous state end command is set (S425), and the process proceeds to S426. The advantageous state end command set in S425 is output to the effect control device 117 by the external output process (S201) of the main process (see FIG. 9). The effect control device 117 can recognize that the period of the series of advantageous states has ended by receiving this advantageous state end command.

  On the other hand, if the stop symbol set in S309 is a jackpot as a result of the determination in the process of S423 (S423: Yes), the jackpot is generated after the end of the variable display and the advantageous state is continued. Transition.

  In S426, in order to end the high probability mode, the probability variation flag 203a is set to OFF (S426). Next, a probability variation end command is set (S427). The probability variation end command set in S427 is output to the effect control device 117 by the external output process (S201) of the main process (see FIG. 9). The effect control device 117 can recognize the end of the high probability mode by receiving this probability change end command.

  After the process of S427, the variation counter is cleared to zero (S428), and the process proceeds to S429. If the value of the variation counter is less than 10,000 (S424: No) as a result of the determination in the process of S424, the high probability mode is continued, so the process of S425 to S428 is skipped and the process goes to S429. Transition.

  In S429, it is determined whether or not the hour / short flag 203b is on (S429). At this time, if the hour / short flag 203b is off (S429: No), the variation end processing (S310) is terminated, and the processing returns to the variation processing (see FIG. 10).

  On the other hand, as a result of the determination by the processing of S429, if the time reduction flag 203b is on (S429: Yes), 1 is added to a variation counter (not shown) provided in the RAM 203 (S430).

  After the process of S430, similarly to the process of S423, it is determined whether or not the stop symbol set in S309 is a big hit (S431). At this time, if the stop symbol is off (S431: No), it is determined whether the value of the fluctuation counter is 100 or more (S432).

  If the value of the variation counter is 100 or more as a result of the determination by the process of S432 (S432: Yes), the time reduction mode is terminated when the termination condition defined by the number of variations is satisfied, and the jackpot is received after the variation display is completed. It does not occur, thereby ending a series of advantageous periods. Therefore, in such a case, an advantageous state end command is set (S433), and the process proceeds to S434. The advantageous state end command set in S433 is output to the effect control device 117 by the external output process (S201) of the main process (see FIG. 9).

  On the other hand, if the stop symbol set in S309 is a big hit as a result of the determination in the process of S431 (S431: Yes), a big hit occurs after the end of the variable display and the advantageous state is continued, so the process goes to S434. Transition.

  In S434, the time-shortage flag 203b is set to OFF in order to end the time reduction mode (S434). Next, a short time end command is set (S435). The short time end command set in S435 is output to the effect control device 117 by the external output process (S201) of the main process (see FIG. 9). The effect control device 117 can recognize the end of the time reduction mode by receiving the short end command at this time.

  After the process of S435, the fluctuation counter is cleared to zero (S436), and the fluctuation end process (S310) is terminated. If the value of the variation counter is less than 100 as a result of the determination in S432 (S432: No), the time reduction mode is continued, so the processing in S433 to S436 is skipped and the processing at the end of variation is performed. (S310) is terminated.

  Next, the aforementioned jackpot process (S205) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the jackpot process (S205) executed in the main process (see FIG. 9).

  As shown in FIG. 14, in the jackpot process (S205), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is being hit similarly to the process of S301 (see FIG. 10) (S441), and if it is not a jackpot (S441: No), Based on the state of the jackpot start flag (not shown) provided in the RAM 203, it is determined whether or not the jackpot start time is reached (S442). A jackpot start flag (not shown) is a flag that is set to ON when it is determined that a jackpot is determined by the process of S401 (see FIG. 12), and is set to OFF after execution of a jackpot start process (S443) described later. If the result of the determination in S442 is not the start of the jackpot (S442: No), the jackpot process (S205) is terminated and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 9).

  On the other hand, if the result of the determination in S442 is the start of the jackpot (S442: Yes), a jackpot start process for starting the jackpot game (jackpot) is executed (S443). In the jackpot start process (S443), for example, a jackpot opening presentation period is set to a jackpot control timer (not shown) provided in the RAM 203.

  After the processing of S443, a jackpot start command is set (S444). The jackpot start command set in S444 is output to the effect control device 117 by the external output process (S201) of the main process (see FIG. 9). The effect control device 117 recognizes that the jackpot game is started by receiving the jackpot start command.

  After the process of S444, based on the value of the jackpot control timer, it is determined whether it is the opening timing of the specific winning opening 65a (S445). Further, if the result of determination in the process of S441 is a big hit (S441: Yes), the process of S445 is also executed.

  As a result of the determination by the process of S445, if it is the opening timing of the specific winning opening 65a (S445: Yes), an opening setting process is executed to start the round (S446). In the opening setting process (S446), the large opening solenoid (a part of the solenoid 209) is turned on (excited) to open the specific winning opening 65a and the maximum opening period of the specific winning opening 65a (in this embodiment). 30s) is set to the jackpot control timer.

  After the opening time setting process (S446) is executed, it is determined based on the value of the jackpot control timer whether the closing timing of the specific winning opening 65a is indicated (S447). Further, when it is not the opening timing of the specific winning opening 65a as a result of the determination by the process of S445 (S445: No), the process of S447 is also executed.

  If the result of determination in S447 is the closing timing of the specific winning opening 65a (S447: Yes), a closing time setting process is executed to end the round (S448). In the closing time setting process (S448), for example, the large opening opening solenoid is set to OFF to close the specific winning opening 65a, and when the running round is other than the final round, the next round (ie, An interval period (for example, 2 s) until the next specific winning opening 65a is opened is set in a jackpot control timer (not shown).

  On the other hand, as a result of the determination in the process of S447, if it is not the closing timing of the specific winning opening 65a (S447: No), after the specific winning opening 65a is opened, a predetermined number (10 in this embodiment) of balls are specified winning. It is determined whether or not a ball has entered the mouth 65a (S456).

  As a result of the determination by the process of S456, when a predetermined number of balls have entered the specific winning opening 65a after the specific winning opening 65a is opened (S456: Yes), the round end condition is satisfied, so the process of S448 The process proceeds to and the closing time setting process is executed (S448). On the other hand, if a predetermined number of balls have not yet entered the specific winning opening 65a (S456: No), the jackpot process (S205) is terminated and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 9).

  After the closing time setting process (S448) is executed, it is determined whether it is the end of the jackpot, that is, the end of the final round (S449). If the result of the determination in S449 is not the end of the jackpot (S449: No), the jackpot process (S205) is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the result of the determination in S449 is the end of the jackpot (S449: Yes), a jackpot end process for ending the jackpot game is executed (S450). In the jackpot end process (S450), for example, a jackpot ending effect period is set in the jackpot control timer.

  After the processing of S450, a jackpot end command is set (S451). The jackpot end command set in S451 is output to the effect control device 117 by the external output process (S201) of the main process (see FIG. 9). The effect control device 117 recognizes that it is the end timing of the jackpot game by receiving this jackpot end command.

  After the processing of S451, it is determined whether or not a probability variation jackpot flag (not shown) is on (S452). At this time, if the probability variation jackpot flag is on (S452: Yes), the probability variation jackpot is ended, so the probability variation flag 203a is set to on (S453). Next, the hour / middle flag 203b is set to OFF (S454), a probability change start command is set (S455), and the jackpot processing (S205) is terminated. The probability change start command set in S455 is output to the effect control device 117 by the external output process (S201) of the main process (see FIG. 9). The effect control device 117 recognizes that the high probability mode is started by receiving this probability change start command.

  On the other hand, if the probability variation jackpot flag is off (S452: No) as a result of the determination in the process of S452, the normal jackpot is ended, and therefore the short / medium flag 203b is set on (S457). Next, the probability changing flag 203a is set to OFF (S458), a time reduction start command is set (S459), and the jackpot processing (S205) is ended. The short time start command set in S459 is output to the effect control device 117 by the external output process (S201) of the main process (see FIG. 9). The production control device 117 recognizes that the time reduction mode is started by receiving the short start command at this time.

  FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process. The timer interrupt process is executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, for example, every 2 ms. In the timer interrupt process, first, a process for reading various winning switches is executed (S501). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored. When winning detection information is stored in S501, a winning ball command corresponding to the number of winning balls (the number of payout balls) corresponding to the winning detection information is obtained by an external output process (S201) of the main process (see FIG. 9). Is set and transmitted to the payout control device 111 and the effect control device 117, respectively. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, not only the payout control device 111 but also the effect control device 117 can grasp the number of balls paid out as prize balls (that is, the number of payout balls).

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S502). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (738 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI 1 is stored in the corresponding area in the counter buffer in the RAM 203. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (250 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is updated. Is stored in the corresponding area of the counter buffer in the RAM 203.

  Further, the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the second per-random number counter C4 are updated (S503). Specifically, the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the second per-random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1 and their counter values are the maximum values (in this embodiment, , 619, 15, 238, 250), respectively, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding area in the counter buffer in the RAM 203.

  Thereafter, a start winning process is performed in accordance with winning at the first entrance 64 (S504), a firing control process is performed (S505), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. The start winning process (S504) and the launch control process (S505) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 16 and 17, respectively.

  Here, the start winning process (S504) described above will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S504) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15).

  When this start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won a first winning opening 64 (start winning) (S601). If it is determined that the ball has won the first entrance 64 (S601: Yes), whether or not the special figure holding ball number N of the first symbol display device 37 is less than the upper limit (4 in the present embodiment). Is determined (S602).

  At this time, if there is a winning at the first entrance 64 and the number of special figure holding balls N <4 (S602: Yes), the first per-random number counter C1 and the first per-type updated in step S503 The values of the counter C2 and the stop pattern selection counter C3 are stored in the first area among the empty reserved areas in the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 203 (S603).

  Next, 1 is added to the value of the special figure holding ball counter (not shown), that is, the special figure holding ball number N (S604), and a holding number command indicating the value of the special figure holding ball number counter after the addition is issued. Setting is made (S605). The hold number command set by the process of S605 is output to the effect control device 117 by the external output process of S201 executed in the main process (see FIG. 9). Upon receiving the hold number command, the effect control device 117 turns on the same number of lamps as the special figure hold ball number N indicated by the hold number command in the special figure hold lamp 85.

  Next, according to the value of the special figure holding ball counter (the number N of special figure holding balls), the LED (not shown) for displaying the number of holdings in the first symbol display device 37 is turned on, and a new holding number is obtained. Displayed according to the lighting state (S606), the start winning process (S504) is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15).

  On the other hand, there is no winning at the first entrance 64 (S601: No), or even if there is a winning at the first entrance 64, if the number of reserved special figure balls N <4 is not satisfied (S602: No) ), S603 and S604 are skipped, the start winning process (S504) is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15).

  Next, the above-described launch control process (S505) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the firing control process (S505) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15).

  In the launch control process (S505), first, it is determined whether or not the launch permission signal from the payout control device 111 is input, that is, whether the signal is high (S621). As a result of the determination in the process of S621, if the emission permission signal is input, that is, if the signal is high (S621: Yes), it is determined whether or not the emission permission flag 203c is on (S622). ).

  If the firing permission flag 203c is off as a result of the determination in the process of S622 (S622: No), the firing permission flag 203c is set to on since it is the timing when the firing permission signal rises from low to high (S623). .

  After the process of S623, a firing counter (not shown) provided in the RAM 203 is cleared to zero (S624). Note that a launch counter (not shown) is a counter for controlling the interval of a ball launch instruction (output of a launch control signal or the like) to the launch control device 112. In the present embodiment, it is configured such that a sphere launch instruction is given at intervals of 0.6 s.

  After the process of S624, a ball feed control signal is output to the launch control device 112 (S625). Upon receiving the ball feed control signal, the launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the ball is sent to the launch position.

  Next, a firing control signal (firing pulse) is output to the firing control device 122 and the effect control device 117, respectively (S626). Upon receiving this launch control signal, the launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the ball is launched. In addition, when receiving the launch control signal, the production control device 117 executes a launch control signal interruption process (see FIG. 32) described later, and counts the number of shot balls such as the jackpot / medium shot ball counter 273j. Update the counter.

  After the process of S626, the process proceeds to S627. Moreover, if the discharge permission flag 203c is ON as a result of the determination by the process of S622 (S622: Yes), the process of S623 to 626 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S627.

  In S627, it is determined whether or not the firing counter is 300 or more (S627). At this time, if the launch counter is 300 or more (S627: Yes), it is the timing for instructing the launch control device 112 to launch a ball, so the ball feed control signal is sent to the launch control device as in S625. It outputs to 112 (S628). Next, as in S626, the firing control signal is output to the firing control device 122 and the effect control device 117 (S629), the firing control process (S505) is terminated, and the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15) is performed. Return.

  On the other hand, if the result of determination in S627 is that the launch counter is less than 300 (S627: No), it is not the timing to instruct the launch control device 112 to launch a ball, so 1 is added to the launch counter. (S632), the firing control process (S505) is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15).

  Further, as a result of the determination in the process of S621, when the launch permission signal is not input, that is, when the signal is low (S621: No), the launch permission flag 203c is set to off (S630), and the launch is performed. The counter is cleared to zero (S631), the firing control process (S505) is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 15).

  FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The NMI interruption process is a process executed when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, and the occurrence information of the power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 by executing the NMI interruption process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as a setting of the power-off occurrence information (S701), and ends the NMI interrupt process. To do.

  Next, payout control executed by the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111 will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 and 20. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing a start-up process of the payout control apparatus 111, and this start-up process is activated when the power is turned on. First, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S801). Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance is set in the stack pointer, and an interrupt mode is set. Then, the RAM access is permitted (S802), and an external interrupt vector is set (S803).

  After that, data backup processing is executed for the RAM 213 in the MPU 211. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 213 (S804). If not stored (S804: No), the backup data is not stored, so the process proceeds to S811. Transition. If power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 (S804: Yes), a RAM determination value is calculated (S805). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S806: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off, the backed up data has been destroyed, so the process moves to S811 even in such a case. As will be described later in the processing of S917 in FIG. 19, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at a work area address in the RAM 213. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 213 is correctly stored.

  In the RAM initialization process of S811 and S812, all areas of the RAM 213 are cleared to 0 (S811), and then the initial value of the RAM 213 is set (S812). Thereafter, the peripheral devices of the MPU 211 are initialized (S809), an interrupt is permitted (S810), and the process proceeds to the main process.

  On the other hand, if the information on occurrence of power interruption is set (S804: Yes) and the RAM judgment value (checksum value etc.) is normal (S806: Yes), the backed up data is retained in the RAM 213. Then, the occurrence information of the power shutdown is cleared (S807), and the payout permission flag 213d is turned off (S808) in order to wait for the payout of the prize ball. Thereafter, the peripheral devices of the MPU 211 are initialized (S809), an interrupt is permitted (S810), and the process proceeds to the main process.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111 will be described with reference to FIG. In this main process, first, a winning ball command, a payout return command, and a payout initialization command from the main control device 110 are received, and a command determination process for determining the type of these commands is performed (S901). In this process, when a normal command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received, a payout permission flag is turned on, and payout of prize balls and lending balls is permitted.

  When the command determination process (S901) ends, it is determined whether or not the payout is permitted, that is, the state of the payout permission flag is determined (S902), and if the payout is not permitted (S902: No), the main control unit is still present. Since 110 is not in a stand-up state, in this case, the command determination process (S901) is repeatedly executed until the payout is permitted in the command determination process (S901). On the other hand, if the payout is permitted in the processing of S902 (S902: Yes), the state return switch 120 is checked, and if it is determined that the state return operation is started, the state return operation is executed (S903).

  Thereafter, the setting of the lower pan full tank state or the lower pan full tank release state is executed according to the change in the state of the lower pan 50 (S904). That is, when the lower pan 50 is determined based on the detection signal of the lower pan full switch, the lower pan full state is set when the lower pan is full. , Set the lower pan full release state. Further, the setting of the tank ball absence state or the tank ball absence release state is executed according to the change in the state of the tank ball (S905). In other words, the tank ball no switch state is determined based on the detection signal of the tank ball no switch, and when there is no tank ball, the setting of the tank ball no state is executed. Perform configuration. Thereafter, the presence / absence of a notification state is determined, and if there is a notification state, notification is made by a 7-segment LED provided in the payout control device 111 (S906).

  Next, a winning ball payout process is executed by each process of S907 to S909. That is, if the total number of winning balls is not 0 (S907: No, S908: No), the winning ball control process is started to pay out winning balls (S909). . On the other hand, if the prize ball cannot be paid out (S907: Yes) or if the total number of prize balls is 0 (S908: Yes), the process proceeds to the lending and payout process.

  In the lending process of S910 to S912, if the lending is not disabled and a lending payout request from the card unit has been received (S910: No, S911: Yes), The lending control process is started. On the other hand, if the rental ball cannot be dispensed (S910: Yes) or if a rental ball dispensing request has not been received (S911: No), the process proceeds to S913. Similarly, after the ball rental control process (S912) is completed, the process proceeds to S913.

  In the process of S913, the control of the vibrator 134 (vibration motor control) is executed on the condition that the ball is clogged (S913). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the occurrence information of power interruption is stored in the RAM 213 (S914). If the occurrence information of power interruption is not stored (S914: No), the power failure signal SG1 is received from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. Since it is not output and the power supply is not shut off, in such a case, the process proceeds to S901, and the main process from S901 to S913 is repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the occurrence information of power interruption is stored in the process of S914 (S914: Yes), the result of the power failure is output due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. NMI interrupt processing has been executed. Therefore, in such a case, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S915), and the command determination process is executed again in order to prevent the reception of a command transmitted from the main controller 110 (S916). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated and stored in the RAM 213 (S917), access to the RAM 213 is prohibited (S918), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and the process cannot be executed. Here, for example, the RAM determination value is a checksum value in the stack area and the work area to be backed up in the RAM 213.

  In the process of S914, since the information on the occurrence of power interruption is confirmed at the timing when one cycle of the main process of the payout control device 111 ends, the process is started up when returning from the state before the power interruption. After the process is completed, the process can be started from S901. In other words, the main process can be started in the same manner as when initialized in the startup process. Therefore, in the process at power-off, the contents of each register used by the MPU 211 are not saved in the stack area, or the stack pointer value is not saved in the initial setting process (S801) without saving the stack pointer value. By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), the process can be started from S901. Therefore, the control burden on the payout control device 111 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without causing the payout control device 111 to malfunction or run away. In addition, since the power-off process is executed at the timing when each process is completed, the amount of information to be backed up in the RAM 213 can be reduced.

  Next, each control process executed by the MPU 271 in the effect control device 117 will be described with reference to FIGS. As processing of the MPU 271, startup processing activated upon power-on, main processing executed after the startup processing, and commands executed every time various commands transmitted from the main control device 110 are received. Roughly divided into reception interrupt processing.

  FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing start-up processing executed by the MPU 271 in the effect control device 117. This start-up process is a process for performing various initial settings of the effect control device 117, and is a process that is executed when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on or when the MPU 271 is reset.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting associated with power-on is performed (S1001). Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Thereafter, a power-on notification process is executed (S1002). This power-on notification process (S1002) is a notification for notifying that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on. This is performed by the decoration units 29 to 33, the display lamp 34, the special figure holding lamp 85, the screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the like.

  After the power-on notification process (S1002) is executed, in order to display the initial screen on the third symbol display device 81, first, effect data (or image data) corresponding to the initial screen is read from the character ROM 275, and the video is displayed. The data is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 276 (S1003). Then, using the effect data, an initial screen is displayed on the third symbol display device (LCD) 81 (S1004).

  Next, the power supply provided in the RAM 273 indicates whether the current startup process is executed because the MPU 271 is reset during the power-off process (see S1109 in FIG. 22) described later. It is determined whether or not a disconnection processing flag (not shown) is turned on (S1005).

  As described above, when an instantaneous voltage drop (instant blackout, so-called “instantaneous power failure”) occurs, main controller 110 transmits a power-off command to effect controller 117 and the like. The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 22, but when the production control device 117 receives the power-off command from the main control device 110, it stores the power-off occurrence information indicating that the power-off command has been received in the RAM 273. Then, power-off processing (see S1109 in FIG. 22) is executed. The power-off process in progress flag is turned on before the power-off process and turned off after the power-off process is completed.

  That is, whether or not the MPU 271 is reset during the power-off process can be determined based on the state of the power-off process flag. It should be noted that data in the RAM 273 is lost during the execution of the power-off process or when the power supply is completely shut down after the completion of the execution. In this case, the power-off process flag is turned off.

  More specifically, the case where the power-off process in progress flag is off is a case where the current startup process is executed after one of the following three states is entered. The first state is a state where the power supply is completely shut off. When the power is completely shut down, the data in the RAM 273 is lost, so that the power-off process in progress flag is turned off.

  As the second state, the power-off process (see S1109 in FIG. 22) was executed because an instantaneous power failure occurred. However, the power-off process does not occur and returns to normal, and then the power-off process is completed. This is a state where the MPU 271 is reset. In this case, since the power is not shut off, the data in the RAM 273 is retained without loss. Further, since the power-off process is completed, the power-off process in progress flag is turned off.

  The third state is a state in which only the MPU 271 of the effect control device 117 is reset due to noise or the like. In other words, if the MPU 271 is reset without executing the power-off process (without receiving the power-off command from the main control device 110), the data in the RAM 273 is held while the power-off process in progress flag remains off. Is done.

  If the current startup process is executed after any of the three states described above, that is, if the power-off flag is off (S1005: No), whether or not the data in the RAM 273 has been destroyed is determined. Confirm (S1006). Note that whether or not the data has been destroyed is that the data in the RAM 273 is normally held when only the MPU 271 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started. This is because the control of the effect control device 117 can be continued using the data.

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 273 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 273 by the process of S1009 described later. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is “55AAh”, there is no data destruction in the RAM 273. Conversely, if the data is not “55AAh”, the data destruction in the RAM 273 can be confirmed. If data destruction of the RAM 273 is confirmed (S1006: Yes), the process proceeds to S1007, and initialization of the RAM 273 is started. On the other hand, if the data destruction of the RAM 273 is not confirmed (S1006: No), the process proceeds to S1010.

  More specifically, when the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut down, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 273 (the RAM 273 is turned off when the power is turned off). Since the memory is lost), it is determined that the data in the RAM 273 has been destroyed (S1006: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1007. On the other hand, the power cut-off process (see S1109 in FIG. 22) was executed because an instantaneous power failure occurred, but the power was not cut off and returned to normal, and then the MPU 271 was reset after the execution of the power cut-off process was completed. Thus, when the current startup process is started or after the MPU 271 of the effect control device 117 is reset due to noise or the like, the current startup process is started. Since the keyword “55AAh” is stored, the data in the RAM 273 is determined to be normal (S1006: No), and the process proceeds to S1010.

  In the process of S1005, when the power-off process flag is on (S1005: Yes), the power-off process (see S1109 in FIG. 22) was executed because an instantaneous power failure occurred, but the power-off occurred. In this case, the MPU 271 is reset in the middle of executing the power-off process. In this case, the current storage state of the RAM 273 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, since it is difficult to continue control in such a case, the process proceeds to S1007 and initialization of the RAM 273 is started.

  In the process of S1007, the entire storage area of the RAM 273 is checked (S1007), and it is determined whether the RAM 273 is normal based on the check result (S1008). As a check method performed in S1007, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”. Determine. The writing and checking for each byte are performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. This RAM 273 read / write check clears all storage areas of the RAM 273 to zero.

  If an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 273, it is determined that there is an abnormality in the RAM 273 (S1008: No), the abnormality of the RAM 273 is notified (S1014), and the power is shut off. Loop endlessly. The abnormality of the RAM 273 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the sound output device 226 may output a sound to notify the RAM 273 of an abnormality. Moreover, you may comprise so that abnormality of RAM273 may be alert | reported on the screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81. FIG.

  On the other hand, if the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 273, it is determined that the RAM 273 is normal (S1008: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 273, and the RAM destruction check data Is set (S1009). By checking the keyword “55AAh” written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 273.

  After the process of S1109, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S1010). The power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process (see S1109 in FIG. 22) is executed, and turned off when the power is completely cut off. Therefore, when the power-off flag is on when the startup process is executed, the power-off process was executed because an instantaneous power failure occurred. Or when the MPU 271 is reset upon completion of execution.

  Therefore, as a result of checking in the process of S1010, if the power-off flag is on (S1010: Yes), the work area (work area) of the RAM 273 is cleared to initialize each process of the effect control device 117. (S1011) After setting the initial value of the RAM 273 (S1012), the interrupt permission is set (S1013), and the process proceeds to the main process.

  On the other hand, the case where the power-off flag is off at the time of start-up processing is, for example, when power is turned on again after the power is completely shut down (data in the RAM 273 including data of the power-off flag is lost). Or the MPU 271 of the effect control device 117 is reset due to noise or the like, and the power-off flag is not turned on (that is, without receiving the power-off command from the main control device 110). In this case, data in the RAM 273 is held.

  Therefore, as a result of checking in the process of S1010, if the power-off flag is turned off (S1010: No), the process of S1011 that is the work area clear process of the RAM 273 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S1012. Is set (S1012), interrupt permission is set (S1013), and the process proceeds to the main process.

  Note that when the power-off flag is turned off, the clearing process of S1011 is skipped because only the MPU 271 of the effect control device 117 is reset due to noise or the like, and the start-up process is started. This is because the control of the production control device 117 can be continued by saving the work area data without clearing it. In addition, when the processing of S1007 to S1009 is executed, all the storage areas of the RAM 273 have already been cleared by the processing of S1007, so that it is not necessary to clear the work area of the RAM 273 again.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 22, the main process executed after the startup process described above will be described. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU 271 in the effect control device 117. This main process is a process for executing control related to game effects (such as voice output and display), and is executed after the start-up process (see FIG. 21) of the above-described effect control device 117, and thereafter repeatedly. It is a process to be executed.

  In the main processing, first, it is determined whether or not 1 ms or more has elapsed since the previous determination was executed (that is, since the processing of S1101 was executed last time) (S1101), and the previous determination is executed. If 1 ms or more has elapsed since then (S1101: Yes), an audio lamp effect process, which is a process of executing various lamp lighting control, audio output control, and the like, is executed (S1102), and the process proceeds to S1103. . Details of the sound lamp effect process (S1102) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if 1 ms has not yet elapsed from the previous determination as a result of the determination in S1101 (S1101: No), the process of S1102 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1103. Note that when 1 ms has not elapsed since the previous determination was executed in S1101, the audio lamp effect process (S1102) is skipped in the audio lamp effect process (S1102). This is because it is not necessary to execute lamp lighting control and audio output control with a cycle shorter than 1 ms.

  In the processing of S1103, it is determined whether or not 20 ms or more has elapsed since the previous determination was executed (that is, since the processing of S1103 was executed last time) (S1103). At this time, when 20 ms or more have elapsed since the previous determination was executed (S1103: Yes), a moving image (image) corresponding to the variation effect and a moving image (image) corresponding to the jackpot effect are displayed in the third symbol display. A display effect process, which is a process for displaying on the device (LCD) 81, is executed (S1104). Details of the display effect process (S1104) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After execution of the display effect process (S1104), the acquired number-of-balls display process, which is a process for displaying the acquired number of balls such as the total number of acquired balls 81a1 on the third symbol display device 81 (the acquired number-of-balls display area 81a), is executed. (S1105), the process proceeds to S1106. Details of this acquired ball number display process (S1105) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, as a result of the determination by the processing of S1103, if 20 ms has not yet elapsed since the previous determination was executed (S1103: No), the processing of S1104 and S1105 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S1106. It should be noted that the display effect process (S1104) is skipped when the display effect process (S1104) has not elapsed since the previous determination was executed in S1103 because the third symbol display device (LCD) 81 is skipped. This is because it is not necessary to execute such a process with a cycle shorter than 20 ms because the image to be displayed is updated according to the variation time.

  In the process of S1106, it is determined whether or not occurrence information of power interruption is stored in the RAM 273 (S1106). The information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored when a power interruption command is received from main controller 110. If it is determined by the processing of S1106 that the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored (S1106: Yes), both the power interruption flag and the power interruption processing flag are turned on (S1108), and the power interruption processing is performed. Execute (S1109). After executing the power-off process (S1109), the power-off process flag is turned off (S1110), and then the process is looped infinitely.

  In the power-off process of S1109, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off, and the audio output device 226, the illumination units 29 to 33, the display lamp 34, and the third symbol display device 81 are turned on. Turn off the output. Further, the storage of the information on occurrence of power interruption is also erased. Each output port is turned off in order to prevent abnormal display and abnormal audio output from being performed. The player should not be confused by abnormal display or abnormal audio output. Because.

  On the other hand, as a result of the determination by the process of S1106, if the information on occurrence of power interruption is not stored (S1106: No), the keyword “55AAh” stored in the RAM 273 by the process of S1009 of the startup process (see FIG. 21) is stored. Based on this, it is determined whether or not the RAM 273 is destroyed (S1107). If the RAM 273 is not destroyed (S1107: No), the process returns to S1101, and the above-described processes of S1101 to S1106 are repeated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the RAM 273 is destroyed by the process of S1107 (S1107: Yes), the process is looped infinitely in order to stop the subsequent processes. Here, since it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and the process is in an infinite loop, the display effect process (S1104) is not executed, and thereafter, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is not changed. Thus, the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, and can call a hall clerk or the like to request repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. When it is confirmed that the RAM 273 is destroyed, the audio output device 226, the illumination units 29 to 33, the display lamp 34, the special figure holding lamp 85, the screen of the third symbol display device 81, etc. It is good also as what performs notification of RAM destruction.

  Next, the above-described sound lamp effect process (S1102) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing an audio lamp effect process (S1102) executed in the main process (see FIG. 22) of the effect control device 117.

  In the sound lamp effect process (S1102), first, the output of each lamp (for example, the illumination units 29 to 33, the display lamp 34, etc.) is set so as to be in the lighting state of the lamp edited in the process of S1225 described later. (S1221).

  After the process of S1221, a customer waiting effect process (S1222) is executed. In the customer waiting effect process (S1222), when the time when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player has elapsed for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds, 1 minute, etc.), the display on the third symbol display device 81 is displayed as a customer waiting effect. Set to switch to.

  The “customer waiting effect” is a display effect (for example, a title) that is displayed on the 3rd pattern gaming device 81 when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player for a predetermined period of time, and is displayed on the third figure gaming device 81. Display and demo display). The time during which the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player can be measured by, for example, a period during which neither the variable display nor the jackpot effect is executed, or a period during which the touch sensor 51a of the operation handle 51 is not detected. Such a period (a time during which the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player) may be timed by the effect control device 117 or may be timed by the main control device 110 and reported to the effect control device 117 by a command. .

  After execution of the customer waiting effect process (S1222), the reserved number display update process is executed (S1223). In the hold number display update process (S1223), the number of lighting of the special figure hold lamp 85 is updated based on the hold number command received from the main controller 110.

  Next, frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S1224). In this frame button input monitoring / production process (S1224), the input from the frame button 22 operated (pressed) by the player to enhance the production effect is monitored, and the signal inputted from the frame button 22 is changed from low to high. This is a process of setting to perform an effect corresponding to the case of switching to (when the frame button 22 is operated from the non-operation state). For example, when a notice character appears at the start of fluctuation display, the expected value of the jackpot due to the current fluctuation is displayed by pressing the frame button 22, or the feeling of expectation for the jackpot is displayed by pressing the frame button 22 during reach production. Set to change to a production that you can have. Further, the frame button 22 may be a determination button for selecting one reach effect among a plurality of reach effects. If the frame button 22 is not provided on the pachinko machine, the process of S1224 can be omitted.

  After executing the frame button input monitoring / production process (S1224), the lamp editing process is executed (S1225), and the sound editing / output process is executed (S1226). In the lamp editing process (S1225), the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33, the display lamps 34, and the like are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output process (S1226), the output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the setting. .

  After the process of S1206, a liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1227), the sound lamp effect process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process (S1227), based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted and received from the main controller 110, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set. Based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution management process (S1227), the lamp editing process in S1225 and the sound editing / output process in S1226 are executed.

  Next, the display effect process (S1104) described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the display effect process (S1104) executed in the main process (see FIG. 22) of the effect control device 117.

  In the display effect process (S1104), first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuating effect being executed on the third symbol display device 81 is an effect for jackpot (that is, whether or not it is a jackpot) (S1221). If it is medium (S1241: Yes), the jackpot effect process is executed (S1248). In this jackpot effect process, effect data corresponding to the jackpot effect performed on the third symbol display device 81 is read from the character ROM 275 and written in a predetermined area of the video RAM 276 to update the image of the jackpot effect. After the big hit effect process (S1248) ends, the display effect process (S1104) ends, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 22).

  On the other hand, if it is not a big hit in the process of S1241 (S1241: No), it is determined whether or not the 3rd symbol display device 81 is executing the variation display of the 3rd symbol (that is, whether or not it is varying). (S1242). At this time, if not changing (S1242: No), it is determined whether a change start flag (not shown) provided in the RAM 273 is ON (S1243).

  The variation start flag (not shown) is a flag for instructing the start of variation display of the third symbol. When it is determined in S1243 that the variation start flag is on, the variation display of the third symbol is started. . This variation start flag is set to ON when a variation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see FIG. 26), and is set to OFF when starting the variation display of the third symbol.

  If the result of determination in S1243 is that the variation start flag is off (S1243: No), other display processing is executed (S1250). The other display processing is, for example, display processing such as a customer waiting effect that is executed when a predetermined time has elapsed when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player. After the execution of the other display process (S1250), the display effect process is terminated and the process returns to the main process.

  On the other hand, if the variation start flag is on as a result of the determination by the processing of S1243 (S1243: Yes), the variation start flag is turned off (S1244), and the variation time counter (not shown) provided in the RAM 273 is set. An initial value is set (S1245). Note that a variation time counter (not shown) is a counter for measuring the elapsed time from the start of variation display of the third symbol. Note that the initial value set in the variation time counter in S1245 is the time obtained from the variation time of the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command and the addition / subtraction value of the effect time indicated by the effect time addition / subtraction command.

  After the processing of S1245, it is determined whether or not the value of the variation time counter is greater than 0, that is, whether or not it is within the variation time (S1246). On the other hand, if the result of determination in step S1242 is that the third symbol variation display is being executed (in variation) (S1242: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value of the variation time counter (S1249), and the processing in step S1246 is performed. It shifts to and it is determined whether it is within the fluctuation time.

  If the result of determination in S1246 is within the variation time (S1246: Yes), symbol variation display is executed (S1247). Specifically, in the process of S1247, using the variation effect data stored in the variation effect data storage area (not shown) of the video RAM 276, the third symbol display device (LCD) 81 displays the variation effect data ( An image corresponding to a fluctuation effect such as high-speed fluctuation) is displayed. After the process of S1247, the display effect process is terminated and the process returns to the main process.

  On the other hand, as a result of the determination by the processing of S1246, when the value of the variation time counter is 0, that is, when the variation time has ended (S1246: No), it is set based on the type command received from the main controller 110. The stopped symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device (LCD) 81 (S1251), the display effect process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 25, the acquired number-of-balls display process (S1105) will be described. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the acquired ball number display process (S1105) executed in the main process (see FIG. 22) of the effect control device 117.

  In the acquired number-of-balls display process (S1105), it is determined whether or not the jackpot end display flag 273s is on (S1261). If the jackpot end display flag 273s is on (S1261: Yes), the current big hit This is the timing for displaying the number of acquired balls and the total number of acquired balls (the number of acquired balls during a series of advantageous states) in the acquired ball number display area 81a of the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, in such a case, first, the number of balls won in the current big hit is calculated (S1262). Specifically, in S1262, the current number of hit jackpot medium hit balls is calculated by subtracting the value of the current jackpot medium hitting ball number memory 273m from the value of the current jackpot medium payout ball number memory 273o.

  After the processing of S1262, the display target at this timing is displayed in the acquired ball number display area 81a (S1263). Specifically, in S1263, the current number of winning balls calculated in S1262 and the total number of acquired balls (that is, the value of the number of acquired balls during advantageous state 273g) are displayed in the acquired number-of-plays display area 81a. . Note that the number of acquired balls displayed in the acquired ball number display area 81a by the processing of S1263 (the current number of hits and the total number of acquired balls) is changed from the game mode to the high probability mode or the time reduction mode. Display is continued until the processing of S1266 is executed at the start of the first fluctuation. After the processing of S1263, the jackpot end display flag 273s is set to OFF (S1264), and the processing proceeds to S1265.

  On the other hand, if the jackpot end display flag 273s is off (S1261: No) as a result of the determination in the process of S1261, the timing for displaying the current number of hits in the jackpot and the total number of acquired balls in the acquired number-of-plays display area 81a Therefore, the processing of S1262 to S1264 is skipped, and the processing proceeds to S1265.

  In S1265, it is determined whether or not the change start display flag 273t is ON (S1265). At this time, if the change start display flag 273t is on (S1265: Yes), it is the first change start time after the game mode shifts to the high probability mode or the time reduction mode, and the total number of acquired balls is acquired. This is the timing for display in the number display area 81a. Therefore, in such a case, the value (that is, the total number of acquired balls) of the acquired number of balls memory 273g during the advantageous state is displayed in the acquired number of balls display area 81a (S1266). At this timing, the current number of hits and the total number of acquired balls are displayed in the acquired number of balls display area 81a, and the total number of acquired balls is displayed by switching to the display content.

  After the process of S1266, the first display flag 273v is set to ON (S1267), the fluctuation start display flag 273t is set to OFF (S1268), and the process proceeds to S1269. Since the first display flag 273v is set to ON in S1267, the total number of acquired balls displayed in the acquired ball number display area 81a by the process of S1266 continues to be displayed while being updated as needed until the display is next switched. .

  On the other hand, if the variation start display flag 273t is OFF (S1265: No) as a result of the determination by the processing of S1265, it is not the timing to display the total acquired number of balls in the acquired number of balls display area 81a, so S1266 to S1268. This process is skipped, and the process proceeds to S1269.

  In S1269, it is determined whether or not the probability change time short end display flag 273u is on (S1269). At this time, if the probability change time short end display flag 273u is turned on (S1269: Yes), the total number of acquired balls, the jackpot average average acquired number of balls, and the probability change time shortening are accompanied by the end of a series of advantageous state periods. This is the timing for displaying the medium average acquired number of balls in the acquired number of balls display area 81a. Therefore, in such a case, first, the average number of acquired balls for jackpot is calculated (S1270), and the average number of acquired balls for probability change time is calculated (S1271).

  Specifically, in S1270, by dividing the value in the advantageous state big hit medium winning ball number memory 273h by the value of the big hit number counter 273b, the big hit medium average obtained number of balls (each big hit generated during the period of the advantageous state). (Average value of the number of balls obtained at the time). On the other hand, in S1271, by dividing the value of the advantage state probability change time short and medium acquisition number of balls memory 273i by the value of the probability change time shortage counter 273f, the probability change time short and medium average acquisition number of balls The average number of acquired balls in the high probability mode and each time shortening mode) is calculated.

  After the processing of S1271, the value in the advantageous state acquired ball number memory 273g (that is, the total number of acquired balls), the jackpot average acquired ball number calculated in S1270, and the probability variation time average acquired ball number calculated in S1270 It is displayed in the acquired ball number display area 81a (S1272). At this timing, the total number of acquired balls is displayed in the acquired number-of-balls display area 81a, so that the display content is switched to the total acquired number of balls, the average number of hits during the jackpot, and the average gained ball during the probability change time. Display the number.

  After the processing of S1272, the big hit number counter 273b is cleared to zero (S1273), and the probability change time count counter 273f is cleared to zero (S1274). Next, the second display flag 273w is set to ON (S1275), the probability change short time display flag 273u is set to OFF (S1276), and the process proceeds to S1277. Since the second display flag 273w is set to ON in S1275, each acquired ball number displayed in the acquired ball number display area 81a by the process of S1272 is determined at a predetermined erasing timing (for example, five seconds after being displayed). ).

  On the other hand, as a result of the determination in the processing of S1269, if the probability change time display flag 273u is off (S1269: No), each acquired number of balls such as the jackpot average acquired number of balls is displayed in the acquired number of balls display area 81a. Since it is not timing, the processing of S1270 to S1276 is skipped, and the processing proceeds to S1277.

  In S1277, it is determined whether or not the second display flag 273w is on (S1277). At this time, if the second display flag 273w is on (S1277: Yes), the erasure timing has arrived because it is during the display period of each acquired ball number displayed in the acquired ball number display area 81a by the process of S1272 It is determined whether or not it has been done (S1278).

  As a result of the determination by the processing of S1278, when the erasing timing has arrived (S1278: Yes), the acquired number-of-balls display erasing process is executed to erase the number of acquired balls displayed in the acquired number-of-balls display area 81a ( S1279). Next, the second display flag 273x is set to OFF (S1280).

  After the processing of S1280, the acquired ball number memory 273g during advantageous state is cleared to zero (S1281), the advantageous state large hitting ball number memory 273h is cleared to zero (S1282), and the advantageous state probability changing time medium number acquired ball number memory 273i is cleared to zero. (S1283), the acquired number-of-balls display process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process.

  On the other hand, if the second display flag 273w is off as a result of the determination in the process of S1277 (S1277: No), the process of S1278 to S1283 is skipped and the acquired number-of-balls display process is terminated. Further, when the erase timing has not yet arrived as a result of the determination by the processing of S1278 (S1278: No), the processing of S1279 to S1283 is skipped, and the acquired ball number display processing is ended.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 26, a command reception interrupt process executed by the MPU 271 in the effect control device 117 will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing command reception interrupt processing. This command reception interrupt process is an interrupt process that is executed every time various commands transmitted from the main controller 110 are received.

  In the command reception interrupt process, it is first determined whether or not a jackpot start command has been received (S1301). At this time, if the jackpot start command has not been received (S1301: No), the process proceeds to S1302. On the other hand, when the jackpot start command is received (S1301: Yes), the jackpot medium flag 273a is set to ON (S1311), and the process proceeds to S1302.

  In the process of S1302, it is determined whether a jackpot end command has been received (S1302). At this time, if the jackpot end command has not been received (S1302: No), the process proceeds to S1303. On the other hand, when the jackpot end command is received (S1302: Yes), the jackpot end process is executed (S1312), and the process proceeds to S1303. Details of the jackpot end time process (S1312) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S1303, it is determined whether an advantageous state end command has been received (S1303). At this time, if the advantageous state end command has not been received (S1303: No), the process proceeds to S1304. On the other hand, when the advantageous state end command is received (S1303: Yes), the advantageous state end command reception flag 273r is set to ON (S1313), and the process proceeds to S1304.

  In the process of S1304, it is determined whether a probability change start command has been received (S1304). At this time, when the probability change start command has not been received (S1304: No), the process proceeds to S1305. On the other hand, when the probability change start command is received (S1304: Yes), the probability change in progress flag 273c is set to ON (S1314), the probability change time short start flag 273e is set to ON (S1315), and the process proceeds to S1305. .

  In the process of S1305, it is determined whether a probability change end command has been received (S1305). At this time, if the probability change end command has not been received (S1305: No), the process proceeds to S1306. On the other hand, if a probability change end command is received (S1305: Yes), a probability change end process is executed (S1316), and the process proceeds to S1306. The detailed process of the probability change end process (S1316) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S1306, it is determined whether or not a time reduction start command has been received (S1306). At this time, if the short time start command has not been received (S1306: No), the process proceeds to S1307. On the other hand, if the time reduction start command is received (S1306: Yes), the time reduction medium flag 273d is set to ON (S1317), the probability change time reduction start flag 273e is set to ON (S1318), and the process proceeds to S1307. .

  In the processing of S1307, it is determined whether or not a time reduction end command has been received (S1307). At this time, if the short time end command has not been received (S1307: No), the process proceeds to S1308. On the other hand, if a time-shutdown command is received (S1307: Yes), a time-shutdown time-end process is executed (S1319), and the process proceeds to S1308. The detailed processing of the time reduction end processing (S1319) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S1308, it is determined whether a variation pattern command has been received (S1308). At this time, when the variation pattern command has not been received (S1308: No), the process proceeds to S1309. On the other hand, if a variation pattern command is received (S1308: Yes), a variation start process is executed (S1320), and the process proceeds to S1309. The detailed process of the fluctuation start process (S1320) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S1309, it is determined whether or not a prize ball command has been received (S1309). At this time, if no prize ball command has been received (S1309: No), the process proceeds to S1310. On the other hand, when a prize ball command is received (S1309: Yes), a payout ball count process is executed (S1321), and the process proceeds to S1310. Details of the payout ball count process (S1321) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S1310, it is determined whether another command has been received (S1310). At this time, if no other command has been received (S1310: No), the command reception interrupt process is terminated. On the other hand, when another command is received (S1310: Yes), processing according to the other command is executed (S1322), and this command reception interrupt processing is terminated. In addition, as a process according to other commands (S1322), for example, when a type command is received, a stop symbol is set, or when an effect time addition / subtraction command is received, the effect time addition / subtraction value is set. There is a case where a corresponding notice effect (for example, a slip effect or a return effect) is determined.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 27, the above-described jackpot end process (S1312) will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end time process (S1312) executed in the above-described command reception interrupt process (see FIG. 26).

  In the big hit end process (S1312), first, the big hit medium flag 273a is set to OFF (S1401), and 1 is added to the big hit number counter 273b (S1402). Next, the number of hit balls during the big hit this time is calculated (S1403). Specifically, in S1403, the current big hit hit ball number is calculated by subtracting the value of the previous shot number memory 273l from the value of the big hit middle shot number counter 273j.

  After the processing of S1403, the current jackpot / medium firing ball number calculated in S1403 is stored in the current jackpot / medium firing ball number memory 273m (S1404), and the value of the jackpot / medium firing ball number counter 273j is stored in the previous firing ball number memory 273l. Store (S1405).

  After the processing of S1405, the current number of big hit payout balls is calculated (S1406). Specifically, in S1406, the current jackpot medium payout ball number is calculated by subtracting the value in the previous payout ball number memory 273n from the value in the big hit medium payout ball number memory 273k.

  After the processing of S1406, the current jackpot / medium payout ball number calculated in S1406 is stored in the current jackpot / medium payout ball number memory 273o (S1407), and the value of the jackpot / medium payout ball number memory 273k is stored in the previous payout ball number memory value 273n. Store (S1408). After the processing of S1408, the jackpot end display flag 273s is set to ON (S1409), and the jackpot end processing is ended.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 28, the above-described probability variation end process (S1316) will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the probability change end process (S1316) executed in the above-described command reception interrupt process (see FIG. 26).

  In the probability change end process (S1316), first, the probability change flag 273c is set to OFF (S1421), and 1 is added to the probability change short-time counter 273f (S1422). Next, it is determined whether or not the advantageous state end command reception flag 273r is on (S1423). At this time, if the advantageous state end command reception flag 273r is off (S1423: No), since the series of advantageous states is continued thereafter, the probability variation end process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the advantageous state end command reception flag 273r is on (S1423: Yes) as a result of the determination by the processing of S1423, it is the timing when a series of advantageous state periods ends, so the probability change time short end display flag 273u. Is set to ON (S1424), the first display flag 273v is set to OFF (S1425), and the process at the end of probability change ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 29, the above-described time-short end process (S1318) will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the short time end process (S1318) executed in the above-described command reception interrupt process (see FIG. 26).

  In the time shortening end process (S1318), first, the time shortening flag 273d is set to OFF (S1441), and 1 is added to the probability change time count counter 273f (S1442). Next, it is determined whether or not the advantageous state end command reception flag 273r is on (S1443). At this time, if the advantageous state end command reception flag 273r is off (S1443: No), since the series of advantageous states is continued thereafter, the time-short-end processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the advantageous state end command reception flag 273r is turned on as a result of the determination by the processing of S1443 (S1443: Yes), it is the timing when a series of advantageous state periods ends, so the probability change time short end display flag 273u. Is set to ON (S1444), the first display flag 273v is set to OFF (S1445), and the time-short-end processing is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 30, the above-described change start process (S1320) will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation start process (S1320) executed in the above-described command reception interrupt process (see FIG. 26).

  In the variation start process (S1320), first, a variation start flag (not shown) provided in the RAM 273 is set to ON (S1461), and it is determined whether the probability change short start flag 273e is ON (S1462). ).

  If the result of determination in S1462 is that the probability change short start flag 273e is off (S1462: No), the variation start process is terminated. On the other hand, when the probability change short start flag 273e is on (S1462: Yes), the change start display flag 273t is set to on (S1463), and the probability change short start flag 273e is set to off (S1464). The process at the start of fluctuation is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 31, the above-described payout ball count processing (S1321) will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the payout ball count process (S1321) executed in the command reception interrupt process (see FIG. 26) described above.

  In the payout ball count processing (S1321), first, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag 273a is on (S1481). At this time, if the jackpot hitting flag 273a is on (S1481: Yes), the jackpot payout ball memory 273k is added by adding the number of payout balls indicated by the prize ball command to the value of the jackpot payout ball number memory 273k. Is updated (S1482).

  After the processing of S1482, the contents of the advantageous state big hit ball number memory 273h are updated by adding the payout ball number indicated by the prize ball command to the value in the advantageous state big hit medium number acquired ball number memory 273h (S1483). After the process of S1483, the process proceeds to S1484.

  On the other hand, if the result of the determination in S1481 is that the big hit flag 273a is off (S1481: No), it is determined whether the probability changing flag 273c is on (S1487). At this time, if the probability changing flag 273c is on (S1487: Yes), the number of paying balls indicated by the prize ball command is added to the value in the probability changing short / medium paying ball number memory 273q to thereby calculate the number of paying balls in the probability changing time. The contents of the memory 273q are updated (S1488).

  After the processing of S1488, the contents of the advantageous state big hit number of balls memory 273i are updated by adding the number of payout balls indicated by the prize ball command to the value of the advantage state probability change time short and medium number of acquired balls memory 273i (S1489). . After the process of S1489, the process proceeds to S1484.

  In S1484, by adding the number of payout balls indicated by the prize ball command to the value of the acquired number-of-balls memory 273g in the advantageous state, the content of the acquired number-of-balls memory 273g in the advantageous state is updated (S1484).

  As a result of the determination in S1487, if the probability changing flag 273c is off (S1487: No), it is determined whether or not the hour / short flag 273d is on (S1490). At this time, if the hour / middle flag 273c is on (S1490: Yes), the process proceeds to S1488.

  After the process of S1484, it is determined whether or not the first display flag 273v is on (S1485). At this time, if the first display flag 273v is on (S1485: Yes), it is during the display period of the total acquired number of balls in the high probability mode or the time shortening mode, and is therefore displayed in the acquired number of balls display area 81a. The acquired number of balls is updated to the value of the acquired number of balls memory 273g in the advantageous state updated by the processing of S1484 (S1486), and the paid-out ball number counting processing is ended.

  On the other hand, if the result of determination in S1485 is that the first display flag 273v is off (S1485: No), the processing in S1486 is skipped and the payout ball count process is terminated. Also, as a result of the determination by the processing of S1490, when the hour / short flag 273c is off (S1490: No), the payout ball count processing is ended.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 32, the firing control signal interrupt process executed by the MPU 271 in the effect control device 117 will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing a firing control signal interrupt process. This launch control signal interrupt process is an interrupt process that is executed each time a launch control signal (fire pulse) output from the main controller 110 is received, that is, every time a rising edge of the launch control signal is detected. is there.

  In the firing control signal interrupt process, first, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag 273a is on (S1501). At this time, if the big hit / medium flag 273a is ON (S1501: Yes), 1 is added to the big hit / medium shot ball counter 273j (S1502).

  After the processing of S1502, by subtracting 1 from the value in the advantageous state big hit middle number acquired ball number memory 273h, the contents of the advantageous state big hit medium number acquired ball number memory 273h are updated (S1503), and the process proceeds to S1504.

  On the other hand, if the result of determination in S1501 is that the big hit flag 273a is off (S1501: No), it is determined whether the probability changing flag 273c is on (S1507). At this time, if the probability variation flag 273c is on (S1507: Yes), 1 is added to the probability variation short / medium firing ball number counter 273p (S1508). Next, 1 is subtracted from the value of the number-of-short-term acquired ball number memory 273i in the advantageous state probability change time (S1509), and the process proceeds to S1504. In S1504, by subtracting 1 from the value of the acquired number-of-balls memory 273g in the advantageous state, the contents of the acquired number-of-balls memory 273g in the advantageous state are updated (S1504).

  As a result of the determination in S1507, if the probability changing flag 273c is off (S1507: No), it is determined whether or not the hour / short flag 273d is on (S1510). At this time, if the hour / middle flag 273c is on (S1510: Yes), the process proceeds to S1508.

  After the processing of S1504, it is determined whether or not the first display flag 273v is on (S1505). At this time, if the first display flag 273v is on (S1505: Yes), it is during the display period of the total acquired number of balls in the high probability mode or the time shortening mode, and is therefore displayed in the acquired number of balls display area 81a. The acquired number of balls is updated to the value of the acquired number of acquired balls memory 273g in the advantageous state updated by the process of S1504 (S1506), and the firing control signal interrupt process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the first display flag 273v is off as a result of the determination in the process of S1505 (S1505: No), the process of S1506 is skipped and the firing control signal interrupt process is terminated. Also, as a result of the determination by the process of S1510, when the hour / middle flag 273c is off (S1510: No), the firing control signal interrupt process is terminated.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the total number of acquired balls 81a1, which is the balance between the number of shot balls thrown in and the number of paid-out balls paid out as prize balls. In addition, since the number of acquired balls such as the average number of acquired balls in the jackpot is calculated and displayed in the total acquired ball number display area 81a at various timings, the player has apparently acquired by paying out the winning balls. Instead of the number of game balls (that is, the number of payout balls), the actual balance can be realized by the player. The balls used for the game are lent out by the player paying a consideration such as banknotes, so that the player himself can realize the number of balls acquired in the game performed using such a ball, so that the player himself It is possible to increase the interest of games that are paid for.

  In particular, the number of acquired balls displayed in the total acquired ball number display area 81a (the total acquired number of balls 81a1, the average number of acquired balls in the jackpot, etc.) Since it is the number of acquired balls during the period from the start of the gaming state to the end of the high probability mode or the time shortening mode according to the end condition defined by the number of executions of the variable display, for example, there are the following advantages .

  For example, advantageous states such as jackpot (special gaming state), high probability mode or time reduction mode are more advantageous than the normal state (ie, normal mode), and are advantageous for the player. The number of acquired balls during a series of advantageous periods generated by a game is information that is particularly interesting to a player who pays a consideration for the game balls to be inserted. Therefore, by displaying the number of acquired balls during the series of advantageous states, if the player feels that the player has obtained a sufficient number of balls during the series of advantageous states, As a result, the player's satisfaction with the game will greatly increase.

  On the other hand, if the player feels that the number of acquired balls is insufficient during a series of advantageous periods, the player can suspect the condition of the nail adjustment, etc. The player can be given an opportunity to change the (pachinko machine 10). Therefore, it is possible to give a possibility of avoiding a situation where the player keeps playing with an unfavorable nail adjustment game machine, and it is possible to prevent the dissatisfaction of the player from accumulating. Therefore, the interest of the game can be enhanced also in this respect.

  In addition, the number of acquired balls, such as the average number of hits during jackpots and the average number of balls acquired during short and long times, can be an index for the player to select a more advantageous base, so the player is convinced by himself. A stand that can be selected can be selected. Therefore, since the player can use the pachinko machine that he / she has convinced and selected, the player can be satisfied with the game, and the interest of the game can be enhanced in this respect as well.

  In general, the number of balls to be paid out during the jackpot is almost constant, but the number of balls thrown in that period (that is, the number of fired balls) is indefinite. The number varies mainly depending on the number of fired balls. In other words, the number of balls acquired during the big hit mainly varies depending on how the nail is adjusted. Therefore, by displaying the average number of acquired balls in the jackpot in the acquired ball number display area 81a, it is easy to guess a situation that can be advantageous or disadvantageous for itself, such as the state of nail adjustment.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the number of shot balls used for calculation of the number of acquired balls is counted using a shot control signal output from the main controller 110 based on the operation of the operation handle 51. The number of payout balls is counted using a prize ball command that actually indicates the number of prize balls to be paid out to the payout control means 111 by the main control device 110, so that the number of acquired balls can be obtained with suitable accuracy. . Further, since the operation of the operation handle 51 is performed by the player, the player determines the number of acquired balls in a game (that is, a game performed by the player) performed based on the operation of the operation handle 51 by the player. You can feel and enhance the interest of the games you play.

  In the first embodiment, the “average number of acquired balls during probability change time” is calculated as an average value of the number of acquired balls per one high probability mode or one time shortening mode, but a series of advantageous states It is good also as an average value of the number of acquired balls per change display in each high probability mode or each time shortening mode which occurred during the period. In addition, in order to distinguish this from the first and second average average number of balls acquired in the first embodiment (average value of the number of acquired balls in each high probability mode and each time shortening mode generated during a series of advantageous states), The average number of acquired balls during the probability change time of the example, that is, the average value of the number of acquired balls per change display in each high probability mode or each time shortening mode that occurred during a series of advantageous states is “second”. This is referred to as “the average number of balls acquired in the short and long time period”.

  Such a modification will be described with reference to FIGS. In this modification, the same parts as those in the first embodiment described above are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 33 is a block diagram showing a configuration of the RAM 273 of the effect control device 117 in the present modification. As shown in FIG. 33, in this modification, an advantageous state variation number counter 273x is provided in place of the probability variation time count counter 273f. Further, the RAM 273 of this modification has an advantageous state flag 273y.

  The advantageous state change frequency counter 273x is a counter that counts the number of change displays executed during a series of advantageous state periods. The advantageous state change frequency counter 273x is incremented by one each time a change display is started during the advantageous state period. Then, every time the production control device 117 receives the advantageous state end command from the main control device 110, the advantageous state variation number counter 273x is cleared to zero after calculating the second average probability-acquiring ball number at the time of probability change. The advantageous state change frequency counter 273x is initialized and set to zero (zero clear) every time the RAM 273 is initialized, such as when the power is turned on.

  The advantageous state flag 273y is a flag indicating whether or not it is during the advantageous state period. Specifically, when the advantageous state flag 273y is set to on (ie, “1”), it indicates that the advantageous state is being established, and when it is set to off (ie, “0”). Indicates not in an advantageous state. The advantageous state flag 273y is set to ON when the effect control device 117 receives a jackpot start command from the main control device 110. Thereafter, when the effect control device 117 receives an advantageous state end command from the main control device 110, the advantageous state flag 273y is set to OFF. Note that the advantageous state variation number counter 273x is initialized to be off every time the RAM 273 is initialized, such as when the power is turned on.

  FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing command reception interrupt processing in the present modification. As shown in FIG. 34, the command reception interrupt process of the present modification is a process of turning on the advantageous state flag 273y when the effect control device 117 receives a jackpot start command from the main control device 110 (S1323). ) And the process of setting the advantageous state flag 273y to off (S1324) when the production control device 117 receives the advantageous state end command from the main control device 110, the first embodiment described above. This is the same as the command reception interrupt process (see FIG. 26).

  FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the change start processing (S1320) in the present modification. As shown in FIG. 35, in the variation start time process of this modification, after the processes of S1461 to S1464 are executed, as in the variation start time process of the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 30), the process is in an advantageous state. It is determined whether or not the flag 273y is on (S1465). At this time, if the advantageous state flag 273y is on (S1465: Yes), 1 is added to the advantageous state variation number counter 273x (S1466), and the variation start time process is terminated. On the other hand, if the advantageous state flag 273y is OFF as a result of the determination by the process of S1465, the process of S1466 is skipped and the process at the time of starting the fluctuation is terminated.

  According to this modification, when the production control device 117 receives a variation pattern command from the main control device 110 during a series of advantageous states, the advantageous state variation number counter 273x is updated each time. Thus, the number of variable displays performed during a series of advantageous states is counted. The value of the counter value 273x during the advantageous state is the value of the average number of balls acquired during the second advantageous state when the series of advantageous state ends (ie, during the series of advantageous state periods). This is used when calculating the average number of acquired balls per fluctuation display in each high probability mode or each time reduction mode.

  Specifically, although not shown, in the above-described acquired ball number display process (see FIG. 25) of the first embodiment, instead of the process (S1271) of calculating the average acquired ball number during the probability variation time shortening, the advantageous state probability variation time shortening. Based on the value of the medium acquired ball number memory 273i and the value of the advantageous state variation number counter 273x, the second probability variation time average medium acquired ball number is calculated. In addition, the second average probability-acquiring ball number at the time of probability change can be calculated by dividing the value in the advantage state probability-change time-average scored ball number memory 273i by the value of the advantage state variation number counter 273x.

  Then, in S1272 (see FIG. 25), the second probability variation average average acquired number of balls calculated as described above is displayed in the acquired number display area 81a together with the total acquired number of balls and the average number of acquired balls in the jackpot. . That is, instead of the average number of acquired short and medium average balls in the first embodiment, the second average number of acquired short and medium average balls is displayed in the acquired number of balls display area 81a.

  In the acquired number-of-balls display process (see FIG. 25) of the first embodiment, the short time counter 273f for probability change is zero-cleared in S1274. However, in this modification, the change counter 273x in the advantageous state is reset in S1274. Perform zero clear.

  In addition, in this modified example, since the probability change time count counter 273f is not used, S1422 and S1442 in the probability change end process (see FIG. 28) and the time limit end time process (see FIG. 29) of the first embodiment described above, respectively. The process of is omitted.

  Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first embodiment described above, every time a series of advantageous state periods ends, the average number of acquired balls per jackpot that is an average value of the number of acquired balls in each jackpot that occurred during the series of advantageous state periods; It is configured to display in the acquired ball number display area 81a the average number of acquired balls, which is an average value of the number of acquired balls in each high probability mode and each time shortening mode generated during the series of advantageous states. .

  In the second embodiment, the number of acquired balls is limited to a big hit in a series of one or a plurality of advantageous states generated after the RAM 273 is initialized by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. An average value per jackpot (hereinafter, this number is referred to as “average number of balls obtained per jackpot”) and one or more times that have occurred since the RAM 273 was initialized by powering on the pachinko machine 10 The average value of the number of acquired balls only during the high probability mode or the time shortening mode during the advantageous state period of each mode (hereinafter, this number is referred to as “the average number of acquired balls during the short period of time for all probability changes”). Can be displayed in the acquired ball number display area 81a under a predetermined condition.

  Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, a customer waiting effect (a display such as a title display or a demo display displayed on the third symbol gaming device 81 when a predetermined time has elapsed when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player) On the condition that the player is operating the frame button 22 during the period in which the effect) is displayed on the 3rd symbol display device, It is configured to be displayed. Note that, in the second embodiment, the same portions as those in the first embodiment described above are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 36 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of the RAM 273 of the effect control device 117 in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment. In the present embodiment, in addition to the configurations 273a to 273w of the RAM 273 of the first embodiment described above, a first acquired ball number cumulative memory 273aa, a second acquired ball number cumulative memory 273ab, a jackpot number cumulative memory 273ac, It has a certain change time short-time accumulation memory 273ad and a third display flag 273ae.

  The first acquired ball number accumulation memory 273aa is terminated by a termination condition defined by the number of fluctuations in the high probability mode or the time shortening mode from the start of the special gaming state that occurred in the normal mode during the series of advantageous states. This is a memory for accumulating and storing the number of acquired spheres limited to the big hit during the period until. The first acquired ball number accumulation memory 273aa is initialized and set to zero (zero clear) every time the RAM 273 is initialized. Then, every time the production control device 117 receives the advantageous state end command from the main control device 110, the first acquired number-of-balls accumulated memory 273aa The value of the number-of-obtained balls memory 273h is added (accumulated).

  The second acquired ball number accumulation memory 273ab is a memory for accumulating and storing the acquired ball number only in the high probability mode or the time reduction mode in a series of advantageous state periods. The second acquired ball number accumulation memory 273ab is initialized and set to zero (zero clear) every time the RAM 273 is initialized. Then, every time the production control device 117 receives an advantageous state end command from the main control device 110, the second acquired accumulated ball number memory 273ab stores the advantageous state probability change time short and medium acquired ball number memory 273i before clearing it to zero. At this time, the value in the short- and middle-acquired ball number memory 273i is added (accumulated).

  The big hit number accumulating memory 273ac is a memory for accumulating and storing the number of times that a big hit has occurred during a series of advantageous state periods after the RAM 273 is initialized by power-on or the like. The jackpot count accumulation memory 273ac is initialized and set to zero (cleared to zero) every time the RAM 273 is initialized. Each time the effect control device 117 receives the advantageous state end command from the main control device 110, the value of the big hit number counter 273b is added to the big hit number accumulated memory 273ac before the big hit number counter 273b is cleared to zero. Stored (cumulatively).

  The probability change time short-time accumulation memory 273ad accumulates the number of times that the game mode is set to the high probability mode or the time reduction mode during a series of advantageous states after the RAM 273 is initialized by power-on or the like. It is a memory for storing. The probability change short time cumulative memory 273ad is initialized and set to zero (zero clear) every time the RAM 273 is initialized. Then, every time the effect control device 117 receives the advantageous state end command from the main control device 110, the value of the probability variation time count counter 273f is stored in the probability variation time count accumulation memory 273ad before the probability variation time count counter 273f is cleared to zero. Add (accumulate) and store.

  The third display flag 273ae is a flag for indicating that the average number of acquired balls per hit and the average number of acquired short and medium averages are displayed in the acquired number display area 81a. When the third display flag 273ae is set to ON (that is, “1”), the average number of acquired balls per total size and the average number of acquired balls for all probability change time are displayed in the acquired number-of-plays display area 81a. In the case where it is set to off (that is, “0”), the average number of acquired balls for the total hit and the average number of acquired balls for all probability variation time are not displayed in the acquired number-of-balls display area 81a. It shows that. In the present embodiment, the player who operates the frame button 22 during the period in which the customer waiting effect is displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 is used for the average number of acquired balls for the total hit and the average number of acquired balls for all probability changes. It is displayed in the acquired number-of-balls display area 81a on the condition that it is (pressed). Therefore, the third display flag 273ae is set to ON when the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) while the customer waiting effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. After that, the player holds his / her hand from the frame button 22 while displaying the average number of hit balls during the big hit and the average number of shots during the short period of time for all probability changes (that is, when the third display flag 273ae is set to ON). The third display flag 273ae is set off when the waiting operation is hidden by releasing the operation or operating the handle 51 by the player.

  FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing an audio lamp effect process (S1102) of the second embodiment. The voice lamp effect process of the second embodiment is a process that replaces the voice lamp effect process (see FIG. 23) of the first embodiment. After the customer wait effect process (S1222), the number of acquired balls during the customer wait effect is displayed. It differs from the sound lamp effect process of the first embodiment in that the process (S2221) is executed.

  Specifically, in the sound lamp effect process (S1102) of the second embodiment, the output of each lamp (for example, the illumination units 29 to 33, the display lamp 34, etc.) is set as in the first embodiment described above. Then (S1221), a customer waiting effect process is executed (S1222). Note that, as described above, the customer waiting effect process (S1222) includes a setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the customer waiting effect when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player for a predetermined time. This is the process to be performed. In the present embodiment, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is performed when the state where the number N of special figure holding balls is 0 continues for a predetermined time (for example, 1 minute) after the end of the variable display or jackpot effect. Settings are made to switch to a customer waiting effect. On the other hand, when the customer waiting effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, when the operation handle 51 is operated, the customer waiting effect is set to be hidden.

  After execution of the customer waiting effect process (S1222), the acquired number of balls display process during the customer waiting effect is executed (S2221). The number-of-acquisition display processing during waiting for a customer (S2221) is the average number of acquired balls per hit when the frame button 22 is operated during the period in which the customer-waiting performance is displayed on the third symbol display device. This is a process of displaying the average number of acquired balls in all probability variation time in the acquired ball number display area 81a. The detailed processing of the acquired ball number display processing (S2221) during the customer waiting effect will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the execution of the waiting ball effect acquired ball number display process (S2221), as in the first embodiment described above, the hold number display update process (S1223), the frame button input monitoring / effect process (S1224), and the lamp edit process (S1225), a sound editing / output process (S1226), and a liquid crystal effect execution management process (S1227) are executed, the sound lamp effect process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process.

  FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the number-of-acquisition display processing (S2221) during the waiting-for-effects effect executed in the sound lamp effect process (see FIG. 37) of the second embodiment described above.

  In the waiting ball effect acquired ball number display process (S2221), first, it is determined whether or not the customer waiting effect is during the period displayed on the third symbol display device (during customer waiting effect) (S2601). At this time, if the customer waiting effect is being performed (S2601: Yes), it is determined whether or not the frame button 22 is operated (pressed) based on whether or not a high signal is input from the frame button 22 ( S2602).

  As a result of the determination in the process of S2602, when a high signal is input from the frame button 22, that is, when the frame button 22 is operated (S2602: Yes), the third display flag 273ae is on. It is determined whether or not (S2603).

  If the third display flag 273ae is off (S2603: No) as a result of the determination by the processing of S2603, it indicates that the frame button 22 has been operated (pressed) from the non-operating state. Then, the third display flag 273ae is set to ON (S2604).

  After the processing of S2604, the average number of acquired balls for the entire team is calculated (S2605). Specifically, in S2605, the value of the first acquired number-of-balls cumulative memory 273aa is divided by the value of the number-of-hits number accumulated memory 273ac, whereby the average number of acquired balls per total jackpot (after the RAM 273 is initialized by turning on the power or the like). The average value of the number of balls obtained for each big hit is calculated.

  After the processing of S2605, the average number of acquired balls for all probability variation time is calculated (S2606). Specifically, in S2606, the RAM 273 is initialized by turning on the power, etc., by dividing the value of the second acquired number-of-balls cumulative memory 273ab by the value of the probability-changed short-time cumulative memory 273ad. (Average value of the number of acquired balls in each high probability mode and each time reduction mode).

  After the processing of S2606, the average number of acquired balls per hit calculated in S2605 and the average number of acquired balls in all probability change time calculated in S2606 are displayed in the acquired number-of-balls display area 81a (S2607). After the processing of S2607, the number-of-acquisition display processing during the customer waiting effect is terminated, and the process returns to the sound lamp effect process (see FIG. 37). It should be noted that, in S2607, the average winning ball number in the total hit and the average winning ball number in all probability variation displayed in the acquired ball number display area 81a indicate that the customer waiting effect is not displayed or the frame button 22 is not operated. Until it becomes, it continues to be displayed in the acquired ball number display area 81a.

  On the other hand, if the third display flag 273ae is turned on as a result of the determination by the processing of S2603 (S2603: Yes), during the display period of the average acquired number of balls per total size and the average number of acquired balls during all probability variation time Therefore, the number-of-acquisition display processing during the waiting-waiting effect is finished as it is, and the process returns to the sound lamp effect processing (see FIG. 37).

  If the result of determination in S2601 is that the customer waiting effect is not in effect (S2601: No), the process proceeds to S2608. As a result of the determination in the process of S2602, when a low signal is input from the frame button 22, that is, when the frame button 22 is not operated (S2602: No), the process proceeds to S2608.

  In S2608, it is determined whether the third display flag 273ae is on (S2608). At this time, when the third display flag 273ae is on (S2608: No), the state in which the frame button 22 is operated is changed to the non-operating state (a state in which the player releases the hand from the frame button 22). In this case, the third display flag 273ae is set to off (S2609).

  After the processing of S2609, the acquired number-of-balls display erasure process is executed to delete the average number of acquired balls per total size and the average number of acquired balls for all time changes in the acquired number-of-balls display area 81a (S2610). The acquired number-of-balls display process during the waiting effect is ended, and the process returns to the sound lamp effect process (see FIG. 37).

  On the other hand, if the third display flag 273ae is off as a result of the determination in the process of S2608 (S2608: No), the average number of acquired balls per total size and the average number of acquired balls during all probability change time are displayed. Accordingly, the number-of-acquisition display processing during the waiting-waiting effect is terminated, and the process returns to the voice lamp effect process (see FIG. 37).

  That is, according to the above-mentioned number-of-acquisition ball display processing during the customer waiting effect (S2221), during the period when the customer waiting effect is displayed on the third symbol display device (during the customer waiting effect), the player clicks the frame button 22. When the button is operated (pressed), while the frame button 22 is being operated, the average number of acquired balls for the total hit and the average number of acquired balls for all probability variation time are displayed in the acquired number-of-balls display area 81a. The average number of hit balls in the all-spot and the average number of shots in the short-term average time displayed in the acquired ball number display area 81a indicate that the player has released his hand from the frame button 22 or has operated the operation handle 51. If the customer waiting effect is hidden, it is deleted.

  FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the acquired ball number display process (S1106) of the second embodiment. The acquired number-of-balls display process of the second embodiment is a process that replaces the acquired number-of-balls display process (see FIG. 25) of the first embodiment. When the probability change short end display flag 273u is on, It differs from the acquired ball number display processing of the first embodiment in that the values of the acquired ball number cumulative memory 273aa, the second acquired ball number cumulative memory 273ab, the big hit number of times cumulative memory 273ac, and the probability variation short time number cumulative memory 273ad are updated. .

  Specifically, in the acquired number-of-balls display process (S1106) of the second embodiment, the processes of S1261 to S1264 and the processes of S1265 to S1268 are executed as in the first embodiment described above.

  After the process of S1268 or as a result of the determination by the process of S1265, when the fluctuation start display flag 273t is off (S1265: No), as in the first embodiment described above, the probability change short end display flag is displayed. It is determined whether or not 273u is on (S1269). At this time, if the probability change short end display flag 273u is off (S1269: No), the process proceeds to S1277. On the other hand, if the probability change short end display flag 273u is on (S1269: Yes), the process proceeds to S2261 after the processes of S1270 to S1272 are executed as in the first embodiment described above.

  In S 2261, the value in the advantageous state big hit medium acquired ball number memory 273 h is added to the value in the first acquired ball number cumulative memory 273 aa (S 2261). As a result of the processing of S2261, the first acquired ball number accumulating memory 273aa stores the number of acquired balls only during the big hit in a series of advantageous states that occur after the RAM 273 is initialized by powering on the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Are accumulated and stored.

  After the processing of S2261, the value of the advantage state probability changing time short and medium acquired ball number memory 273i is added to the value of the second acquired ball number cumulative memory 273ab (S2262). By the processing of S2262, the second acquired ball number accumulating memory 273ab is stored in the high probability mode or the time reduction mode in the period of a series of advantageous states generated after the RAM 273 is initialized by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. The number of acquired balls limited to the inside is accumulated and stored.

  After the processing of S2263, the value of the jackpot count counter 273b is added to the value of the jackpot count accumulation memory 273ac (S2263), and the value of the probability change time count counter 273f is added to the value of the probability change time count count memory 273ad (S2264). .

  After the processing of S2264, the processing of S1273 to S1276 is executed as in the first embodiment described above, and the processing proceeds to S1277. Then, similarly to the first embodiment described above, the processes of S1277 to S1283 are executed, the acquired number-of-balls display process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 22).

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the player operates (presses) the frame button 22 during the period in which the customer waiting effect is displayed on the third symbol display device. It is possible to display the average number of acquired balls per total size and the average number of acquired balls in all probability variation time in the acquired number of balls display area 81a. The number of acquired balls, such as the average number of balls acquired during the entire game and the average number of balls acquired during the short period of time, can be an index for the player to select a more advantageous platform for himself. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the player presses the frame button 22 of the vacant table (the table on which nobody is playing and the customer waiting effect is displayed). On the basis of the average number of hit balls during the total hit and the average number of shots obtained during the short and long period of time displayed by pressing the frame button 22, it is possible to select a stand that the player can be satisfied with. In other words, the player can use a pachinko machine that he / she has agreed with. Therefore, since it is possible to cause the player to play a satisfactory game, it is possible to increase the interest of the game that the player himself pays for the game, thereby giving the player a sense of satisfaction.

  Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 40 to 45. In the first embodiment described above, the period from the start of the special gaming state that occurred in the normal mode to the end of the high probability mode or the time reduction mode according to the end condition defined by the number of executions of the variable display is “a series of advantages. The number of acquired balls (for example, the total number of acquired balls 81a1) during the series of advantageous states is displayed in the acquired ball number display area 81a.

  On the other hand, in the third embodiment, after the high probability mode or the time reduction mode is terminated by the termination condition defined by the number of executions of the variable display, when a special gaming state (big hit) occurs within a predetermined period. , The number of acquired balls in the advantageous state starting from the special gaming state is a series including the high probability mode or the time shortening mode ended by the end condition defined by the execution period of the immediately preceding advantageous state (that is, the number of executions of the variable display). The period is added to the period of the advantageous state). Note that, in the third embodiment, the same portions as those in the first embodiment described above are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 40 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of the RAM 273 of the effect control device 117 in the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment. In the present embodiment, an additional period counter 273af is provided in addition to the configurations 273a to 273w included in the RAM 273 of the first embodiment described above.

  The additional period counter 273af is a period for monitoring the occurrence of a special gaming state which is a starting condition for a series of advantageous state periods after the high probability mode or the time shortening mode is ended by the end condition defined by the number of executions of the variable display. It is a counter for measuring (hereinafter, this period is referred to as “additional period”). In the present embodiment, the additional period is a period until a predetermined number of balls (game balls) that can be stored in the upper plate 17 are fired, and 150 is used as the predetermined number. The additional period counter 273af is initialized and set to zero (zero clear) every time the RAM 273 is initialized. Then, when the production control device 117 receives the advantageous state end command from the main control device 110, the initial value (150 in the present embodiment) is set in the additional period counter 273af, and the production control device 117 performs main control on the firing control signal. Each time it is received from the device 110, it is decremented by one.

  In this third embodiment, the big hit number counter 273b, the probability change time short number counter 273f, the advantageous state acquired number-of-balls memory 273g, the advantageous state big hit number of acquired balls number memory 273h, and the advantageous state probability changed number of short and medium number acquired balls number 273i Are configured to be cleared to zero when the additional period counter 273af reaches zero while the additional period is counted by the additional period counter 273af.

  FIG. 41 is a flowchart illustrating the acquired ball number display process (S1106) of the third embodiment. The acquired number-of-balls display process of the third embodiment is a process that replaces the acquired number-of-balls display process (see FIG. 25) of the first embodiment, and is a big hit number counter 273b, a probability change time-count counter 273f, and an acquired ball in the advantageous state. This is different from the acquired ball number display process of the first embodiment in that the process of clearing the number memory 273g, the advantageous state big hit medium acquired ball number memory 273h, and the advantageous state probability change time medium and short number acquired ball number memory 273i is omitted.

  Specifically, in the acquired number-of-balls display process (S1106) of the third embodiment, the processes of S1261 to S1264 and the processes of S1265 to S1268 are executed as in the first embodiment described above. After the process of S1268 or as a result of the determination by the process of S1265, when the fluctuation start display flag 273t is off (S1265: No), as in the first embodiment described above, the probability change short end display flag is displayed. It is determined whether or not 273u is on (S1269). At this time, if the probability change short end display flag 273u is off (S1269: No), the process proceeds to S1277, and after the processes of S1277 to S1280 are executed, the acquired ball is acquired as in the first embodiment described above. The number display process ends, and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, if the probability change short end display flag 273u is on (S1269: Yes), the processes of S1270 to S1272, S1275, and S1276 are executed as in the first embodiment described above, and the process proceeds to S1277.

  FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the probability variation end process (S1316) of the third embodiment. The probability change end process of the third embodiment is a process that replaces the probability change end process (see FIG. 28) of the first embodiment. When the advantageous state end command reception flag 273r is on, the additional period counter 273af This is different from the probability variation end process of the first embodiment in that the process of setting an initial value is performed.

  Specifically, in the probability variation end process (S1316) of the third embodiment, the processes of S1421 to S1423 are executed as in the first embodiment described above. If the advantageous state end command reception flag 273r is OFF as a result of the determination in the processing of S1423 (S1423: No), the processing at the end of probability change ends.

  On the other hand, if the advantageous state end command reception flag 273r is on (S1423: Yes), the processing of S1424 and S1425 is executed as in the first embodiment described above. Then, after the process of S1425, an initial value is set in the additional period counter 273af (S3421), and the process at the end of probability change ends.

  In the present embodiment, the additional period counted by the additional period counter 273af is 150 balls launched after the high probability mode or the time shortening mode ends according to the end condition defined by the number of executions of the variable display. In S3421, 150 is set as an initial value in the additional period counter 273af.

  FIG. 43 is a flow chart showing the time-saving end process (S1319) of the third embodiment. The short-time end process of the third embodiment is a process that replaces the short-time end process of the first embodiment (see FIG. 29). Similar to the probability change end process (see FIG. 42) of the third embodiment described above, the time-short end process of the third embodiment is also performed when the advantageous state end command reception flag 273r is on. This is different from the time-short end processing in the first embodiment in that processing for setting an initial value is performed.

  Specifically, in the time-saving end process (S1319) of the third embodiment, the processes of S1441 to S1443 are executed as in the first embodiment described above, and as a result of determination by the process of S1443, an advantageous state end command is received. If the flag 273r is off (S1443: No), the time-short-end process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the advantageous state end command reception flag 273r is turned on as a result of the determination by the processing of S1443 (S1443: Yes), the processing of S1444 and S1445 is performed and then added as in the first embodiment described above. 150 is set as an initial value in the period counter 273af (S3441), and the time-short-end processing is terminated.

  Thus, according to the above-described processing at the end of probability change (see FIG. 42) and processing at the end of short time (see FIG. 43) in the third embodiment, when the production control device 117 receives the advantageous state end command from the main control device 110. In other words, when the high probability mode or the time shortening mode is ended by the end condition defined by the number of executions of the variable display, an initial value is set in the additional period counter 273af, thereby setting the additional period. . The additional period refers to whether or not the start condition of a series of advantageous state periods is satisfied after the high probability mode or the time reduction mode is ended by the end condition defined by the number of executions of the variable display (that is, a special period) This is a period for monitoring whether or not a gaming state has occurred. In this additional period, the end of a series of advantageous states accompanying the establishment of the end condition is suspended.

  FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the payout ball count processing (S1321) of the third embodiment. The payout ball count process of the third embodiment is a process that replaces the payout ball count process (see FIG. 31) of the first embodiment. During the additional period, the value of the acquired ball number memory 273g during the advantageous state is used. It differs from the payout ball count processing of the first embodiment in that it is configured to be updated according to the number of winning balls.

  Specifically, in the payout ball count processing (S1321) of the third embodiment, it is determined whether or not the big hit / medium flag 273a is on (S1481), and if the big hit / medium flag 273a is on (S1481: Yes), Similar to the first embodiment described above, the processing of S1482 to S1486 is executed, and the payout ball count processing is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the big hit flag 273a is off (S1481: No), it is determined whether the probability changing flag 273c is on (S1487), and if the probability changing flag 273c is on (S1487: Yes). Similarly to the above-described first embodiment, the processes of S1488 and S1489 are executed, and the process proceeds to S1484. If the probability change flag 273c is OFF as a result of the determination by the processing of S1487 (S1487: No), it is determined whether or not the hour / middle flag 273d is ON (S1490), and the hour / middle flag 273d is ON. If there is (S1490: Yes), the process proceeds to S1488.

  As a result of the determination by the processing of S1490, if the hour / short flag 273d is off (S1490: No), it is determined whether or not the value of the additional period counter 273af is greater than zero (S3481). If the value of the additional period counter 273af is zero or less (S3481: No) as a result of the determination by the process of S3481, the additional period is not counted. finish.

  On the other hand, if the value of the additional period counter 273af is greater than zero (S3481: Yes) as a result of the determination by the process of S3481, the additional period is in progress. By adding the payout ball number indicated by the prize ball command to the value of the acquired ball number memory 273g during the state, the content of the acquired ball number memory 273g during the advantageous state is updated (S1484).

  FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing a firing control signal interrupt process of the third embodiment. The launch control signal interrupt process of the third embodiment is a process that replaces the launch control signal interrupt process (see FIG. 32) of the first embodiment. During the additional period, the update of the additional period counter 273af is advantageous. This is different from the launch control signal interrupt process of the first embodiment in that it is configured to update the acquired number-of-balls memory 273g during the state.

  Specifically, in the launch control signal interrupt process of the third embodiment, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag 273a is on (S1501), and if the jackpot flag 273a is on (S1501: Yes), the above-described process is performed. Similar to the first embodiment, the processes of S1502 to S1506 are executed, and the firing control signal interrupt process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the big hit flag 273a is off (S1501: No), it is determined whether the probability change flag 273c is on (S1507), and if the probability change flag 273c is on (S1507: Yes). As in the first embodiment described above, the processing of S1508 and S1509 is executed, and the processing proceeds to S1504. As a result of the determination in S1507, if the probability change flag 273c is off (S1507: No), it is determined whether or not the hour / short flag 273d is on (S1510), and the hour / short flag 273d is on. If there is (S1510: Yes), the process proceeds to S1508.

  As a result of the determination by the processing of S1510, if the hour / short flag 273d is off (S1510: No), it is determined whether or not the value of the additional period counter 273af is greater than zero (S3501). If the value of the additional period counter 273af is 0 or less (S3501: No) as a result of the determination in the process of S3501, it is not during the additional period. In this case, the firing control signal interrupt process is performed. Exit.

  On the other hand, if the value of the additional period counter 273af is larger than zero (S3501: Yes) as a result of the determination by the process of S3501, the additional period is in progress. One is subtracted from the period counter 273af (S3502). Next, by subtracting 1 from the value of the acquired ball number memory 273g during the advantageous state, the contents of the acquired ball number memory 273g during the advantageous state are updated (S3503).

  After the processing of S3503, it is determined whether or not the value of the additional period counter 273af is zero (S3504). If the value of the additional period counter 273af is not zero as a result of the determination in the process of S3504 (S3504: No), the timing for ending the additional period has not yet been reached, and the firing control signal interrupt process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the value of the additional period counter 273af is zero as a result of the determination in the process of S3504 (S3504: Yes), the high probability mode or the time shortening mode is set according to the end condition defined by the number of executions of the variable display. This is the end timing of the additional period due to the launch of 150 balls since the end. Therefore, in such a case, in order to clear each acquired number of balls (total acquired number of balls 81a1, etc.) counted during a series of advantageous state periods, the number of acquired balls during the advantageous state is 273g, the number of acquired balls per advantageous state The memory 273h, the advantageous state probability changing short / medium acquired ball number memory 273i, the big hit number counter 273b, and the probability changing time short number counter 273f are cleared to zero (S3505 to S3509), and the firing control signal interrupt process is terminated.

  Therefore, according to the payout ball count process (see FIG. 44) and the launch control signal interrupt process (see FIG. 45) of the third embodiment described above, the high probability mode or the time reduction mode is defined by the number of executions of the variable display. Even if the process is terminated due to the termination condition, since the processing of S1484 and S3503 is executed during the additional period set thereafter, the number of prize balls paid out from the pachinko machine 10 (ie, the payout) Number) and the number of balls fired from the ball launch unit 112a (that is, the number of fired balls, which is the number of balls used in the game), is continuously updated.

  Even if the end condition defined by the number of executions of the variable display in the high probability mode or the time reduction mode is satisfied, an additional period (in this embodiment, a period until 150 balls are launched) In the middle, the advantageous state acquired number of balls memory 273g, the advantageous state large hitting medium number of acquired balls memory 273h, the advantageous state probability changing short and medium acquired number of balls memory 273i, the big hit number counter 273b, and the probability changing time short number counter 273f are not cleared to zero. Therefore, if a special gaming state (bonus) occurs during this additional period, the number of acquired balls in the advantageous state starting from the special gaming state is calculated as the number of executions of the immediately preceding advantageous state (that is, the number of executions of variable display). Can be added to the number of acquired balls counted in the additional period and a period of a series of advantageous states including a high probability mode or a time shortening mode terminated by the termination condition defined by (1).

  In other words, in the present embodiment, even when the end condition of the high probability mode or the time reduction mode defined by the number of variable displays is satisfied, the end of a series of advantageous states is suspended during the additional period. . And a period of a series of advantageous states can be extended on condition that a special gaming state has occurred during the additional period.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, when a special gaming state occurs during the additional period, a series of advantageous states can be extended. In other words, the completion condition of the high probability mode or the time reduction mode in which the number of acquired balls such as the total number of acquired balls 81a1 in a series of advantageous states starting from the special gaming state generated during the additional period is defined by the number of times of variable display is established. Is added to the number of acquired balls in a series of advantageous states completed based on. Therefore, the total number of acquired balls 81a1 is increased by the extended period of a series of advantageous states. Therefore, a player who has viewed the total acquired number of balls 81a1 displayed in the acquired number of balls display area 81a has gained a lot. It can be impressed that the number of balls has been obtained, and the player's satisfaction and superiority can be enhanced. Thereby, the interest of a game can be improved.

  In addition, a relatively short period (in this embodiment, a period until 150 balls are fired) after the end condition of the high probability mode or the time shortening mode defined by the number of variable displays is set. Since the end of the advantageous state period is a period to be suspended (that is, an additional period), the series of advantageous state periods can be extended without a sense of incongruity. Therefore, the player naturally accepts that the total number of balls 81a1 displayed in the acquired ball number display area 81a is the number of balls that the player has actually acquired during a series of advantageous periods. It is possible to obtain sufficient satisfaction and superiority.

  In particular, in this embodiment, a period in which 150 balls are launched is set as an additional period. The “150 balls” is generally the number of balls that can be stored in the upper plate 17. When the numerical value set as the additional period exceeds the number of balls that can be stored in the upper plate 17, the player needs to add the ball to the upper plate 17, and the operation for adding the ball Need to do. Therefore, the player may feel “long” with respect to the period during which the end of the series of advantageous period is suspended (ie, the additional period), and a special gaming state occurs during the additional period, Even if the period of the advantageous state is extended, there is a possibility of feeling uncomfortable with the extension.

  However, according to the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, the period during which the balls within the range that can be stored in the upper plate 17 are fired (digested) is set as the additional period (period during which the end of a series of advantageous periods is suspended). Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the player from feeling that the additional period is “long”, and it is possible to extend the period of a series of advantageous states without a sense of incongruity. In addition, since “150 balls” is generally the number of balls that the player is unlikely to add to the upper plate 17, there is no sense of incongruity in the period of the advantageous state. It can be extended.

  In the present embodiment, the number of acquired balls (total acquired balls) displayed in the acquired ball number display area 81a when the end condition of the high probability mode or the time reduction mode defined by the number of variable displays is satisfied. Number, average number of balls acquired during jackpot, and average number of balls acquired during short and long time) are erased once the erasing timing arrives during the additional period. Since the game mode returns to the normal mode when the above end condition is satisfied (that is, the period of the advantageous state is apparently ended), the content displayed in the acquired ball number display area 81a is temporarily displayed during the additional period. By erasing, it is possible to suppress giving the player a sense of incongruity as if the player is in an advantageous state despite being in the normal mode. Can be extended without any form.

  As described above, the present invention has been described based on the embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be easily guessed.

  For example, in each of the above embodiments, the sound output and the lighting control of various lamps and the control of the third symbol display device 81 are controlled by one control device (that is, the effect control device 117). Alternatively, the lighting control of various lamps and the control of the third symbol display device 81 may be performed by separate control devices.

  For example, a control device (sound lamp control device) for controlling sound output and lighting of various lamps is connected to the main control device 110, and the control device (display control device) controlled by the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by sound lamp control. It is also possible to connect to a device so that each command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device, and a display instruction is given from the sound lamp control device to the display control device.

  When such a configuration is adopted, a prize ball command or a firing control signal (launch pulse) output from the main control device 110 to the effect control device 117 in each of the above embodiments is, for example, an audio lamp from the main control device 110. Once output to the control device, the command or control signal (or the command or control signal set based on the command or control signal) is output from the sound lamp control device to the display control device. 27, the jackpot process in FIG. 27, the probability change end process in FIG. 28, the short time end process in FIG. 29, the fluctuation start process in FIG. 39, the payout ball count process in FIG. 32, by executing the firing control signal interrupt process of FIG. 32, various catches such as the total number of acquired balls 81a1 are displayed in the acquired ball number display area 81a as in the above embodiments. It may be configured to display the number of balls. Alternatively, the voice lamp control device counts the number of acquired balls performed in each of the flowcharts of FIGS. 26 to 32, and outputs a command indicating the obtained number of acquired balls to the display control device. Based on the command (command indicating the number of acquired balls), similarly to each of the above embodiments, various acquired numbers of balls such as the total acquired number of balls 81a1 may be displayed in the acquired number of balls display area 81a.

  Further, a control device (sound lamp control device) for controlling sound output and lighting of various lamps is connected to the main control device 110, and the control device (display control device) controlled by the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by sound lamp control. In the configuration of connecting to the device, the display control means may be further connected to the main control device 110 to directly send commands and control signals from the main control device 110 to the display control device.

  Alternatively, a control device (display control device) that is controlled by the third symbol display device 81 is connected to the main control device 110, and a control device (sound lamp control device) that controls sound output and lighting of various lamps is displayed control device. In this case, each command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the display control device, and the display control device may be configured to instruct the sound lamp control device to control sound output or lighting of various lamps. .

  Further, in each of the above embodiments, the main control device 110 is configured to output the firing control signal (firing pulse) to the firing control device 112 and the effect control device 117, but the main control device 110 outputs the firing control signal. It is good also as a structure which outputs only to the firing control apparatus 112, and outputs the command which shows having received the control signal or the firing control signal to the presentation control apparatus 117, whenever the firing control apparatus 112 receives a firing control signal.

  Further, in each of the above embodiments, the main control device 110 is configured to output the firing control signal to the effect control device 117 every 0.6 seconds based on the firing permission signal input from the payout control device 111. The control device 110 outputs a start command to the effect control device 117 when the launch permission signal is received from the payout control device 111, and outputs an end command to the effect control device 117 when the fire permission signal stops thereafter. In the period from the reception of the start command to the reception of the end command, it is determined that a predetermined interval (for example, every 0.6 seconds) is the launch timing of the ball, and at that timing, the big hit medium launch ball The number of fired balls such as the number may be counted.

  Further, in each of the above embodiments, the payout control device 111 is configured to output the firing permission signal to the main control device 110, but the payout control device 111 outputs the firing permission signal to the firing control device 112, and fire control is performed. The apparatus 112 may be configured to execute a process similar to the launch control process of FIG. 17 to control the launch timing of the sphere. Alternatively, the output from the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b is input to the firing control device 112, and the firing control device 112 has a predetermined interval only when the touch sensor 51a is on and the stop switch 51b is off. You may comprise so that control which launches a ball | bowl at an interval (for example, 0.6 second interval) may be performed.

  When these configurations (that is, the configuration in which the launch control device 112 controls the launch timing of the sphere) are adopted, the launch control device 112 receives input from the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b at the launch timing of the sphere. Based on the launch timing of the sphere, a control signal or a command indicating that it is the launch timing of the sphere may be output to the effect control device 117.

  Further, when the launch control device 112 is configured to input a launch permission signal from the payout control device 111, the launch control device 112 receives a launch permission signal from the payout control device 111, After that, when the firing permission signal is interrupted, an end command is output to the effect control device 117, and the effect control device 117 receives a start command and receives a finish command at a predetermined interval ( For example, it is possible to determine that every 0.6 seconds) is the launch timing of the ball, and count the number of shot balls at that timing.

  When the output from the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b is input to the launch control device 112, the launch control device 112 has a condition that the touch sensor 51a is on and the stop switch 51b is off. Is established, the start command is output to the effect control device 117, and then the touch sensor 51a is turned off and the stop switch 51b is turned off or the stop switch 51b is turned on. In this case, the end command may be output to the effect control device 117. In such a configuration, the production control device 117 determines that a predetermined interval (for example, every 0.6 seconds) is the launch timing of the sphere in the period from when the start command is received until the end command is received, What is necessary is just to comprise so that the number of shot balls may be counted at the timing.

  In each of the above embodiments, the main control device 110 is configured to output the firing control signal (firing pulse) to the effect control device 117, but the command corresponding to the firing control signal (that is, the firing timing). Command) may be output to the effect control device 117.

  Further, in each of the embodiments described above, the payout control device 111 is configured to output the firing permission signal to the main control device 110, but the payout control device 111 outputs the firing permission signal to the effect control device 117, and effects control is performed. The apparatus 117 may be configured to execute the same process as the launch control process of FIG. 17 to control the launch timing of the sphere.

  Alternatively, the payout control device 111 outputs a start command to the effect control device 117 when the touch sensor 51a is on and the stop switch 51b is off, and then the touch sensor 51a is off. And an end command may be output to the effect control device 117 when the stop switch 51b is turned off or the stop switch 51b is turned on. In such a configuration, the production control device 117 determines that a predetermined interval (for example, every 0.6 seconds) is the launch timing of the sphere in the period from when the start command is received until the end command is received, What is necessary is just to comprise so that the number of shot balls may be counted at the timing.

  Alternatively, the output from the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b is input to the effect control device 117. In the effect control device 117, after the condition that the touch sensor 51a is on and the stop switch 51b is off is satisfied, Thereafter, a predetermined interval (for example, every 0.6 seconds) is set in a period until the touch sensor 51a is turned off and the stop switch 51b is turned off or until the stop switch 51b is turned on. What is necessary is just to comprise so that it may be judged that it is the launch timing of a sphere and the number of shot spheres is counted at that timing.

  Further, in each of the above embodiments, the production control device 117 is configured to count the number of shot balls based on the launch control signal (launch pulse) output by the main control device 110 as a ball launch instruction. Instead of this firing control signal, the following control signal may be employed, and the production control device 117 may increment the number of fired balls by 1 each time the control signal is received.

  For example, a sensor that detects that a sphere has come into contact with the return ball prevention member 68 is provided, and the main controller 110 outputs a control signal in place of the launch control signal when the launch of the sphere is detected by this sensor. You may make it output to 117.

  Alternatively, a sensor capable of detecting a ball that has passed through the winning openings 63, 64, 65a and the out port 66 (that is, all the balls discharged from the game board 13) is provided, and the controller 110 uses this sensor to launch the ball. May be output to the effect control device 117 in place of the firing control signal. In such a case, the sensor may be provided at each of the prize winning openings 63, 64, 65a and the out opening 66, or may be provided at a merging point of the balls passing through the winning prize openings 63, 64, 65a and the out opening 66, respectively.

  Alternatively, a sensor is provided at a location where the fired sphere always passes (for example, between the rail 61 and the rail 62), and when the firing of the sphere (that is, the passage of the sphere) is detected by this sensor, the firing control signal A control signal in place of the above may be output to the effect control device 117.

  Further, in each of the above embodiments, the main control device 110 outputs a prize ball command to the payout control device 111 and the effect control device 117, but the main control device 110 sends the prize ball command to the payout control device 111. Each time the payout control device 111 receives a prize ball command, the effect control device 111 outputs the prize ball command or a corresponding command (ie, another command indicating the number of payout balls indicated by the prize ball command). It is good also as a structure output to 117.

  In each of the above embodiments, the number of acquired balls such as the total number of acquired balls 81a1 is displayed on the third symbol display device (acquired ball number display area 81a). (In other words, the number of balls paid out as prize balls) may be displayed. For example, you can display the total number of acquired balls (the number of balls acquired during a series of advantageous periods) and the number of balls that are paid out during a series of advantageous periods, The average value of the number of payout balls due to each jackpot generated during a series of advantageous states may be displayed together with the average value of the number of balls acquired for each jackpot.

  In each of the above embodiments, the number of acquired balls such as the total number of acquired balls 81a1 is displayed on the third symbol display device (acquired ball number display area 81a). The acquired number of balls may be displayed on the screen. Alternatively, a command indicating the number of each acquired ball is output to a hall computer that centrally manages the pachinko machines 10 in the hall, and via a hall computer, a data display installed above each pachinko machine 10 or a dedicated display It is good also as a structure displayed on this indicator. In addition, it is good also as a structure which calculates the number of various acquired balls with a hall computer. Or it is good also as a structure which outputs the data of the number of acquired balls so that data can be printed from the printer provided beside the pachinko machine 10, etc.

  Further, in each of the above embodiments, a numerical value (for example, the total number of acquired balls 81a1 or the number of acquired balls during this jackpot or the number of balls acquired by the player within a series of advantageous states (ie, the balance of the balls) , The average number of balls acquired during jackpots and the average number of balls acquired during short and long times) is displayed in the acquired number-of-balls display area 81a. However, the number of balls in a period not in an advantageous state (that is, in the normal mode) is displayed. It is good also as a structure which displays a balance. For example, in the normal mode, the balance of the sphere (that is, the number obtained by subtracting the number of shot balls from the number of paid-out balls) is displayed on the third symbol display device (for example, the acquired ball number display area 81a) and updated as needed. You may do it.

  In each of the above embodiments, the high-probability mode and the time reduction mode are included as a series of advantageous states. However, only the jackpot (special game state) may be advantageous. In such a case, a period of advantageous state is defined as a period when a jackpot (for example, a jackpot that occurs within a predetermined number of fluctuations) is satisfied when a predetermined condition is satisfied. What is necessary is just to comprise so that the number of acquired balls (namely, total acquisition number 81a1) in a period of an advantageous state, the average number of big hits, etc. may be acquired (calculated).

  Further, in each of the above embodiments, the advantageous state includes the high probability mode and the time reduction mode. However, the time reduction mode may be omitted, and the advantageous state may be the jackpot and the high probability mode.

  Further, in each of the above embodiments, the predetermined number of acquired balls displayed in the acquired number-of-plays display area 81a at the end of a series of advantageous state periods (the average number of acquired balls in the jackpot or the average number of acquired balls in the probability variation time short and medium) Etc.) is deleted after 5 seconds from the display, but may be displayed until the next jackpot occurs (that is, until the next advantageous state occurs). Moreover, it is good also as a structure displayed regularly (for example, at intervals of 20 seconds) during the period until the next big hit.

  Further, in the first embodiment, every time a series of advantageous period ends, the average number of acquired balls in jackpot (average value of the number of acquired balls in each jackpot that occurred during a series of advantageous states), It is configured to calculate and display the average number of acquired balls in the time of probability change (average value of the number of acquired balls in each high probability mode and each time shortening mode generated during a series of advantageous states). Instead of this, or in addition to this, the average value of the number of balls acquired in each jackpot (special game state) generated after the RAM 273 is initialized by power-on or the like, each high probability mode and each time reduction mode You may calculate and display the average value of the number of acquired balls in.

  The average value of the number of acquired balls in each jackpot generated after the RAM 273 is initialized by turning on the power, for example, is stored by accumulating the number of acquired balls in the jackpot generated after the RAM 273 is initialized by turning on the power. And a counter for counting the total number of jackpots that have occurred since the RAM 273 was initialized by turning on the power or the like may be provided to calculate and display an average value at a predetermined timing. Similarly, the average value of the number of acquired balls in each high probability mode and each time reduction mode generated after the RAM 273 is initialized by turning on the power is, for example, the high value generated after the RAM 273 is initialized by turning on the power. A memory for accumulating and storing the number of acquired balls in the probability mode and the time shortening mode, and for counting the total number of times of the high probability mode and the time shortening mode generated after the RAM 273 is initialized by power-on or the like. A counter may be provided so that the average value is calculated and displayed at a predetermined timing.

  In addition, as a display timing of these average values (that is, the average value of each acquired number of balls accumulated since the RAM 273 is initialized by power-on or the like), for example, the time when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player. There is a start timing of a customer waiting effect (title screen, demo screen) displayed when a predetermined time has elapsed. In this case, the display of each average value is continued while the customer waiting effect is displayed, so that the player can easily select the stand (pachinko machine 10) on which the player plays. Or you may make it display these average values regularly (for example, every 1 minute) also including the period when the player is performing a game.

  In addition, these average values (that is, the average value of each acquired number of balls accumulated since the initialization of the RAM 273 by turning on the power, etc.) are determined during the waiting for the stage (while the title screen and the demonstration screen are displayed). The button (for example, the frame button 22) may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when operated by the player. Alternatively, the average value of these may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while the player is operating (pressing) a predetermined button during the customer waiting effect. In addition, you may provide the button for exclusive use for displaying the average value of each acquired number of balls.

  In the first embodiment, when the high probability mode or the time shortening mode is ended according to the end condition defined by the number of executions of the variable display, the total number of acquired balls ( The number of acquired balls during a series of advantageous states is calculated and displayed. Instead, when the number of special figure holding balls N> 0 and at least one of the holding balls is selected at the timing when this series of advantageous period ends, , And display the number of acquired balls (the number of paid-out balls minus the number of fired balls) generated by the reserved ball to the total number of acquired balls calculated at the end of a series of advantageous period May be. The digestion period of a retention ball that occurs during a series of advantageous conditions is considered to be part of that series of advantageous conditions because the retention ball occurred during the series of advantageous conditions. be able to. Therefore, the number of acquired balls by jackpot generated by digesting the reserved balls can be recognized by the player in association with the total number of acquired balls during a series of advantageous states. Therefore, a player who has obtained a larger number of acquired balls by including the number of acquired balls by jackpot generated by digestion of the reserved balls in the total number of acquired balls during the series of advantageous states that ended immediately before. Can improve the player's satisfaction. Note that the number of acquired balls during the digestion period of the reserved balls generated during the series of advantageous states may be added to the total number of acquired balls during the series of advantageous states.

  Alternatively, after a timing when a series of advantageous period ends, a predetermined number (for example, 250) of spheres is targeted, and if a big hit is generated by at least one of the targeted spheres, the sphere The number of acquired balls in the jackpot generated by (the number obtained by subtracting the number of fired balls from the number of paid-out balls) may be added to the total number of acquired balls calculated at the end of a series of advantageous state periods. . The number of winning balls due to the jackpot from the timing when a series of advantageous period ends until a predetermined number of balls are consumed is also calculated for the player during the series of advantageous period ended immediately before. There is no sense of incongruity as part of the total number of acquired balls. Therefore, after the end timing of a series of advantageous state periods, the number of acquired balls due to jackpots that occurred during a period when a predetermined number of balls are consumed is included in the total number of acquired balls during the immediately preceding series of advantageous state periods As a result, the player can be impressed that a larger number of acquired balls has been obtained, and the player's satisfaction can be enhanced. Note that the number of acquired balls during the period when the “predetermined number” of balls is consumed may be added to the total number of acquired balls during a series of advantageous states.

  The “predetermined number” is preferably a numerical value (for example, 200, 150, 100, or the like) that is equal to or less than the number of spheres that can be stored in the upper plate 17. By setting the “predetermined number” to be equal to or less than the number of balls that can be stored in the upper plate 17, the period in which the player does not add balls to the upper plate 17 is the total number of acquired balls during a series of advantageous states. It is difficult to give the player a sense of incongruity with adding to the total number of acquired balls during the series of advantageous states that have just ended.

  In addition, after the end timing of a series of advantageous state periods, the number of winning balls due to the jackpot that occurred during the period when a predetermined number of balls are consumed is included in the total number of acquired balls during the immediately preceding period of advantageous state In the case of adopting the configuration, the number of winning balls in the jackpot caused by the holding balls generated during a period when a predetermined number of balls are consumed is added to the total number of balls acquired during a series of advantageous states. May be.

  In each of the above embodiments, the production control device 117 is in the high probability mode period (that is, from the start to the end of the high probability mode) based on the probability change start command and the probability change end command output from the main control device 110. It was configured to grasp. Instead, the effect control device 117 may grasp the period of the high probability mode based on the type command or the like.

  In other words, the production control device 117 can grasp that the game mode shifts to the high probability mode after the jackpot based on the type command indicating the probability variation jackpot, so the timing at which the jackpot ends is high for the production control device 117. It can be grasped (recognized) as the start of the probability mode. Then, the production control device 117 subsequently receives a type command indicating a jackpot (probability jackpot or normal jackpot) or the number of times the type command indicating a miss satisfies the end condition of the high probability mode (in each of the above embodiments, 10000 times), the variation time indicated by the variation pattern command corresponding to the type command (that is, the variation pattern command set based on the lottery performed with the same winning as the type command) has elapsed. The timing can be grasped as the end of the high probability mode, and thereby the period of the high probability mode (that is, from the start to the end of the high probability mode) can be grasped. The effect control device 117 can grasp the timing at which the jackpot ends based on a jackpot end command output from the main control device 110 as in the above embodiments, for example. Alternatively, the main control device 110 is configured to output a command indicating that to the effect control device 117 when the round ends during the jackpot, and the effect control device 117 ends the jackpot based on the command. You may make it grasp | ascertain a timing.

  Further, in each of the above embodiments, the production control device 117 is in the time reduction mode period (that is, from the start to the end of the time reduction mode) based on the short time start command and the short time end command output from the main control device 110. However, similar to the above-described determination of the period of the high probability mode, the presentation control device 117 may determine the period of the time reduction mode based on the type command or the like.

  In each of the above embodiments, the production control device 117 is configured to grasp (recognize) the end of the advantageous state based on the advantageous state end command output from the main control device 110. Instead, the production control device 117 counts the number of times that the type command indicating detachment satisfies the end condition of each mode in the high probability mode or the time reduction mode that can be grasped based on the type command (10000 in the above embodiment, respectively). Or 100 times), the timing at which the fluctuation time indicated by the fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the type command has elapsed may be recognized as the end of the advantageous state.

  In each of the above embodiments, each time the production control device 117 receives a firing control signal (firing pulse), the firing control signal interrupt process (see FIG. 32) is executed. The change of the control signal is monitored in the main process (see FIG. 22), and when the launch control signal is input (that is, when the signal rises high), the same process as the launch control signal interrupt process of FIG. You may comprise so that a process may be performed.

  In the launch control process (see FIG. 17) in each of the above embodiments, when the launch permission signal is input and the launch permission flag 203c is off (S621: Yes, S622: No), the ball feed control signal And a launch control signal are output (S625, S626), but S625 and S626 may not be executed. That is, when the launch permission signal is input and the launch permission flag 203c is off, the ball feed control signal and the launch control signal may not be output.

  Further, in the second and third embodiments, the “average number of acquired balls during probability variation time” is calculated as an average value of the number of acquired balls per one high probability mode or one time shortening mode. Similar to the modification of the first embodiment, the average value of the number of acquired balls per change display (that is, the second value) in each high probability mode or each time shortening mode that occurred during a series of advantageous states. The average number of balls acquired in the short and long time of the probability change).

  Further, in the second embodiment, while the frame button 22 is pressed (operated) during the customer waiting effect, the average number of balls acquired during the big hit and the average number of balls acquired during the short period of time for all probability changes are displayed. Although it is configured to display in the area 81a, the number of obtained balls is detected at the timing when the frame button 22 is pressed (that is, the effect control device 117 detects the rising from low to high of the signal input from the frame button 22). Display in the acquired ball number display area 81a for a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds). Alternatively, it is a predetermined period from the timing when the hand is released from the frame button 22 (that is, the timing when the production control device 117 detects the falling of the signal input from the frame button 22 from high to low). The acquired number of balls may be displayed in the acquired number of balls display area 81a (for example, for 5 seconds).

  Further, in the second embodiment, while the frame button 22 is pressed (operated) during the customer waiting effect, the average number of balls acquired during the big hit and the average number of balls acquired during the short period of time for all probability changes are displayed. Although it is configured to display in the area 81a, display and non-display of these acquired number of balls (the average number of acquired balls for the total hit and the average number of acquired balls for all probability change time), and the frame button 22 during the customer waiting effect It is good also as a structure switched whenever it is pressed down. That is, during the customer waiting effect, when the frame button 22 is pressed in a state where the number of acquired balls such as the average number of acquired balls is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the number of acquired balls is When the frame button 22 is pressed while the acquired number of balls is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the customer waiting effect, displayed on the three symbol display device 81 (acquired ball number display area 81a). May be configured to erase the displayed number of acquired balls.

  Further, in the second embodiment, when the customer waiting effect is being performed and the frame button 22 is pressed, the average number of balls acquired during the big hit and the average number of balls acquired during the short period of time are displayed. Although it is set as a condition to be displayed on 81a, it is configured to display these acquired number of balls in the acquired number-of-balls display area 81a when the frame button 22 is pressed even when the effect is not in the customer waiting stage. Also good. For example, a frame button is displayed during a period in which the total number of acquired balls, the average number of hits during the jackpot, and the number of balls acquired during the short period of time are displayed in the acquired number-of-plays display area 81a at the end of a series of advantageous states. When 22 is pressed, in addition to the number of acquired balls (total acquired number of balls, average number of acquired balls per jackpot, number of balls acquired during short-term probability change), the average acquired balls per total jackpot at the operation timing of the frame button 22 You may comprise so that a number and the average number of acquired balls may be displayed.

  Moreover, in the said 2nd Embodiment, in order to display the frame button 22 for making a player operate at the time of a production | presentation in the total acquisition number display area 81a, it displays the average number of acquired balls in total hit and the average number of acquired balls in all probability change time. However, a dedicated button or switch for displaying the average number of acquired balls per hit and the average number of acquired short and medium average times in the total acquired number display area 81a is used. It is good also as a structure to provide. By providing a dedicated button, even during the production using the operation of the frame button 22, the average number of acquired balls and the average number of acquired balls during the total probability change time are displayed in the total acquired number display area 81 a. Is possible.

  Further, in the second embodiment, when the frame button 22 is pressed during the customer waiting effect, an area for displaying the number of acquired balls (average number of acquired balls per total size, average number of acquired balls during all probability change time) is displayed. Although the same area as the display area of each acquired ball number during the execution of the game (that is, the acquired ball number display area 81a), the display area of the acquired ball number when the frame button 22 is pressed during the customer waiting effect is displayed. It may be a region different from the acquired ball number display region 81a. For example, the area where the number of acquired balls is displayed when the frame button 22 is pressed during the customer waiting effect may be the center area of the screen of the third symbol display device 81. The number of acquired balls, such as the average number of balls acquired in every hit and the average number of balls acquired during all time, can be an index for the player to select a more advantageous base for himself. By displaying in the center area of the screen of the symbol display device 81, the player can easily confirm the number of acquired balls.

  Further, in the second embodiment, when the frame button 22 is pressed during the customer waiting effect, the average number of hit balls during the total hit and the average number of shots obtained during the short period of time are displayed in the acquired ball number display area 81a. However, the contents displayed in the acquired ball number display area 81a when the frame button 22 is pressed during the guest waiting effect include the average acquired ball number for the total hit and the average acquired ball number for all probability variation time short and medium. Without limitation, the number of acquired balls of other types may be displayed. For example, when the frame button 22 is pressed during the customer waiting effect, the total number of balls acquired during the immediately preceding advantageous period, the average number of hits during jackpot, A number or the like may be displayed. Alternatively, the number of acquired balls such as the total number of acquired balls counted during a series of advantageous states is stored for each of a plurality of advantageous states, and The total number of acquired balls counted during a series of advantageous states may be displayed in a table or graph.

  Further, in the second embodiment, the number of acquired balls limited to the big hit during a series of advantageous states is stored in the first acquired ball number cumulative memory 273aa after the RAM 273 is initialized by power-on or the like. Accumulated and stored, and the number of times that a big hit has occurred in a series of advantageous states is accumulated and stored in the big hit number cumulative memory 273ac after the RAM 273 is initialized by turning on the power, etc., and the first acquisition Based on the value stored in the ball number cumulative memory 273aa and the value stored in the jackpot count cumulative memory 273ac, the average number of hit balls is calculated. Instead, each time a series of advantageous state periods ends, a set of the value stored in the advantageous state big hit medium acquired ball number memory 273h and the value of the big hit number counter 273b at that time is a set. When the frame button 22 is pressed during the customer waiting effect, the sum of the values in the advantageous state big hit number memory 273h in each series of advantageous states is stored in each series. By dividing by the sum of the big hit number counter 273b in the advantageous state, the average number of hit balls in the whole big hit may be calculated.

  Alternatively, each time a series of advantageous period ends, the value of the average number of balls acquired in S1270 and the value of the number of hits counter 273b at that time are stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 273 as a set. Then, when the frame button 22 is pressed during the customer waiting effect, the value of the average number of hit balls during the series of advantageous states and the value of the jackpot counter 273b are multiplied by the series of each round. By calculating the value of the number of acquired balls only during the jackpot in the period of advantageous state, and dividing the calculated value by the sum of the number of jackpot counters 273b in the series of advantageous states for each round, the average acquisition per total jackpot The number of balls may be calculated.

  In the second embodiment, the number of acquired balls only in the high probability mode or the time reduction mode in the series of advantageous states is set to the second time after the RAM 273 is initialized by power-on or the like. Accumulated and stored in the accumulated number-of-acquisition memory 273ab, the number of times that the high probability mode or the time shortening mode has occurred during a series of advantageous states is displayed. Accumulated and stored in the number-of-times accumulating memory 273ac, and based on the value stored in the second acquired number-of-balls accumulating memory 273ab and the value stored in the probability-change-time-short-time accumulated memory 273ad, It was set as the structure which calculates. Instead of this, it is also possible to calculate the total probability varying short and medium average acquired number of balls in the same manner as the above-mentioned total hit average average acquired number of balls.

  Further, in the second embodiment, when the frame button 22 is pressed during the customer waiting effect, the average number of hit balls during the total hit and the average number of shots obtained during the short period of time are displayed in the acquired ball number display area 81a. However, regardless of pressing of the frame button 22, the number of acquired balls can be set at a predetermined timing, for example, every fixed time (for example, every 1 minute or every 3 minutes), or a series of advantageous states. It is good also as a structure which is displayed on the acquired number-of-balls display area 81a every time is completed.

  Moreover, in the said 3rd Embodiment, it was set as the structure which complete | finishes the addition period at the timing which the 150th ball | bowl was launched from the start of the addition period, but it was launched after the 150th sphere was launched. It is good also as a structure which waits for the period (for example, 5 second) anticipated that a ball | bowl reaches | attains the 1st entrance 64, and complete | finishes an additional period. Alternatively, if a holding ball is generated during the addition period, a period during which the holding ball generated during the addition period is digested even after 150 balls have been launched since the addition period started. Alternatively, the additional period may be terminated after waiting.

  In the third embodiment, the value of the acquired number-of-balls memory 273g during the advantageous state is updated even during the additional period. However, the value of the acquired number-of-balls memory 273g during the advantageous state may not be updated. In other words, the number of acquired balls during the additional period may not be included in the number of acquired balls during a series of advantageous periods. In such a case, the processing of S3481 in the payout ball count processing (see FIG. 44) in the third embodiment and the processing of S3503 in the firing control signal interrupt processing (see FIG. 45) may be omitted. Good.

  In the third embodiment, the period from the end of the series of advantageous states to the launch of 150 balls is defined as the additional period. However, the additional period is determined from the end of the series of advantageous states. The number of fired spheres is not particularly limited. For example, a numerical value such as 100, 200, or 250 may be adopted. In this case also, it is preferable that the numerical value is equal to or less than the number of spheres that can be stored in the upper plate 17, as in the third embodiment.

  In the third embodiment, the period from the end of the series of advantageous states to the launch of 150 balls is defined as the additional period. However, the additional period is determined from the end of the series of advantageous states. The number of fired spheres is not particularly limited. For example, a period after a series of advantageous states ends (for example, 5 seconds or 10 seconds) may be employed.

  Alternatively, when there is a holding ball at the timing when a series of advantageous period ends (that is, the number of special figure holding balls N> 0), the period during which the holding ball is consumed may be set as the additional period. In such a case, if there is a holding ball in which at least one jackpot is selected among the holding balls at the timing when the series of advantageous period ends, the series of advantageous period will be extended. . The digestion period of a retention ball that occurs during a series of advantageous conditions is considered to be part of that series of advantageous conditions because the retention ball occurred during the series of advantageous conditions. be able to. Thus, when there is a big hitting ball in the holding ball, there is an additional period that is a digestion period of the holding ball and an extension of a series of advantageous periods based on the big hit that occurred during the additional period. Since it becomes easy for the player to relate, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable with the extension of a series of advantageous state periods, and to prevent the interest of the game from being impaired due to the uncomfortable feeling.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, although it was comprised so that a winning to the 1st entrance 64 and the passage of the 2nd entrance 67 might be suspended up to 4 times, respectively, the maximum number of times of suspension is limited to 4 times. It may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). In addition, the number of times the variable display is held based on the winning at the first entrance 64 is different for the part of the third symbol display device 81 by a number or by dividing the number of four divided areas by the number of times of the hold. It may be displayed in a mode (for example, color or lighting pattern), and a light emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first symbol display device 37, and the number of holding times is notified by the light emitting member. You may do it.

  In addition, as shown in the above embodiment, the variable display, which is a kind of dynamic display, is not limited to the one that scrolls the symbol as identification information in the vertical direction on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, It may be performed by moving and displaying a symbol along a predetermined route such as a direction or an L shape. In addition, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the display of variation of the symbol. For example, one or a plurality of characters may be displayed in various manners together with the symbol or displayed in a variety of manners separately from the symbol. The effect display etc. which are displayed are also included. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

  In the above embodiment, the effect control device 117 ends the change time when the value of the change time counter (not shown) is “0” in S1246 of the display effect process (see FIG. 24). However, the main control device 110 outputs a stop command at the timing of setting the stop display in S309 (see FIG. 10), and the effect control device 117 ends the variable time upon receipt of the stop command. The structure which determines with having been carried out may be sufficient.

  You may implement this invention in the pachinko machine etc. of a type different from the said embodiment. For example, the present invention may be applied to a so-called second type pachinko gaming machine having a winning device having a special area such as a V zone. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, the game machine may be implemented as another game machine such as an alepacchi or a sparrow ball.

  You may implement this invention in the pachinko machine etc. of a type different from the said embodiment. For example, once a big hit, a pachinko machine that raises the expected value of the big hit until a big hit state occurs (for example, two times or three times) including that (for example, a two-time right item, a three-time right item) May also be implemented. Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a special area such as a V-zone and has a special gaming state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, the game machine may be implemented as various game machines such as an alepatchi, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating a control lever in a state where a symbol effective line is determined by inserting coins, and a symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating a stop button. Is. Accordingly, the basic concept of the slot machine is that it is provided with a display device for confirming and displaying the identification information after variably displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and resulting from the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variation display of the identification information is started, and the variation display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific condition. In this case, the game medium is typically a coin, medal, etc. Take as an example.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided that displays a symbol after a symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols is variably displayed, and has a handle for launching a ball. What is not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of spheres based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the change of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or With the passage of time, the variation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the determined symbol at the time of stoppage is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large amount of balls are paid out to the lower tray.

  The concept of various inventions included in the gaming machine of the present invention and the various embodiments described above will be shown below.

  Control means for controlling a game based on the use of the game medium; and a payout means for paying out a number of game media according to the established condition when a predetermined condition is established during the game controlled by the control means. A medium acquisition number acquisition means for acquiring a medium acquisition number that is a difference between a game medium used in the game and a game medium paid out by the payout means, and the medium acquisition number acquisition means. A gaming machine A1 comprising medium acquisition number output means for displaying or outputting a value based on the number of acquired media.

  According to the gaming machine A1, the medium acquisition number that is the difference between the used game medium and the game medium paid out by the payout means is acquired by the medium acquisition number acquisition means and displayed or output by the medium acquisition number output means. . Therefore, in games where game media is used on the one hand and game media is paid out on the other hand, the number of game media actually acquired by the player, not the number of game media that the player has apparently acquired through payout (In other words, the player can feel the difference between the used game media and the game media paid out by the payout means, or the number of acquired media as the balance). In general, the game media used to play a game are paid by the player, so that the player can realize the number of media acquired in the game performed using the game media. It is possible to enhance the interest of games (games performed using game media obtained by paying consideration).

  In the above embodiment, the main control device 110 is exemplified as the control means of the gaming machine A1, and the payout control device 111 is exemplified as the payout means of the gaming machine A1. In the above embodiment, as the medium acquisition number acquisition means of the gaming machine A1, the processes of S1262, S1270, S1271 in the acquired ball number display process (see FIG. 25), and S1483 in the payout ball number counting process (see FIG. 31). , S1484, S1489, and the processes of S1503, S1504, and S1509 in the launch control signal interrupt process (see FIG. 32). Moreover, in the said embodiment, the process of S1263, S1266, and S1272 in an acquired ball number display process (refer FIG. 25) is illustrated as a medium acquisition number output means of gaming machine A1.

  The gaming machine A1 includes launching means for launching game media for use in a game, and the medium acquisition number obtaining means uses information based on launching by the launching means and information based on payout by the payout means. The game machine A2 is characterized in that the number of acquired media is acquired.

  According to the gaming machine A2, since the number of acquired media is acquired based on the information based on the launch by the launching means and the information based on the payout by the paying means, the number of acquired media can be acquired with suitable accuracy. The reliability of the number of acquired media displayed or output can be improved. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from having distrust in the number of acquired media displayed or output.

  In the above embodiment, the launching control device 112 is exemplified as the launching means of the gaming machine A2.

  The gaming machine A2 includes operation means and operation detection means for detecting that the operation means is operated by a player, and the launching means launches a game medium based on detection of an operation by the operation detection means. The medium acquisition number acquisition means acquires the medium acquisition number using information based on detection of an operation by the operation detection means and information based on payout by the payout means. A gaming machine A3.

  According to the gaming machine A3, a game medium is launched based on the detection of the operation of the operation means by the operation detection means, and the number of acquired media is information based on the detection of the operation by the operation detection means and information based on the payout by the payout means Therefore, the number of acquired media can be acquired with suitable accuracy, and the reliability of the number of acquired media displayed or output can be improved. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from having distrust in the number of acquired media displayed or output. In addition, since the operation of the operation means is performed by the player, the player can realize the number of media acquired in the game (that is, the game performed by the player) performed based on the operation of the operation means by the player. , You can enhance the fun of the games you play.

  In the above embodiment, the operation handle 51 is exemplified as the operation means of the gaming machine A3, and the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are exemplified as the operation detection means of the gaming machine A3.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the control means is advantageous compared to the normal state when a lottery means for performing a lottery when a start condition is satisfied and when a predetermined result is selected by the lottery means. An advantageous state generating means for generating an advantageous state, wherein the medium acquisition number acquisition means is a series of advantageous state periods formed from one or more advantageous states generated by the advantageous state generating means; A gaming machine A4, which acquires the number of acquired media.

  According to the gaming machine A4, the medium acquisition number during the series of advantageous states formed from one or a plurality of advantageous states is acquired by the medium acquisition number acquisition means, so during the series of advantageous states The medium acquisition number in is displayed or output by the medium acquisition number output means. Since the advantageous state is an advantageous state over the normal state and is also advantageous to the player, the balance (that is, the number of acquired media) of the game medium during a series of advantageous states caused by the player's game. Is information in which a player who pays for a game medium used for a game is particularly interested. Therefore, if the player can feel that he / she has obtained a sufficient number of media during the series of advantageous states by displaying or outputting the number of media acquired during the series of advantageous states The player's satisfaction with the game is greatly increased.

  On the other hand, if the player feels that the number of media gained during the series of advantageous states is insufficient, he can be suspicious of the nail adjustment, and the player will be Can give a chance to change. Therefore, it is possible to give a possibility of avoiding a situation where the player keeps playing with an unfavorable nail adjustment game machine, and it is possible to prevent the player from being frustrated. Further, the number of acquired media displayed or output by the number of acquired media output means can be an index for the player to select a more advantageous gaming machine by himself, so that the player can select a gaming machine that he can satisfy himself. It is possible to play a game that you are satisfied with.

  The “advantageous state” in the gaming machine A4 includes both the jackpot (special gaming state) in the above embodiment and a gaming mode (for example, a high probability mode or a time reduction mode) advantageous compared to the normal gaming mode. .

  In the above embodiment, the lottery means of the gaming machine A4 is exemplified by the process of S603 in the start winning process (see FIG. 16). Further, in the above embodiment, as the advantageous state generation means of the gaming machine A4, the big hit generation by the jackpot processing (see FIG. 14), or the probability changing flag 203a or the short-time flag 203b in the jackpot processing S435 or S457 is turned on. The occurrence of the high probability mode or the time shortening mode due to being set to exemplifies.

  In the gaming machine A4, the control means includes a change display executing means for executing a change display of the identification information when a start condition is satisfied, and the advantageous state generating means is configured to output at least the predetermined result by the lottery means. Special game state generation for generating a special game state as the advantageous state over a predetermined special game state period after the end of the variation display by the variation display execution means when the first result which is a part is selected The gaming machine comprises special game state occurrence number storage means for storing the number of special game states generated by the special game state generation means during the series of advantageous states. The medium acquisition number acquisition means is the medium when the special gaming state is generated by the special gaming state generation means during the series of advantageous states. A special game state medium acquisition number acquisition unit for acquiring the acquisition number is included, and the medium acquisition number output unit includes the medium acquisition number acquired by the special game state medium acquisition number acquisition unit, and the special game. Based on the number of times of the special gaming state stored in the state occurrence number storage means, the number of acquired media per time of the special gaming state during the series of advantageous state is displayed or output. A gaming machine A5 characterized by this.

  According to the gaming machine A5, the number of acquired media per special game state generated during a series of advantageous state periods is displayed or output, so that the player can experience a series of advantageous state periods experienced by the player. In the middle, you can feel the number of media acquired in one special game state. Generally, in the special game state, the number of game media to be paid out during that period is almost constant, whereas the number of game media used in that period is indefinite, so in the special game state period The number of acquired media mainly varies depending on the number of used game media. That is, the number of acquired media in the special gaming state period mainly varies depending on how the nail is adjusted. Therefore, the player guesses a situation that may be advantageous or disadvantageous to himself, such as how to adjust the nail, by referring to the number of medium acquisitions per special gaming state that occurred during a series of advantageous states. be able to. As a result, it is possible to give a possibility to avoid the situation where the player continues to play the game with an unfavorable nail adjustment game machine, so that the player can be satisfied and perform a satisfactory game. , Can enhance the fun of the game.

  In the above embodiment, the fluctuation display execution means of the gaming machine A5 is exemplified by fluctuation processing (see FIG. 10), and the special gaming state generation means of the gaming machine A5 is a jackpot by jackpot processing (see FIG. 14). The occurrence of is illustrated. In the above embodiment, the special game state occurrence number storage means of the gaming machine A5 is exemplified by the big hit number counter 273b, and the special game state medium acquisition number acquisition means of the gaming machine A5 is the payout ball count processing. The process of S1483 in (refer FIG. 31) and the process of S1503 in the launch control signal interruption process (refer FIG. 32) are illustrated.

  In the gaming machine A4 or A5, the control means includes a change display executing means for executing a change display of the identification information when a start condition is satisfied, and the advantageous state generating means is configured to output the predetermined result by the lottery means. Special game that generates a special game state as the advantageous state over a predetermined special game state period after the end of the change display by the change display execution means when the first result that is at least a part of is selected The medium acquisition number acquisition unit is configured to include a state generation unit, wherein the medium acquisition number acquisition unit is in a period of the series of advantageous states and the special game state is generated by the special game state generation unit. A special game state medium acquisition number acquisition unit for acquiring the medium acquisition number in the case of being generated, and the gaming machine is generated by the special game state generation unit. Special game state occurrence number accumulation storage means for accumulating and storing the number of times of the special game state, and in the special game state for accumulating and storing the medium acquisition number acquired by the medium acquisition number acquisition means during the special game state Medium acquisition number accumulation storage means, and the medium acquisition number output means is stored in the medium acquisition number accumulation storage means in the special gaming state and in the special gaming state occurrence number accumulation storage means. The gaming machine A6 is characterized in that it displays or outputs the number of acquired media per time in the special gaming state based on the number of times of the special gaming state.

  According to the gaming machine A6, since the number of acquired media per special game state, which is one of the advantageous states, is displayed or output, the player can acquire the number of media acquired in one special game state. Can be realized. Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to grasp the number of media that the player can acquire per special game state, and the player can more easily feel the balance of the game media. In addition, since the number of media acquired per special game state can be an index for the player to select a gaming machine in the hall, the player can respond to his / her request by displaying or outputting this numerical value. A gaming machine can be selected.

  In the above embodiment, the fluctuation display execution means of the gaming machine A6 is exemplified by fluctuation processing (see FIG. 10), and the special gaming state generation means of the gaming machine A6 is jackpot processing by the jackpot processing (see FIG. 14). The occurrence of is illustrated.

  In any one of the gaming machines A4 to A6, the advantageous state generating means is configured to play a game mode at a predetermined timing when a second result that is at least a part of the predetermined result is selected by the lottery means. Including an advantageous mode generating means for generating a mode more advantageous than the normal mode over the predetermined advantageous mode period as the advantageous state, and the gaming machine has the advantage during the series of advantageous states. An advantageous mode generation number storage means for storing the number of advantageous modes generated by the mode generation means, wherein the medium acquisition number acquisition means is in the period of the series of advantageous states and the advantageous mode generation means; The medium acquisition number output means for acquiring the medium acquisition number when the advantageous mode is generated by the medium is obtained. Is based on the number of medium acquisitions acquired by the medium acquisition number acquisition means during the advantageous mode and the number of the advantageous modes stored in the advantageous mode occurrence number storage means during the series of advantageous states. The gaming machine A7 is characterized in that it displays or outputs the number of acquired media per time in the advantageous mode.

  According to the gaming machine A7, since the number of medium acquisitions per advantageous mode that occurred during a series of advantageous states is displayed or output, the player can play during the series of advantageous states that he / she experiences. It is possible to realize the number of mediums acquired in one advantageous mode. Therefore, the player can easily grasp the number of media that the player can acquire per advantageous mode, and the balance of the game media can be more easily realized. In addition, since the number of acquired media per advantageous mode can be an index for the player to select a gaming machine in the hall, the player can select a gaming machine according to his / her request. In the gaming machine A7, the “second result” may be the same as or different from the “first result”.

  In the above embodiment, as the advantageous mode generation means of the gaming machine A7, the high probability mode by the fact that the probability variation flag 203a or the time reduction flag 203b is set to ON in S435 or S457 of the jackpot process (see FIG. 14). Or generation | occurrence | production of time reduction mode is illustrated. In the above embodiment, the advantageous mode occurrence number storage means of the gaming machine A7 is exemplified by the probable variation end number counter 273f, and the advantageous mode medium acquisition number acquisition means of the gaming machine A7 is the payout ball count processing ( The process of S1489 in FIG. 31) and the process of S1509 in the launch control signal interrupt process (see FIG. 32) are exemplified.

  In any one of the gaming machines A4 to A7, the advantageous state generating means is a game mode at a predetermined timing when the lottery means selects a second result that is at least a part of the predetermined result. Including an advantageous mode generating means for generating a mode more advantageous than the normal mode over the predetermined advantageous mode period as the advantageous state, and the medium acquisition number acquiring means is configured to be in the period of the series of advantageous states. And an advantageous mode medium acquisition number acquisition means for acquiring the medium acquisition number when the advantageous mode is generated by the advantageous mode generation means, wherein the gaming machine is configured to generate the advantageous mode. The advantageous mode occurrence number accumulation storage means for accumulating and storing the number of advantageous mode times generated by the means, and the medium acquisition number acquisition means during the advantageous mode. An advantageous mode medium acquisition number accumulating storage means for accumulating and storing the obtained medium acquisition number, and the medium acquisition number output means includes a medium acquisition number stored in the advantageous mode medium acquisition number accumulation storage means; A gaming machine that displays or outputs the number of mediums acquired per advantageous mode based on the number of advantageous modes stored in the advantageous mode occurrence number accumulating storage means. A8.

  According to the gaming machine A8, the number of acquired media per advantageous mode, which is one of the advantageous states, is displayed or output, so that the player can realize the number of media acquired in one advantageous mode. can do. Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to know the number of media that the player can acquire per advantageous mode, and the player can more easily feel the balance of the game media. In addition, since the number of media acquired per advantageous mode can be an index for the player to select a gaming machine in the hall, the numerical value is displayed or output so that the player can play the game according to his / her request. The machine can be selected. In the gaming machine A8, the “second result” may be the same as or different from the “first result”.

  In the above embodiment, the advantageous mode generation means of the gaming machine A8 is a high-probability mode in which the probability variation flag 203a or the short-and-short-term flag 203b is set to ON in S435 or S457 of the jackpot process (see FIG. 14). Or generation | occurrence | production of time reduction mode is illustrated.

  In any one of the gaming machines A4 to A8, the medium acquisition number acquisition unit is configured to acquire the medium in a series of advantageous state periods formed from one or more advantageous states generated by the advantageous state generation unit. When the occurrence of an advantageous state by the advantageous state generation means occurs within a predetermined period after the end of the advantageous state period, the medium acquisition number is acquired during the advantageous state period. The gaming machine A9 is characterized in that it is added to the number of acquired media acquired during the series of advantageous states.

  According to the gaming machine A9, the sum of the number of medium acquisitions during a series of advantageous states and the number of medium acquisitions in the advantageous state that occurred within a predetermined period after the end of the period is acquired by the medium acquisition number acquisition means. These are displayed or output by the medium acquisition number output means. The number of media acquisitions in the advantageous state that occurred during a given period after the series of advantageous state periods can be easily recognized in relation to the media acquisition number during the series of advantageous state periods, so that a larger number of media acquisitions can be obtained. The player can be impressed and the satisfaction of the player can be enhanced.

  The “predetermined period” in the gaming machine A9 may be, for example, a preset period (for example, 3 minutes), or a period during which the variable display held during the advantageous state is consumed. Alternatively, it is intended to include a period required to consume a predetermined number of game media.

  In any one of the gaming machines A4 to A9, the control means includes a fluctuation display execution means for executing a fluctuation display of the identification information when a starting condition is satisfied, and the advantageous state generation means is configured to When a second result, which is at least a part of the predetermined result, is selected, a game mode is generated at a predetermined timing over the predetermined advantageous mode period as a mode more advantageous than the normal mode. An advantageous mode generating means is configured to store the number of variable displays executed by the variable display executing means in the advantageous modes generated by the advantageous mode generating means during the series of advantageous states. An advantageous mode fluctuation number storage means, and the medium acquisition number acquisition means is in the advantageous mode during the series of advantageous states. And a medium acquisition number output means for acquiring the medium acquisition number during the advantageous mode, wherein the medium acquisition number output means includes the medium acquisition number acquired by the medium acquisition number acquisition means during the advantageous mode, and Based on the number of times of variable display stored in the number of times of change during mode storage, the medium per change display during the series of advantageous states and in the advantageous mode A gaming machine A10 that displays or outputs the number of acquisitions.

  According to the gaming machine A10, since the number of medium acquisitions per time during the series of advantageous states and in the advantageous mode is displayed or outputted, the player can In the advantageous mode during a series of experienced advantageous states, it is possible to realize the number of medium acquisitions that can be obtained per change display (that is, once the start condition is satisfied). Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to grasp the number of media that the player can acquire per change display in the advantageous mode and in the advantageous mode. It is easier to realize the balance. In addition, the number of medium acquisitions per change display during a series of advantageous states and in the advantageous mode can be an index for the player to select a gaming machine in the hall. A person can select a gaming machine according to his / her request. In the gaming machine A10, the “second result” may be the same as or different from the “first result”.

  In any one of the gaming machines A4 to A10, the control means includes a fluctuation display execution means for executing a fluctuation display of the identification information when a start condition is satisfied, and the advantageous state generation means is configured by the lottery means, When a second result, which is at least a part of the predetermined result, is selected, a game mode is generated at a predetermined timing over the predetermined advantageous mode period as a mode more advantageous than the normal mode. An advantageous mode generation means, wherein the medium acquisition number acquisition means is in the advantageous mode generated by the advantageous mode generation means during the series of advantageous states; and A medium acquisition number acquisition unit in a second advantageous mode for acquiring the medium acquisition number when the variable display is executed by the variable display execution unit; The gaming machine includes an advantageous mode variation number accumulation storage unit that accumulates and stores the number of times of variation display executed by the variation display execution unit in the advantageous mode generated by the advantageous mode generation unit; Second advantageous mode medium acquisition number accumulating storage means for accumulating and storing the medium acquisition number acquired by the two advantageous mode medium acquisition number acquisition means, wherein the medium acquisition number output means comprises the second The variable display during the advantageous mode based on the number of medium acquisitions stored in the medium acquisition number accumulating storage means during the advantageous mode and the number of times of the variable display stored in the variable number of times accumulating storage means during the advantageous mode. The game machine A11 is characterized in that it displays or outputs the number of acquired media per time.

  According to the gaming machine A11, the number of medium acquisitions per change display in the advantageous mode, which is one of the advantageous states, is displayed or output. It is possible to realize the number of acquired media that can be acquired (that is, once the start condition is satisfied). Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to grasp the number of media that the player can acquire per change display in the advantageous mode, and the player can more easily feel the balance of the game media. In addition, since the number of media acquired per change display in the advantageous mode can be an index for the player to select a gaming machine in the hall, the player can display his / her own numerical value to display his / her own value. It is possible to select a gaming machine according to the request. In the gaming machine A11, the “second result” may be the same as or different from the “first result”.

  A gaming machine A12 according to any one of the gaming machines A1 to A11, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and a ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in an operation port disposed at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning a prize (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display device is confirmed and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which values (including data written on magnetic cards as well as premium balls) are given.

  A gaming machine A13 according to any one of the gaming machines A1 to A11, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, examples of the game media include coins and medals.

  Any one of the gaming machines A1 to A11, wherein the gaming machine is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the operation of the identification information, the change of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed Special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stoppage is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.

  Control means for controlling a game based on the use of the game medium; and a payout means for paying out a number of game media according to the established condition when a predetermined condition is established during the game controlled by the control means. In a gaming machine comprising: a medium acquisition number acquisition means for acquiring a medium acquisition number that is a difference between a game medium used in the game and a game medium paid out by the payout means; and a second operable by the player A medium acquisition number output for displaying or outputting a value based on the medium acquisition number acquired by the medium acquisition number acquisition means when the player operates the operation means and the second operation means during a predetermined period A gaming machine B1 comprising means.

  According to the gaming machine B1, the medium acquisition number that is the difference between the used game medium and the game medium paid out by the payout means is acquired by the medium acquisition number acquisition means, and the acquired medium acquisition number is a predetermined value. When the second operation means is operated by the player during the period, it is displayed or output by the medium acquisition number output means. Therefore, in games where game media is used on the one hand and game media is paid out on the other hand, the number of game media actually acquired by the player, not the number of game media that the player has apparently acquired through payout A value based on (that is, the difference between the game media used and the game media paid out by the payout means or the media acquisition number which is the balance) can be reported to the player at a timing desired by the player in a predetermined period. it can. The value based on the number of acquired media can be used as an index for the player to select a more advantageous stand (game machine) by himself / herself, and is therefore displayed by the player operating the second operating means as necessary. Based on the value (value based on the number of acquired media), it is possible to select a table that is satisfactory to itself. Thereby, since the game which he can satisfy can be performed, the interest of the game which a player himself pays a price can be enhanced.

  In the above embodiment, the main control device 110 is exemplified as the control means of the gaming machine B1, and the payout control device 111 is exemplified as the payout means of the gaming machine B1. Moreover, in the said embodiment, the process of S2605 and S2606 in the acquired number-of-acquisition display process during a customer waiting effect (see FIG. 38) is exemplified as the medium acquisition number acquisition means of the gaming machine B1. Moreover, the frame button 22 is illustrated as a 2nd operation means of game machine B1. In the above embodiment, the medium acquisition number output means of the gaming machine B1 is exemplified by the processing of S2607 in the number-of-acquisition ball display processing during the customer waiting effect (see FIG. 38).

  The gaming machine B1 includes launching means for launching game media for use in a game, and the medium acquisition number obtaining means uses information based on launching by the launching means and information based on payout by the payout means. The game machine B2 is characterized in that the number of acquired media is acquired.

  According to the gaming machine B2, since the number of acquired media is acquired based on the information based on the launching by the launching means and the information based on the payout by the paying out means, the number of acquired media can be acquired with suitable accuracy. The reliability of the number of acquired media displayed or output can be improved. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from having distrust in the number of acquired media displayed or output.

  In the above embodiment, the launch control device 112 is exemplified as the launching means of the gaming machine B2.

  The gaming machine B2 includes operation means and operation detection means for detecting that the operation means is operated by a player, and the launching means launches a game medium based on detection of an operation by the operation detection means. The medium acquisition number acquisition means acquires the medium acquisition number using information based on detection of an operation by the operation detection means and information based on payout by the payout means. A gaming machine B3 characterized by this.

  According to the gaming machine B3, a game medium is launched based on the detection of the operation of the operation means by the operation detection means, and the number of acquired media is information based on the detection of the operation by the operation detection means and information based on the payout by the payout means Therefore, the number of acquired media can be acquired with suitable accuracy, and the reliability of the number of acquired media displayed or output can be improved. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from having distrust in the number of acquired media displayed or output. In addition, since the operation of the operation means is performed by the player, the player can realize the number of media acquired in the game (that is, the game performed by the player) performed based on the operation of the operation means by the player. , You can enhance the fun of the games you play.

  In the above embodiment, the operation handle 51 is exemplified as the operation means of the gaming machine B3, and the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are exemplified as the operation detection means of the gaming machine B3.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B3, a predetermined image display means for displaying a predetermined image when no game is played is provided, and the medium acquisition number output means displays the predetermined image on the predetermined image display means. The predetermined period is set as the predetermined period, and when the second operation unit is operated by the player during the predetermined period, a value based on the medium acquisition number acquired by the medium acquisition number acquisition unit is set. A gaming machine B4 characterized by being displayed or output.

  According to the gaming machine B4, when the second operation means is operated by the player, the period for displaying or outputting the value based on the number of acquired media is determined by the predetermined image display means when the game is not performed. Since the image is displayed, it is displayed or output if the second operating means is operated on a vacant table (a table on which nobody is playing and a predetermined image is displayed). Based on the value based on the number of acquired media, it is possible to select a table that is satisfactory to itself. Thereby, since the game which he can satisfy can be performed, the interest of the game which a player himself pays a price can be enhanced.

  In any of the gaming machines B1 to B4, the control means is advantageous over the normal state when a lottery means for performing a lottery when a start condition is satisfied and when a predetermined result is selected by the lottery means. An advantageous state generating means for generating an advantageous state, wherein the medium acquisition number acquisition means is a series of advantageous state periods formed from one or more advantageous states generated by the advantageous state generating means; A gaming machine B5, which acquires the number of acquired media.

  According to the gaming machine B5, the medium acquisition number during the series of advantageous states formed from one or a plurality of advantageous states is acquired by the medium acquisition number acquisition means, so during the series of advantageous states The number of acquired media in the medium can be displayed or output by the medium acquired number output means. The advantageous state is a state that is more advantageous than the normal state and is also advantageous to the player, so that the player can balance the game media during the series of such advantageous states (that is, the number of acquired media). By displaying and referring to the value based on the table, it becomes possible to select a more advantageous stand (game machine) by itself.

  The “advantageous state” in the gaming machine B5 includes both a jackpot (special game state) in the above embodiment and a game mode (for example, a high probability mode or a time reduction mode) advantageous compared to the normal game mode. .

  In the above embodiment, the lottery means of the gaming machine B5 is exemplified by the process of S603 in the start winning process (see FIG. 16). Further, in the above embodiment, as the advantageous state generating means of the gaming machine B5, the occurrence of jackpot due to the jackpot processing (see FIG. 14), or the probability change flag 203a or the short-time flag 203b is turned on in S435 or S457 of the jackpot processing The occurrence of the high probability mode or the time shortening mode due to being set to exemplifies.

  In the gaming machine B5, the control means includes a fluctuation display execution means for executing a fluctuation display of the identification information when a start condition is satisfied, and the advantageous state generation means is configured to perform at least the predetermined result by the lottery means. Special game state generation for generating a special game state as the advantageous state over a predetermined special game state period after the end of the variation display by the variation display execution means when the first result which is a part is selected The medium acquisition number acquisition means includes the medium acquisition number when the special game state is generated by the special game state generation means during the series of advantageous states. A special game state medium acquisition number acquisition means for acquiring the number of special game states generated by the special game state generation means. A special gaming state occurrence number accumulation storage means for storing; and a special gaming state medium acquisition number accumulation storage means for accumulating and storing the medium acquisition number acquired by the special gaming state medium acquisition number acquisition means, The medium acquisition number output means includes a medium acquisition number stored in the medium acquisition number accumulation storage means during the special gaming state when the second operation means is operated by a player during a predetermined period, and the special acquisition number A gaming machine that displays or outputs the number of acquired media per time in the special gaming state based on the number of times of the special gaming state stored in the cumulative number of occurrences of gaming state. B6.

  According to the gaming machine B6, when the player operates the second operation means, the number of acquired media per time in the special gaming state (one of the advantageous states) at that timing is displayed or output. In particular, the number of medium acquisitions displayed or output is accumulated and stored in the number of special gaming states accumulated in the special gaming state occurrence number accumulating storage means and in the medium acquisition number accumulating storage means in the special gaming state. Acquired based on the number of acquired media (the number of acquired media during the special gaming state by the means for acquiring the number of acquired media), so that the acquired media is displayed or output as the accumulated data increases. The number (the number of acquired media per special game state) makes it possible to determine a more advantageous stand more accurately by itself.

  In the above embodiment, the fluctuation display execution means of the gaming machine B6 is exemplified by fluctuation processing (see FIG. 10), and the special game state generation means of the gaming machine B6 is jackpot by jackpot processing (see FIG. 14). The occurrence of is illustrated.

  In the above embodiment, the medium acquisition number acquisition means during the special gaming state of the gaming machine B6 includes the processing in S1483 in the payout ball count processing (see FIG. 31) and the firing control signal interruption processing (see FIG. 32). The process of S1503 is illustrated. Further, as the special game state occurrence number accumulation storage means of the gaming machine B6, a big hit number accumulation counter 273ac is exemplified, and as the medium acquisition number accumulation storage means during the special game state of the gaming machine B6, the first acquired ball number accumulation memory 273aa is exemplified.

  In the gaming machine B5 or B6, when the second result which is at least a part of the predetermined result is selected by the lottery unit, the advantageous state generating unit changes the game mode to a normal mode at a predetermined timing. An advantageous mode generating means for generating a mode more advantageous than a mode as the advantageous state over a predetermined advantageous mode period, wherein the medium acquisition number acquiring means is during the series of advantageous states, And it is comprised including the medium acquisition number acquisition means during advantageous mode when the advantageous mode is generated by the advantageous mode generation means, and the game machine is generated by the advantageous mode generation means. Advantageous mode occurrence number accumulation storage means for accumulating and storing the number of advantageous modes obtained, and the medium acquired by the medium acquisition number acquisition means during the advantageous mode. Medium acquisition number accumulation storage means during advantageous mode for accumulating and storing the number of acquisitions, the medium acquisition number output means, when the second operating means is operated by a player during a predetermined period, Based on the number of medium acquisitions stored in the advantageous mode medium acquisition number accumulating storage means and the number of the advantageous modes stored in the advantageous mode occurrence number accumulating storage means, the medium per time of the advantageous mode A gaming machine B7 that displays or outputs the number of acquisitions.

  According to the gaming machine B7, when the player operates the second operation means, the number of media acquired per time in the advantageous mode (one of the advantageous states) at that timing is displayed or output. Therefore, it is possible to determine whether or not the stand is advantageous to itself based on the displayed number of acquired media, and it is possible to select a stand that is satisfactory to the stand. Therefore, since it is possible to play a satisfactory game by the table selected by the player, it is possible to increase the interest of the game that the player himself pays for the game. In the gaming machine B7, the “second result” may be the same as or different from the “first result”.

  In the above embodiment, as the advantageous mode generation means of the gaming machine B7, the high probability mode due to the fact that the probability variation flag 203a or the time reduction flag 203b is set to ON in S435 or S457 of the jackpot process (see FIG. 14). Or generation | occurrence | production of time reduction mode is illustrated.

  In the above embodiment, the medium acquisition number acquisition means during the advantageous mode of the gaming machine B7 includes the processing of S1489 in the payout ball count processing (see FIG. 31) and S1509 in the firing control signal interruption processing (see FIG. 32). This process is exemplified. Further, in the above embodiment, the advantageous mode occurrence number accumulation storage means of the gaming machine B7 is exemplified by the probability change time short-time accumulation counter 273ad, and the advantageous mode medium acquisition number accumulation storage means of the gaming machine B7 is the second acquisition. The ball number accumulation memory 273ab is exemplified.

In any one of the gaming machines B5 to B7, the control unit includes a variation display execution unit that executes variation display of the identification information when a start condition is satisfied, and the advantageous state generation unit is configured to When a second result, which is at least a part of the predetermined result, is selected, a game mode is generated at a predetermined timing over the predetermined advantageous mode period as a mode more advantageous than the normal mode. An advantageous mode generation means, wherein the medium acquisition number acquisition means is in the advantageous mode generated by the advantageous mode generation means during the series of advantageous states; and And a second advantageous mode medium acquisition number acquisition means for acquiring the medium acquisition number when the variable display is executed by the variable display execution means. The gaming machine includes an advantageous mode variation number accumulation storage unit that accumulates and stores the number of variation displays executed by the variation display execution unit in the advantageous mode generated by the advantageous mode generation unit, and the second mode. Second advantageous mode medium acquisition number accumulating storage means for accumulating and storing the medium acquisition number acquired by the medium acquisition number acquisition means during the advantageous mode, and the medium acquisition number output means during a predetermined period When the second operation means is operated by the player, the number of medium acquisitions stored in the second advantage mode medium acquisition number accumulation storage means and the advantage mode change number accumulation storage means are stored in the second advantage mode. The gaming machine B8 is characterized by displaying or outputting the number of medium acquisitions per change display during the advantageous mode based on the number of change displays being performed.
According to the gaming machine B8, when the player operates the second operation means, the medium acquisition that can be acquired per change display in the advantageous mode at that timing (that is, once the start condition is satisfied). Since the number is displayed or output, the player can determine whether or not the stand is advantageous to the player based on the displayed number of acquired media, and can select a stand that he or she can satisfy. It becomes possible. Therefore, since it is possible to play a satisfactory game by the table selected by the player, it is possible to increase the interest of the game that the player himself pays for the game. In the gaming machine B8, the “second result” may be the same as or different from the “first result”.

  One of the gaming machines B1 to B8, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and a ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in an operation port disposed at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning a prize (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display device is confirmed and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which values (including data written on magnetic cards as well as premium balls) are given.

  A gaming machine B10 according to any one of the gaming machines B1 to B8, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, examples of the game media include coins and medals.

  A gaming machine B11 according to any one of the gaming machines B1 to B8, wherein the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the operation of the identification information, the change of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed Special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stoppage is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.

  Control means for controlling a game based on the use of the game medium; and a payout means for paying out a number of game media according to the established condition when a predetermined condition is established during the game controlled by the control means. Medium acquisition number acquisition means for acquiring a medium acquisition number which is a difference between a game medium used in the game and a game medium paid out by the payout means within one special period, and the medium The medium acquisition number output means for displaying or outputting a value based on the medium acquisition number acquired by the acquisition number acquisition means, and the medium based on the establishment of a predetermined end condition that is a condition for ending the special period An acquisition end means for ending acquisition of the number of medium acquisitions in the one special period by the acquisition means, and a condition for starting the special period within a predetermined period after the end condition is satisfied. When a predetermined start condition is satisfied, the medium acquisition number acquired by the medium acquisition number acquisition means is acquired by the acquisition end means within one special period that is started based on the satisfaction of the start condition. A gaming machine C1 comprising an adding means for adding to the number of completed media acquisitions.

  According to the gaming machine C1, the medium acquisition number that is the difference between the game medium used in the game and the game medium paid out by the payout means is acquired by the medium acquisition number acquisition means within one special period, and the medium acquisition It is displayed or output by the number output means. Therefore, in games where game media is used on the one hand and game media is paid out on the other hand, the number of game media actually acquired by the player, not the number of game media that the player has apparently acquired through payout (In other words, the player can feel the difference between the used game media and the game media paid out by the payout means, or the number of acquired media as the balance). In general, the game media used to play a game are paid by the player, so that the player can realize the number of media acquired in the game performed using the game media. It is possible to enhance the interest of games (games performed using game media obtained by paying consideration).

  In addition, based on the fact that a predetermined end condition for ending the special period is satisfied, the acquisition of the number of medium acquisitions in one special period is ended by the acquisition end means. After the end condition is satisfied, When a predetermined start condition for starting the special period is satisfied within the predetermined period, the medium acquired by the medium acquisition number acquisition means within one special period that is started based on the satisfaction of the start condition The number of acquisitions is added by the adding means to the number of medium acquisitions acquired by the acquisition ending means. Therefore, since the number of media acquisitions larger than the number of media acquisitions acquired in one special period will be displayed or output, the player can be impressed that a large number of media acquisitions has been obtained, Thereby, a player's satisfaction and superiority can be enhanced, and the interest of the game can be further improved.

  In the above embodiment, the main control device 110 is exemplified as the control means of the gaming machine C1, and the payout control device 111 is exemplified as the payout means of the gaming machine C1. In the above embodiment, as the medium acquisition number acquisition means of the gaming machine C1, the processing of S1262, S1270, S1271 in the acquired ball number display process (see FIG. 41) of the third embodiment, the payout ball of the third embodiment Examples of the processes of S1483, S1484, and S1489 in the number counting process (see FIG. 44) and the processes of S1503, S1504, S1509, and S3503 in the firing control signal interrupt process (see FIG. 45) are illustrated. In the above embodiment, examples of the medium acquisition number output means of the gaming machine C1 include the processes of S1263, S1266, and S1272 in the acquired ball number display process (see FIG. 41) of the third embodiment.

  In the above embodiment, as acquisition means for the gaming machine C1, in the launch control signal interrupt process (see FIG. 45) of the third embodiment, a process branching to the Yes side in S3501 is performed. It is exemplified that the process of S1504 is not executed. Further, in the above embodiment, as the adding means of the gaming machine C1, in the launch control signal interrupt process (see FIG. 45) of the third embodiment, a process branching to the Yes side is performed in S3501, and in S3504 It is exemplified that the processes of S3505 to S3507 are not executed when the process of branching to the No side is performed.

  The gaming machine C1 includes a launching unit that launches a game medium for use in a game, and the medium acquisition number acquiring unit uses information based on launching by the launching unit and information based on payout by the paying unit. The game machine C2 is characterized in that the number of acquired media is acquired.

  According to the gaming machine C2, since the number of acquired media is acquired based on the information based on the launch by the launching means and the information based on the payout by the paying out means, the number of acquired media can be acquired with suitable accuracy. The reliability of the number of acquired media displayed or output can be improved. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from having distrust in the number of acquired media displayed or output.

  In the above embodiment, the launching control device 112 is exemplified as the launching means of the gaming machine A2.

  The gaming machine C2 includes operation means and operation detection means for detecting that the operation means has been operated by a player, and the launching means launches a game medium based on detection of an operation by the operation detection means. The medium acquisition number acquisition means acquires the medium acquisition number using information based on detection of an operation by the operation detection means and information based on payout by the payout means. A gaming machine C3 characterized by this.

  According to the gaming machine C3, the game medium is launched based on the detection of the operation of the operation means by the operation detection means, and the number of acquired media is information based on the detection of the operation by the operation detection means and information based on the payout by the payout means Therefore, the number of acquired media can be acquired with suitable accuracy, and the reliability of the number of acquired media displayed or output can be improved. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from having distrust in the number of acquired media displayed or output. In addition, since the operation of the operation means is performed by the player, the player can realize the number of media acquired in the game (that is, the game performed by the player) performed based on the operation of the operation means by the player. , You can enhance the fun of the games you play.

  In the above embodiment, the operation handle 51 is exemplified as the operation means of the gaming machine C3, and the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are exemplified as the operation detection means of the gaming machine C3.

  In the gaming machine C2 or C3, the game machine C2 or C3 includes storage means for storing the game medium to be launched by the launching means so that the player can replenish it, and the predetermined period is a period in which a predetermined number of game media are fired by the launching means. The predetermined number is equal to or less than the number of game media that can be stored in the storage means.

  According to the gaming machine C4, the period during which a predetermined number of game media are fired by the launching means is a predetermined condition that is a condition for starting a special period after an end condition that is a condition for ending the special period is satisfied. This is a period for monitoring whether or not the start condition is satisfied (that is, a predetermined period), and the predetermined number is equal to or less than the number that can be stored in the storage means for storing the game media to be launched by the launching means. Here, since the storage means is configured so that the player can replenish game media, the predetermined period is set to a period in which the number of game media that can be stored in the storage means is launched by the launch means. The period during which the player does not perform the operation of replenishing the storage medium with the game medium can be set as the predetermined period. When the player performs an operation of replenishing the storage medium with the game medium, there is a possibility that the predetermined period may be felt as “long”, and during the predetermined period, a predetermined start condition is established and the addition is performed. Even if the media acquisition number is added by means, the player may feel uncomfortable with the addition. On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C4, by setting the predetermined period as a period during which the number of game media that can be stored in the storage unit is launched by the launching unit, the predetermined period is “long” to the player. Since the player can suppress a sense of incongruity with respect to the addition of the number of acquired media without feeling it, it is possible to prevent the interest of the game from being impaired by the sense of discomfort.

  In the above embodiment, the upper plate 17 is exemplified as the storage means of the gaming machine C4.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C3, the control means executes a change display execution means for executing a change display of the identification information based on the establishment of the start condition, and executes the change display of the identification display by the change display execution means. Fluctuation display holding means for holding the execution of the variation display of the identification display by the fluctuation display execution means based on the establishment of the one or more start conditions when one or more start conditions are established. The gaming machine C5 is characterized in that the predetermined period is a period in which the variation display of the identification display suspended by the variation display suspension unit within the special period is performed by the variation display execution unit.

  According to the gaming machine C5, after an end condition that is a condition for ending the special period is satisfied, a period for monitoring whether or not a predetermined start condition that is a condition for starting the special period is satisfied (ie, , A predetermined period) is a period during which the variable display of the identification display held by the variable display holding means within the special period is executed by the variable display executing means. Here, the change display of the identification information held during the special period can be regarded as a part of the special period because the hold occurred during the special period. Therefore, a predetermined period (that is, a period for monitoring whether or not a predetermined start condition that is a condition for starting the special period is satisfied after an end condition that is a condition for ending the special period is satisfied) and The addition of the number of medium acquisitions based on a predetermined start condition established during a predetermined period is easy for the player to associate, so that it is difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable with the addition of the medium acquisition number by the adding means. It is possible to prevent the interest of the game from being impaired due to a sense of incongruity.

  In the above embodiment, the variation display executing means of the gaming machine C5 is exemplified by the variation start process (see FIG. 12), and the variation display holding means of the gaming machine C5 is in the start winning process (see FIG. 16). In S603, data is stored in the reserved second area to the reserved fourth area.

  In any of the gaming machines C1 to C5, the adding means, when a predetermined start condition that is a condition for starting a special period is satisfied within a predetermined period after the end condition is satisfied, The gaming machine C6, wherein the number of medium acquisitions acquired by the medium acquisition number acquisition unit within the predetermined period is added to the number of medium acquisitions acquired by the acquisition end unit.

  According to the gaming machine C6, when a predetermined start condition for starting the special period is satisfied within a predetermined period after the end condition is satisfied, the game machine C6 starts based on the satisfaction of the start condition. In addition to the medium acquisition number acquired by the medium acquisition number acquisition unit within the special period, the medium acquisition number acquired by the medium acquisition number acquisition unit within the predetermined period is also acquired by the acquisition end unit by the addition unit Is added to the number of acquired media. Therefore, since a larger number of media acquisitions will be displayed or output, the player can be impressed that more media acquisitions have been obtained, A sense of superiority can be enhanced, and the entertainment of the game can be further improved.

  In the above embodiment, as the adding means of the gaming machine C6, the process of S3503 in the launch control signal interrupt process (see FIG. 45) of the third embodiment is exemplified.

  In any of the gaming machines C1 to C6, there is provided a non-display unit that hides the medium acquisition number displayed by the medium acquisition number output unit when the end condition is satisfied. Game machine C7.

  According to the gaming machine C7, when the end condition is satisfied, the medium acquisition number displayed by the medium acquisition number output unit is hidden by the non-display unit, so that the special period ends. Therefore, it is possible to suppress giving the player a sense of incongruity as if the number of acquired media has been acquired. Therefore, the period of a series of advantageous states can be extended without a sense of incongruity, and the interest of the game can be prevented from being impaired by the sense of incongruity.

  In the above embodiment, the non-display means of the gaming machine C6 is exemplified by the process of S1279 in the acquired ball number display process (see FIG. 41) of the third embodiment.

  One of the gaming machines C1 to C7, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and a ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in an operation port disposed at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning a prize (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display device is confirmed and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which values (including data written on magnetic cards as well as premium balls) are given.

  A gaming machine C9 according to any one of the gaming machines C1 to C7, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, examples of the game media include coins and medals.

In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C7, the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the operation of the identification information, the change of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. Special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stoppage is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.
<Others>
Conventionally, for gaming machines, for example, when a start condition is established, a lottery is performed, and when a predetermined result is selected by the lottery, a special gaming state (for example, a gaming state called a win or the like) ). In addition, for example, after a special gaming state is ended, the gaming machine is in a predetermined advantageous state (for example, a state called probability variation or probability variation, a state called time reduction or time reduction, etc.) for a predetermined period. Some are generated (for example, JP 2011-072569 A).
In the gaming machines exemplified above, it is always required to improve the interest of the game. This technical idea has been made in view of the above-described circumstances and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of the game.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 includes a control unit that controls a game based on the use of a game medium, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied during a game controlled by the control unit. And a payout means for paying out a number of game media according to the established condition, and detecting the operation means operable by the player and the operation means being operated by the player Based on detection of an operation by the operation detection means, a launching means for launching a game medium for use in a game, information based on detection of an operation by the operation detection means, and payout by the payout means Medium acquisition number acquisition means for acquiring a medium acquisition number that is a difference between a game medium used in the game and a game medium paid out by the payout means using information based on And a medium win number outputting means for displaying or outputting the obtained value based on the medium tally by the acquisition means.
The gaming machine described in the technical idea 2 is the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, and includes a second operation unit that can be operated by a player, and the medium acquisition number output unit is configured to output the second medium acquisition unit during a predetermined period. When the operation means is operated by a player, a value based on the number of medium acquisitions acquired by the medium acquisition number acquisition means is displayed or output.
The gaming machine described in the technical idea 3 is the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 or 2, wherein the control means performs a lottery means for performing a lottery when a start condition is established, and a predetermined result is obtained by the lottery means. An advantageous state generating means for generating an advantageous state that is advantageous compared to the normal state when selected, and a variation display executing means for executing a variable display of identification information when a starting condition is satisfied, the advantageous state When the first result that is at least a part of the predetermined result is selected by the lottery means, the generating means sets the special game state as the advantageous state after the change display by the change display executing means ends. Special game state generation means for generating a predetermined special game state period is included, and the medium acquisition number acquisition means is based on one or a plurality of advantageous states generated by the advantageous state generation means. A special game state medium acquisition number acquisition means for acquiring the medium acquisition number during a series of advantageous state periods and a special game state generated by the special game state generation means. The gaming machine includes a special gaming state occurrence number accumulation storage unit that accumulates and stores the number of special gaming states generated by the special gaming state generation unit, and the number of medium acquisitions during the special gaming state. A medium acquisition number accumulative storage means during special gaming state for accumulating and storing the medium acquisition number acquired by the acquisition means, and the medium operation number output means is configured such that the second operation means is a game during a predetermined period. When operated by a user, the number of medium acquisitions stored in the medium acquisition number cumulative storage means during the special game state and the special game stored in the special game state occurrence number accumulation storage means Based on the number of state, the media acquisition count per the special game state, it is to display or output.
In the gaming machine described in the technical idea 4, in any one of the technical ideas 1 to 3, the control unit selects a lottery unit that performs a lottery when a start condition is satisfied, and a predetermined result is selected by the lottery unit. And an advantageous state generating means for generating an advantageous state that is advantageous compared to a normal state, and a variable display executing means for executing a variable display of identification information when a start condition is satisfied, the advantageous state generating means When the second result, which is at least a part of the predetermined result, is selected by the lottery means, the game mode is set at a predetermined timing and the mode more advantageous than the normal mode is set as the predetermined advantageous state. An advantageous mode generating means for generating over an advantageous mode period is included, and the medium acquisition number acquiring means is during the series of advantageous states and by the advantageous mode generating means. A medium acquisition number acquisition unit in the advantageous mode for acquiring the medium acquisition number when the generated advantageous mode is in progress and the variable display is executed by the variable display execution unit; A variable mode cumulative number storage means for accumulating and storing the number of variable displays executed by the variable display executing means in the advantageous mode generated by the advantageous mode generating means; and during the advantageous mode An advantageous mode medium acquisition number accumulation storage means for accumulating and storing the medium acquisition number acquired by the medium acquisition number acquisition means, and the medium acquisition number output means includes the second operation means during a predetermined period. Is operated by the player, the number of medium acquisitions stored in the advantage mode medium acquisition number accumulation storage means and the advantage mode change number accumulation storage means stored in the advantage mode. Based on the number of times of which the variable display that is, the media acquisition count per the variable display during the advantageous mode is for displaying or outputting.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the medium acquisition number that is the difference between the game medium used in the game and the game medium paid out by the payout means is acquired by the medium acquisition number acquisition means, and the medium acquisition number output Displayed or output by means. Therefore, in games where game media is used on the one hand and game media is paid out on the other hand, the number of game media actually acquired by the player, not the number of game media that the player has apparently acquired through payout (In other words, the number of acquired media, which is the difference between the used game media and the game media paid out by the payout means) can be realized by the player. In general, the game media used to play a game are paid by the player, so that the player can realize the number of media acquired in the game performed using the game media. There is an effect that it is possible to enhance the interest of games (games performed using game media obtained by paying a consideration).
Further, according to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, it is configured such that a game medium is launched based on detection of an operation of the operation means by the operation detection means. Is acquired based on information based on the detection of information and information based on payout by the payout means, so that the number of medium acquisitions can be acquired with suitable accuracy, and the reliability of the number of medium acquisitions displayed or output is improved. be able to. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from having distrust in the number of acquired media displayed or output.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effect produced by the technical idea 1, the following effect is produced. The medium acquisition number acquired by the medium acquisition number acquisition means is displayed or output by the medium acquisition number output means when the player operates the second operation means during a predetermined period. Therefore, a value based on the number of game media actually acquired by the player (that is, the number of acquired media) can be reported to the player at a timing desired by the player in a predetermined period. As a result, it becomes possible to select a stand that the user can be satisfied on the basis of a value (a value based on the number of acquired media) displayed by the user operating the second operation means as necessary. It is possible to play a game that satisfies the requirements, and to enhance the interest of the game that the engineer pays for.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effect produced by the technical idea 1 or 2, the following effect is produced. Since the media acquisition number during the series of advantageous states formed from one or more advantageous states is acquired by the medium acquisition number acquisition means, the medium acquisition number during the series of advantageous states is acquired. It can be displayed or output by numerical output means. The advantageous state is a state that is more advantageous than the normal state and is also advantageous to the player, so that the player can balance the game media during the series of such advantageous states (that is, the number of acquired media). By displaying and referring to the value based on this, there is an effect that it becomes possible to select a more advantageous stand (game machine) by itself.
Further, when the player operates the second operation means, the number of acquired media per time in the special gaming state (one of the advantageous states) at that timing is displayed or output. In particular, the number of medium acquisitions displayed or output is accumulated and stored in the number of special gaming states accumulated in the special gaming state occurrence number accumulating storage means and in the medium acquisition number accumulating storage means in the special gaming state. Acquired based on the number of acquired media (the number of acquired media during the special gaming state by the means for acquiring the number of acquired media), so that the acquired media is displayed or output as the accumulated data increases. The number (the number of acquired media per special game state) has an effect of making it possible to determine a more advantageous stand by itself with higher accuracy.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 4, in addition to the effect produced by any of the technical ideas 1 to 3, the following effect is produced. Since the media acquisition number during the series of advantageous states formed from one or more advantageous states is acquired by the medium acquisition number acquisition means, the medium acquisition number during the series of advantageous states is acquired. It can be displayed or output by numerical output means. The advantageous state is a state that is more advantageous than the normal state and is also advantageous to the player, so that the player can balance the game media during the series of such advantageous states (that is, the number of acquired media). By displaying and referring to the value based on this, there is an effect that it becomes possible to select a more advantageous stand (game machine) by itself.
Further, when the player operates the second operating means, the number of medium acquisitions that can be acquired per change display in the advantageous mode at that timing (that is, once the start condition is satisfied) is displayed or output. Is done. In particular, the number of medium acquisitions displayed or output includes the number of variable displays executed in the advantageous mode accumulated and stored in the advantageous mode fluctuation number accumulating storage means, and the advantageous mode medium acquisition number accumulating storage means. Is acquired based on the number of medium acquisitions accumulated and stored (the number of medium acquisitions acquired by the medium acquisition number acquisition means during the advantageous mode). The output medium acquisition number (the number of medium acquisitions that can be acquired per change display in the advantageous mode) has an effect of making it possible to determine a more advantageous platform by itself more accurately.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
51 operation handle (operation means)
51a touch sensor (operation detection means)
110 Main controller (control means)
111 payout control device (payout means)
112 firing control device (launching means)
117 Production control device (control means)
273h advantageous state big hit ball number memory (medium acquisition number storage means)
S204 change display execution means
S205 advantageous state generating means, special advantageous state generating means
S453 advantageous mode setting means
S457 advantageous mode setting means
S603 lottery means, change display hold means
S1105 Medium acquisition number output means
S1483 medium acquisition number acquisition means
S1503 medium acquisition number acquisition means

Claims (4)

Control means for controlling a game based on the use of the game medium; and a payout means for paying out a number of game media according to the established condition when a predetermined condition is established during the game controlled by the control means. In a gaming machine equipped with
Operation means that can be operated by the player;
Operation detecting means for detecting that the operating means has been operated by the player;
A launching means for launching a game medium for use in a game based on detection of an operation by the operation detection means;
Using the information based on the detection of the operation by the operation detecting means and the information based on the payout by the payout means, the number of acquired media that is the difference between the game media used in the game and the game media paid out by the payout means Medium acquisition number acquisition means for acquiring
A gaming machine comprising a medium acquisition number output means for displaying or outputting a value based on the medium acquisition number acquired by the medium acquisition number acquisition means. A second operating means operable by the player;
The medium acquisition number output means displays or outputs a value based on the medium acquisition number acquired by the medium acquisition number acquisition means when the second operation means is operated by a player during a predetermined period. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the gaming machine is a thing. The control means includes
Lottery means for performing lottery when the start condition is satisfied;
When a predetermined result is selected by the lottery means, an advantageous state generating means for generating an advantageous advantageous state compared to the normal state;
Fluctuation display execution means for executing a variation display of the identification information when the start condition is satisfied,
The advantageous state generating means includes
When the first result, which is at least a part of the predetermined result, is selected by the lottery means, the special game state is set as the advantageous state after the change display by the change display execution means, and the predetermined special game Comprising special gaming state generating means for generating over a state period,
The medium acquisition number acquisition means includes:
When a special gaming state is generated by the special gaming state generation unit during a series of advantageous states formed from one or a plurality of advantageous states generated by the advantageous state generation unit Including a medium acquisition number acquisition means in a special gaming state for acquiring the medium acquisition number in
The gaming machine
Special game state occurrence number accumulation storage means for accumulating and storing the number of special game states generated by the special game state generation means;
Special game state medium acquisition number accumulating storage means for accumulating and storing the medium acquisition number acquired by the special game state medium acquisition number acquisition means;
The medium acquisition number output means includes:
When the second operating means is operated by a player during a predetermined period, the number of medium acquisitions stored in the medium acquisition number cumulative storage means during the special gaming state and the special gaming state occurrence number cumulative storage means The game according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the number of acquired media per time in the special gaming state is displayed or output based on the number of times of the special gaming state stored in the game. Machine. The control means includes
Lottery means for performing lottery when the start condition is satisfied;
When a predetermined result is selected by the lottery means, an advantageous state generating means for generating an advantageous advantageous state compared to the normal state;
Fluctuation display execution means for executing a variation display of the identification information when the start condition is satisfied,
The advantageous state generating means includes
When the second result which is at least a part of the predetermined result is selected by the lottery means, the game mode is set to a mode more advantageous than the normal mode at a predetermined timing, and the mode is set to the predetermined mode. Comprising advantageous mode generation means for generating over a period of time;
The medium acquisition number acquisition means includes:
The medium acquisition during the series of advantageous states, in the advantageous mode generated by the advantageous mode generating means, and when the variable display is executed by the variable display executing means. Comprising medium acquisition number acquisition means during advantageous mode for acquiring the number,
The gaming machine is
In the advantageous mode, the number of changes in the advantageous mode is stored in the advantageous mode generated by the advantageous mode generating means.
An advantageous mode medium acquisition number accumulating storage means for accumulating and storing the medium acquisition number acquired by the advantageous mode medium acquisition number acquisition means;
The medium acquisition number output means includes:
When the second operation means is operated by a player during a predetermined period, the number of medium acquisitions stored in the advantage mode medium acquisition number accumulation storage means and the advantage mode fluctuation number accumulation storage means when the player operates the second operation means. 4. The medium acquisition number per display of the variable display during the advantageous mode is displayed or output based on the stored number of the variable displays. The gaming machine described in Crab.

Images